THE FAR COUNTRY

i- 1

107567

Dedicated to
the ECK

INTRODUCTION

There comes a time in the spiritual history of man
when he must meet with crises like those today which
are devastating to him both in Soul and consciousness.

The deep concern which I have for the human race
and the individual has brought about this book The
Far Country. I have tried to lay down the patterns
of the most breathtaking and far reaching esoteric
teachings known to man. The contents should settle
many of the problems which man faces in the spiritual
and material climax of these times.

Rebazar Tarzs, the great ECK Master, from the
eastern region of Tibet, is the moving figure in this
book. He went through a complete series of dialogues
with me, about the whole works of ECKANKAR, the
ancient science of Soul Travel. He also included in
these discourses the planes beyond the physical
senses. Hence the title The Far Country, meaning
those worlds which are generally invisible to man and
his outer facilities.

Rudyard Kipling once wrote a short story with the
same title. It was about a man who had a vision of the
world beyond his physical senses as a child, and again
when a soldier dying on the battlefield.

The Far Country is a matchless piece of litera-
ture of divine wisdom. There are few sacred writings in
the world today which can equal it in its beauty and
revelation of the God worlds and what is contained
within them. This manuscript gives the ways of
reaching God, the various planes and what are on

them, the philosophy and doctrine of ECKANKAR. It
contains almost everything within it that is needed for
the God seeker to have in his hands to find the
heavenly kingdom.

Whoever reads and studies The Far Country
becomes an inspired person for the relationship
between the ECK chela and the MAHANTA, the
Living ECK Master is clearly outlined. In pursuit of
the God-Consciousness it is shown how the jig-saw of
life will fall logically into place. Any one piece, even a
small one, may bring about revolutionary results if left
out of the pattern of life for the individual ECK chela.

As the theme of God-Realization is developed in this
manuscript, one becomes aware that there is a con-
stant revelation of the greater results of Soul Travel
with each trip into the inner worlds. Rebazar Tarzs
never lets up with the reader, who is considered the
chela, the God seeker, but keeps him always aware of
the tangible insight between free will and fate, and the
understanding of human conflicts as well as those of
karma and non-karma patterns.

It is quite certain that if the reader will spend
anytime at all in the study of this manuscript he will
come to know that ECK is the highest of all paths to
God. That there is no other way to gain spiritual
enlightenment.

Paul Twitchell

8

Chapter 1
THE FAR COUNTRY

The Far Country is a vast world lying beyond what
the human race calls the earth planet and which
apparently has not been explored by either the
scientists or politicians for materialist glory.

It is a magnificent series of spiritual universes where
the Tuza* goes, following the disposal of its earthly
body in that phenomena called death, and where so
many travel in their Atma-Sarupt body from this
earth plane.

The Far Country has many names. The Greeks
called it the Elysian fields, or the Isles of the Blessed,
Happy Isles, Fortunate Isles, and the Garden of
Hesperides; the Scandinavians give it the names,
Valhalla and Asgard; the American Indians knew it as
the Happy Hunting Grounds, and the Hebrews as
Canaan, or the Promised Land.

The Buddhists call it Nirvana and the Christians
know it as Paradise or Heaven. Other religions have
various names for this afterworld where all disem-
bodied entities live.

Rudyard Kipling wrote a story of a boy who had a
glimpse of this Far Country. Occasionally he would see
the vision as he progressed into manhood. He yearned
to enter that Far Country but had no way except
through death. When dying from a wound received in
battle during World War I, he sees the vision of the

*Tuza the Soul in ECKANKAR terminology.
tAtma Sarup the soul body.

9

Far Country and knows at last he is ready to enter. The
short story was called The Far Country and is one of
Kipling's best.

Those who have had a glimpse of the Far Country
are always unhappy with their existence on this earth
planet. Unless they learn the art of Soul Travel, these
people become extremely restless. Some will commit
suicide in hope of reaching it, but they only defeat their
purpose.

Tom Lea, well known author, did a novel called The
Wonderful Country. It was the story of a range rider
who restlessly searched the southwest on his magnifi-
cent, black stallion, for that world which exists but
could never be found.

Many people have a knowledge of The Far Country,
although they are neither fortunate enough to witness
it in vision nor can they travel through the esoteric
planes in the Atma Sarup body like those who have the
knowledge and ability to leave their bodies at will.

Those explorers of the Far Country, Rebazar Tarzs,
Kabir, Yaubl Sacabi, Nanak Guru, Sudar Singh,
Zoroaster, Buddha, Tulsi Das, Shamus-i-Tabriz, Fubbi
Quantz, and others have been the pioneers of the Far
Country. They left a living saga which must be studied
and admired for its adventurous spirit.

These great ones have given us a philosophy to live
by, but much of it has been misused and often
employed for individual gain, instead of for the uni-
versal cause of mankind.

One of the bolder spirits who constantly explores the
Far Country is Rebazar Tarzs, the great Master of
ECKANKAR, living in the wildest region of the
Himalayas near the Afghanistan and Kashmir
borders, where they are joined by the Hindu Rush

10

range.

He gave me additional knowledge of the Far
Country, adding to that which Sudar Singh at his
ashram in Allahabad, India had already given me.
After extensive exploration of Sach Khand,* Sudar
Singh granted me permission to proceed on my own
through the spiritual worlds.

It was through Sudar Singh while traveling in the
Soul body, that I met Rebazar Tarzs and intensified
the study of the world called The Far Country, during
a lengthy visit with him in the Himalayas above
Darjeeling.

Later, with Gail, my wife, I came to know Rebazar
Tarzs better. He talked several times to us. I began to
leave the body at night and meet with him at his mud
and brick hut in the Himalayas.

Rebazar Tarzs is a man who looks to be in his middle
thirties, but many, including Yaubl Sacabi, say that he
is well over five hundred years old in his physical body.
He is approximately six feet in height, covers his
muscular 185 pounds with a maroon colored robe,
walks with a springy, youthful stride and generally
carries a five foot, wooden staff.

Tarzs' black hair is cropped closely, and is curly
enough not to bother him in the fierce winds from the
icy mountains. His beard is coal black and trimmed
close. His eyes are shining coals of dark fire, his lips
purple and his speech a clipped style as he barks words
to emphasize points he is making. His flesh is dark,
swarthy from the hot sun and winds.

His hands are noticeable. They are square with long,
blunt fingers, and restless. He uses the forefinger of his

*Sach Khand Fifth spiritual plane.

11

left hand frequently to emphasize a point. His hands
are also swarthy from the weather of those high climes.

His feet are large, generally encased in sandals, but
he often goes barefooted through the rocks and sand.
They are as dark as walnut stain.

Rebazar Tarzs lives alone in his little, mud-brick hut
high on a cliff above a torrential blue river, roaring out
of the high glaciers across the valley into the plains to
feed the teeming millions, six hundred miles to the
south in the vast sweltering midlands.

The view is breath-taking. Miles across the valley lie
the wild outposts of Afghanistan. Due north, beyond
the flat, monotonous plains, rise the jagged ranges of
the Hindu Kush, the snow white tip of Tirich Mir,
rising 25,263 feet above all the smaller peaks. Falah,
Sar and Monhil, at 1900 feet are dwarfed beside it. The
mountains are dust-colored by day, indigo by night,
layer upon layer like a succession of steps in a vast
staircase that leads, via the Himalayas, to the roof of
the world.

From far below echoes the perpetual thunders of the
Swat River, hurrying to join the giant Indus, whose
valleys have rung to the march of the invader from
time immemorial. Three hundred and twenty-seven
years before Christ an army that marched proudly,
with the arrogance of countless conquests, plumed,
helmeted, striking terror everywhere, the Army of
Alexander the Great, came through these cold passes
into the soft, warm world of the south.

In this spot lives Rebazar Tarzs. It is a way station

between the Earth planet and the Far Country, where

the Tuza can find its guide and a path to make the

cross-over into the world beyond.

Often leaving his physical body on the rude cot

12

inside the hut, Rebazar Tarzs goes to the Tuza who
needs his help, or to teach in one of the temples in the
Far Country. He is always busy helping others, in or
out of the physical body.

I came to his little hut early in the afternoon, one
day, to discuss with him the doctrine of ECKANKAR.
Above the canyons filled with blue spruce, silver fir
and walnut trees and the roar of the raging river, I
learned more about the Far Country.

We sat in lotus fashion on the hard earth floor. He
began by asking a series of questions, while punctur-
ing the cool air with a forefinger, to emphasize each
question.

"What lies beyond the Earth plane?" His voice was
sharp and caustic. "How many worlds make up the Far
Country?"

He jabbed a finger in my chest. "Where does it lie?
How much do the physical scientists know about it?"

"Nothing!" He barked with his black eyes glower-
ing. "The materialists look at the heavens with objec-
tive eyes, and make use of the canopy of air for the
purpose of scientific progress for the worship of the
commercial Gods of mankind.

"The scientists start from the outside and work in-
wardly toward the center of things. The ECK
Masters* start from the center of things and work
outwardly through the same planes. They see much,
and with realistic eyes.

*ECK Masters Those who leave their physical body and
travel through the Far Country in the Atma Samp body.

13

"The materialist claims there are five layers in the
atmosphere lying upward from this world and that we
are like the primitive savage standing on the shores of
an ocean and wondering how far the water stretches
beyond the setting sun.

"They call these regions or layers the troposphere,
tropopause, stratosphere, ionosphere and the un-
known. The travelers give them the following names:
Sukhsham Desh, Brahm Lok, Daswan Dwar, Bhanwar
Gupha, Sach Khand and beyond these five are hun-
dreds of others, but mainly three known as Alakh Lok,
Agam Lok and the nameless world, often called Anami
Lok, the highest where dwells the SUGMAD.*

"The Vedantists know them as the Astral, Mental,
Wisdom, Bliss and God plane.

"The objective side of these planes is studied by the
scientists and the subjective by the spiritual travelers.
Another advantage the latter has is, they come and go
at will to any plane desired.

"A comparison of the five planes as seen by both the
materialist scientists and spiritual travelers is of inter-
est," he said breaking off here. "Let's have some tea!"

We seated ourselves again on the floor and silently
drank the buttered yak tea for awhile. When we had
finished, he began again.

"The first of these planes is the troposphere, that
which encompasses the Earth planet. It is about five
miles thick at the poles and ten miles or so at the equa-
tors. It is a region of rapid climatical changes and quite
turbulent.

*SUGMAD-Name for God in Far Country.

14

"A layer of storms here, calms there, polar cold and
tropic heat; a layer in which the temperature falls
steadily about 1 degree Fahrenheit for every 300 feet
until a low of 67 degrees below zero Fahrenheit is
reached.

"Eighty percent of the air by weight is packed into
the troposphere. Do you understand this?" He fixed a
cold glare in my direction.

"I doubt if you do, although you've traveled with
Sudar Singh in many planes of the Far Country!"

He sipped his tea and stared through the open door
at the vast world outside and the shining, white peaks
in the distance.

Finally he spoke again. "This is ordinarily called the
Astral world, though we know it as the Sukhsham
Desh, or the Anda, the lowest plane of the Far
Country. It lies nearest the physical world.

"The lower part of this world is the gross material of
the universe of the planets and stars, including the
Earth planet. Coarse matter dominates all but a few
mana(s)* and some Tuzas!

"This region embraces all the suns and planets,
known or unknown to human astronomy. It extends
out into space, without the knowledge of the physical
scientists, far beyond the reach of any telescope.

"The adept returns to this lower region again and
again to help those who wish to untangle themselves
from the darkness of this negative world.

"The capital of this world is at the top of the Astral
region, a plane often called the Turkya Pad, by the
Sufis. The city is named Sahasra dal Kanwal, which
means thousand petalled lotus, the center which all

*Mana (s) Mind.

15

yogis strive to reach inwardly for spiritual perfection.

"The ruler of this region is Jot Niranjan, the being
endowed with the negative power. This power is essen-
tial, for it creates matter in the lower world.

"He is the center of this power, the thousand petalled
lotus, the great cluster of lights, these magnificent lights
which the traveler views when approaching the higher As-
tral planes. Here is the actual powerhouse of the physical
universe, what the scientists seek to understand.

"They have discovered the duality of the atom which
turns from its spiritual refinement, to gather with the
coarser to make matter, a process that physical science is
studying like school children.

"Out of this powerhouse flows the current of lights
which has created and sustains all the worlds in the uni-
verse. These lights are of all shades and tints, but basically
made up of seven colors, black, red, green, orange, blue,
yellow and white.

"These flow off into streams of rays throughout the uni-
verses, and each have their different aspect to assist phy-
sical life on the planets of this universe. For example,
green is the individualizing ray which shows the growth of
Soul in man's aura, for the rays touch every aura in every
living thing throughout these worlds.

"Black is the pure color of the darker or negative side,
while white is the opposite, or highest. Red is the shade of
human love, orange the ray of life, called Prana by the Hin-
dus. Blue is the intellectual ray from which all great
thinkers and creative artists receive their inspiration and
yellow is the spiritual ray.

"If you will take closer scrutiny of the colors in clothes
worn by a person, it will somewhat tell you about the
dominating astral rays in their aura.
"The great Astral city lies just below a shining moun-

16

tain. This is where the powerhouse of lights are caught up
from the current flowing down from the plane above it.

"The city is often called the City of Lights. Here dwells
many of the earth's renowned people, from all ages of his-
tory. Many religious figures live here because they believe
that this is the heaven that they wanted to reach in the
afterlife.

"This is the home of Jot Niranjan who lives in a great
castle within the shining mountain. The ECK* here is the
bell and the conch.

"The Astral region is the negative pole of the whole spir-
itual universe. Life here is so long, that many of its inhabi-
tants believe they have reached immortality. All the work
done by these dwellers pertains to some form of creative
activity.

"The Astral world is always wiped out after several mil-
lion years, in the same manner as the lower material uni-
verses are, and following a long period of equal darkness, a
new creation of the region is begun.

"All who live in the Astral and physical worlds are put
into a deep sleep and drawn up to the next region higher,
called the Brahm Lok, or the mental plane.

"When the creation is finished and a new Astral and
lower physical universes are re-established, the Souls are
sent back to their former worlds, where old threads of exis-
tence are picked up again."

With this he got up again and refilled the cups with tea.
While we drank the hot liquid and shuddered against the
wind which whistled down from the high slopes, he ap-
peared to sleep.

*ECK Music of the audible life current known to the spir-
itual travelers.

17

After a while Rebazar Tarzs aroused himself and started
his discussion again.

"Now for the second region.

"The scientist thinks of this as a no-man's land lying
above the troposphere or Astral plane. They call this
world, the Tropopause. We give it the name of the Brahm
Lok, or the mental plane.

"According to the materialists this region is a thin layer
in which the temperature ceases to fall with increasing alti-
tude.

"It lies many miles above the earth plane and has not
yet been very well explored by the material scientists.

"Sometimes the spiritual travelers call this region the
Brahmanda,* which means the egg of Brahm, and refers
to the name of its Lord, Brahm. This Deity is supposed to
be the supreme being of all creation by the Yogis. This is
the highest world known to practically all faiths, including
Christianity.

"If the yogi or other holy man claims to be a master and
declares that Brahman t is the highest of all creators, that
this is the supreme heaven, he is not a master in the sense
that we know. He is only a humble seeker under the su-
preme ruler of this plane, Brahman.

"This is the top of the three worlds, the physical, lower
and upper Astral It is called the first grand division of the
universes.

"This is the world of the spiritual-material essence, be-
cause spirit dominates it.

"This is the region of the universal mind, whose power is
called AUM. Hence the word Omkar, the power on this
plane, which is still the negative force. The lower part of

*Brahmanda the third grand division.
tBrahman Lord of Brahm Lok plane.

18

this region is that known as the Home of the Universal
Mind. It is from here that all individual minds are derived,
and to that region all minds must return when they are
discarded during the upward flight of SouL

"An ECK Master takes you through this world, into the
next region, for only a master can be the guide, and know
the path, thorny as it is. He is the recognized Lord of all

"All other lords, rulers and peoples on every plane pay
homage to Him.

"When you arrive at the border of this region the sound
of Omkar is heard continuously resounding, like a great
drum. You go up a hill and open a gate, enter a crooked
tunnel, pass on through to the other side. Then you cross
high and low hills where the vision appears to be reversed.
It's as if you are traveling in reverse.

"You pass through a fort like region which is the home
of the ruler, Omkar, and halt, for Soul to become adorned
with the attributes of devotion and faith.

"The seeds of the traveler's karma are burned and de-
stroyed here.

"The color of this region is that of a beautiful, setting
sun. Above it is another part of the world of Omkar where
you find deserts, mountains and gardens. Flowers are ar-
ranged in artistic designs everywhere.

"You will be intoxicated with joy, wandering through a
splendid region of canals and streams, before coming to an
ocean of water over which you can cross by bridge to the
other side where there are three mountain peaks named
Mer, Sumer and Kailash.

"This is a halting place for many spiritualists and
mystics. Some yogis believe this to be their heaven. The
miracles of the mind are performed from this section of
Brahm Lok, e.g., stopping of trains, filling dry wells and
healing the sick.

19

"This world is extremely vast, despite what the scien-
tists assert when comparing it with the physical world or
the Astral plane.

"There are six planes within Brahm Lok, and many sub-
divisions. The chief city here is called Mersumer Kailash,
named after the three peaks of Brahm Lok

"This region is controlled by Brahm whose chief duty is
to channel the great power, AUM, into the region and the
worlds below.

"The function of AUM, a part of the great sound cur-
rent, is to create, maintain and destroy the universes
below it. It is the center of creation of die material and
Astral worlds.

"Many of the great scriptures have sprung from this re-
gion, including the Vedas, Christian scriptures, Buddhists
texts, to name a few. Lord Krishna as well as many other
spiritual leaders make their home here.

Rebazar Tarzs paused for a moment to finish his tea. He
wiped his mouth with the sleeve of his left arm and contin-
ued.

"Now for the third plane/' he said.

'The physical scientists know this layer or world as the
stratosphere which extends for miles into the sky. It is a
region of steady, gentle winds, beautiful clouds and steadi-
ly rising temperatures.

"This is what might be called the ozone layer. Beyond
that is very little physical air.

"The subjective side of this plane is a region called
DaswanDwar. It is filled with a brilliant light. Soul can
bathe itself in the lake of nectar called Mansarover, and
join the swans, those Tuzas known as the Kansas; hence
the name, used by many Hindu Holy men, the Parahan-

20

sas. The Tuza gives up all its bodies, physical, astral, men-
tal, and is purified.

"The lord of this region is known as Ramchar. He is the
power supply station for all the worlds below this one. The
light of your Tuza becomes equal to the light and radiance
of twelve suns, and the happiness and bliss experienced
by It at this stage is beyond physical description.

"While on this plane you are capable of performing
grand miracles, such as giving sight to the blind, some-
times raising the dead and the ability to travel through the
ether in the physical body.

"Here the Tuza beholds itself as pure spirit stripped of
all materiality. It becomes self-realized.

"The color ray in this world is the orange hue, the
stream of the life-giving forces.

"Very few Souls will attempt to leave this realm for the
worlds above. Yet their understanding of the Far Country
is wondrous, for they have an exceedingly good knowledge
of the worlds still further beyond their world

"If the Master takes you to the top of this region you
may hear its sounds, those of the violins. Here you cross
the Tirbeni, a place where three streams meet, hence the
Kumba Mehla, a religious fair held every twelve years in
India. It is only a reflection of this place in the third
heaven.

"Then you enter the region of Maha Sunna, where you
find all the secret knowledge of the worlds.

"This area is many vast earth miles in circumference
and in the center pitch darkness. Four sound currents are
heard emanating from invisible sources; the jhankar* pre-
dominates and is indescribable in human words.

* Jhankar another name for melodies of the lower worlds.
A musical instrument.

21

"Here you are entranced by their music and must force
yourself to leave or you may stay forever.

"Also here are the five egg-shaped worlds, full of a varie-
ty of creations and each permeated and governed by a
Brahm. Each has its predominating color like green or yel-
low or even white. They are quite vast in comparison with
which the entire universe below appears very insignificant.

"He who has gained or attained this region will have in-
creasing powers and understanding in proportions, as this
region is vast beyond description, when compared with
those you have been through to reach it.

"But there is increasing difficulty as you go higher in
giving expression to anything relating to the upper re-
gions. The very ideas in these upper regions are beyond
the grasp of man's thoughts, until he has traveled them
and has the experience. Even then he cannot put his words
into earthly language."

Rebazar Tarzs paused for a few minutes to catch his
breath. I looked out the open window at the rocks where a
frenzy of violent forces were causing a great upheaval of
slate, limestone, lava, granite and sandstone, mixing all
into strange patterns.

The cliffs across from the mud hut showed
formations twisted and turned into gigantic whorls. I
was looking at these, wondering why the SUGMAD
had let nature run wild, when Tarzs spoke again.

"The fourth region/' he said sharply, gathering my
attention instantly, "is that which the scientists call
the ionosphere. Here the physical air is so thin that
there is a constant electrically excited condition which
stimulates the atoms. In this condition the atoms are

22

called Ions.

"There are several layers in this objective side of the
region that serve as reflectors of radio or mental
waves. One layer reflects long waves, the other reflects
short waves. Some short waves pass through the
planes below, like sharp knives cutting through
materials. The mind and radio waves are like light
waves, traveling in a straight line.

"The curvature of the earth would prevent us from
transmitting and receiving radio messages and even
psychic impressions, if it weren't for the Ionosphere
region.

"The electrical mirror in the sky reflects waves back
to the earth, and the earth sends them up again and so
they finally reach their destination.

"Hence, if you send out a strong desire for some-
thing it goes through the same process and returns to
you materialized.

"The spiritual travelers call this region the fourth
plane, or the land of Bhanwar Gupha. It is the home of
the Lord Sohang, through whom the great power
current flows into this region and downwards.

"This divine being lives in a city of great light called
Arhirit. He is filled with majestic beauty and
grandeur. When the Tuza sees Him, Its consciousness
is filled with over-whelming joy. It says to Itself, 'I am
that!'

"This is the meaning of the word, Sohang.

"At this moment of sublime realization, you know
that you are part of the Supreme! In union with me,
the self, and master!

"This is why the Occultists call it the Bliss plane!

"To reach this plane you must cross the pass above
the Hansni tunnel and enter another tunnel, the

23

Rukmini tunnel, where you see a strange and beautiful
structure. Here the faculties of the power to hear and
the power to see are greatly enhanced giving peace and
satisfaction.

"To your right are bright islands, and to your left
many continents covered with palaces, appearing as if
made of pearls, having their roofs covered with rubies
and studded with emeralds and diamonds. Only the
brave can venture this far. That is why Sudar Singh
told you that only the courageous, the daring and the
enterprising would have the SUGMAD.

"This is the city that St. John saw in his revelations,
which were written and passed down through the
Christian New Testament.

"In the distance are the Bhanwar Gupha mountains.
The Sohang ECK* is easily heard. The sound is like
that of a keen flute. You see the sun above with an
immense light and find the world most beautiful, sweet
and full of light.

"The Tuzas living here exist on the sound current as
their food. The roads are sometimes filled with those
groups of Kansas who have been fortunate enough to
penetrate this region, followed by the devotees. They
are trying to reach the regions above.

"There are numerous plains and worlds with a
variety of creations, inhabited by millions of Tuzas
living on the nectar of Bani. Kabir said there are eighty
thousand continents in this world, with beautiful
homes on each for their inhabitants.

"The color of this region is blue, for it is often spoken
of as the Home of Truth, and is the plane of true
miracles, from which all things can happen. But woe to

*The sound heard on this plane.

24

him who misuses this power.

'The physical scientists say there is nothing beyond
their fourth layer. They admit to the theory of some-
thing beyond it, but their physical instruments have
yet to record anything to give them material proof."

He paused a moment, then continued, "On the spiri-
tual side the approach to the fifth region is guarded by a
zone of such deep, dense darkness that none but the
pure can cross it.

"Only he who has the light and power may tread
here in the world of Sach Khand. Here you find dwell-
ing Sat Nam, the lord of all, above and below. His bril-
liance is so great that even one hair on his body, if
there were any, would radiate a light equal to that of
many millions of suns combined.

"This is the true home of Soul. It is the grand head-
quarters of all creation and the reign of immortality. It
is changeless, perfect and deathless. It is called the
God or Soul plane by the Occultist. It is untouched by
dissolution or reconstruction. This is the world of the
ECK saints, where they live.

"The fifth region is the jumping off place for the
Tuza into the great worlds of pure spirit. Its citizens
are only of the highest order, and in such countless
numbers that you couldn't estimate them.

"They live in a joy so great that you couldn't con-
ceive or measure it.

"Within the Soul plane is a fort-like place where is
situated the throne of the Lord of the worlds. You
know Him as the true Lord.

"Soul is now taken by the MAHANTA* to a great

*MAHANTA one possessing the highest of all states of
consciousness.

25

park where the scenery is indescribable. There is also a
huge reservoir here, like those on the earth plane, from
which flows the most delicious nectar through canals
to supply the distant regions of this great world.

"Golden palaces are set in open fields of silvery light.
The landscape is beyond human description and the
beauty of the saints living here is incomprehensible,
the brilliancy of each equal to the combined light of
sixteen suns and moons.

"You reach the real entrance of the city. The watch-
ers at the gates are saints, who pass you through into
the palace of the Lord and you are greeted by Sat Nam.

"He is the first, definitely limited manifestation of
the all Supreme formless SUGMAD. He is the power,
the light, the great Master flowing down and out into
all creation, to create, govern and sustain all regions,
like a gigantic stream of water.

"This is the shabda, the sound current which perme-
ates all systems of the Far Country. This is the posi-
tive pole of the spiritual regions.

"Above the world of Sach Khand are worlds beyond
worlds, beyond physical description. Those living in
these worlds are under the supreme being we call the
formless one, the Advaita, which is the real name for
the formless. The SUGMAD is that which is so beyond
all the worlds that we can hardly conceive that IT
exists.

"This Advaita is not a being, nor anything but life it-
self, a living force that is called the ECK. Your imagi-
nation begs to be relieved of trying to image what lies
beyond the fifth plane.

"When you come to face Sat Nam, you become aware
that 1 Am He!'

"Love is the holy bond that holds all the worlds to-

26

gether. Only a saint can reach this region and travel
into those worlds above. Then he is called a Param
MAHANTA.

"All the ECK power, coming down from the far re-
gions above, come to a perfect manifestation for the
first time in Sat Nam, as the first actual or complete
personification of the Supreme One. He is the great
-Father of all, to worship and love with complete devo-
tion. He is so fathomless and impersonal you cannot
approach Him, even in thought. He sits between the in-
finite light and the created universes, and so in time
when purged of every imperfection you will approach
Him as the Father and receive His gracious welcome
home.

"While still in the lower regions of the Astral Plane
and that of Brahm Lok, Soul is often compelled to re-
turn to the earth plane for rebirth and death, or what
Buddha called the Wheel of the Eighty-Four.

"But when the Soul reaches the pure region of Alakh
Lok, the first of the planes in the first grand division of
the Far Country, there is no returning to earth except
as a redeemer.

"The Tuza becomes a saint himself, and the mission
of Its Master is over. But the Tuza has yet to travel
into the most sublime and beautiful part of his spiritual
journey to the SUGMAD.

"Above Sach Khand are three other planes of incon-
ceivable splendor known to the saints. Here the Lord
of the fifth world, Sat Nam, has taken over and guides
Soul toward the goal of reaching the nameless splendor
of all splendors.

"First, the Tuza becomes united with the very es-
sence of the Sat Nam in a mystical sense, and so, be-
comes a part of Him, partaking in all Sat Nam's mar-

27

velous attributes. Then the Tuza advances to the three
remaining known planes.

"First is the Alakh Lok, presided over by the Alakh
Purusha, and after this is the Agam Lok plane pre-
sided over by the Agam Purusha, or lord. Finally Soul
reaches the end of Its journey, the region of the name-
less One, Advaita, the formless, that which is the first
you know about the SUGMAD, the feeling or the un-
derstanding of the Divine.

"Eventually you come to the SUGMAD in the vast
worlds above.

"No words can describe IT. No thought can embrace
IT. IT is formless, the All Embracing One.

"IT is the impersonal, infinite ocean of love.

"From IT flows all life and spirituality, all truth, all
reality. IT is all wisdom and love and power. All visible
lords of all regions are ITS manifestation. IT takes
forms, many forms, in order that ITS purposes might
be carried out in all creations. They are all ITS forms;
but none of them express ITS totality.

"IT may take millions of forms, but IT, ITSELF, re-
mains formless, impersonal, all pervading. IT is uni-
versal spirit, universal life.

"In the literature of the sacred, this divine form-
less spirit is expressed by many names, such as
ECKANKAR, Nirankar, Akal, Nirala, Anami, Agam,
Alakh, Sat Purusha, Prabhu, Prabhswami, Akashar,
Paramakshar, Purusha.

"All of these words have been coined in an effort to
convey to human intelligence some idea of what the
Saints think of the SUGMAD or Lord God, the highest
power,

"ECKANKAR means the one oneness, the body of
oneness, All, or Totality this is the secret name of

28

God or the SUGM AD which will be creeping into these
talks between us as I go deeper into this philosophy.

"Nirankar means without body or form. Advaita,
Soami, or Swami means the all pervading Lord.

"Akal means timeless: Nirala, peerless, having none
like Him; Anami, without name; Agam, inaccessible;
Sat Purusha, true Lord, the real Lord, as distinguished
from all hypothetical gods. That which is not Sat does
not really exist. Sat means truth, reality, existence.
Hence the fundamental idea of truth is existence. The
untrue does not exist; the true does. Truth and exis-
tence are synonymous terms. Purusha implies being,
and being implies creative energy, the predominating
and presiding Lord, the source of creative energy.
Prabhu means Lord, having power and control.

"Prabhswami means all-pervading Lord, having
power. Akashar means the Lord who has real power,
the actual king of all, like Sat Purusha. This is used in
contradistinction to Dharam Ray, the negative power,
who controls the Three Worlds. It implies law and
order. Remember the more law and order there is in a
society, the more negative it is the more it is under
the control of the Dharam Ray. Dharam is law, order,
system, and it is used to also designate religion, or any
religious system.

"Akashar is Sat Purusha, or Akal Purusha, while
Dharma Ray is Kal* Purusha, or Kal or Brahm.

"The whole universe is considered as One, the true
ECKANKAR. There is perfect oneness in the universe,
which is also co-existent with God, infinite, unlimited.
Hence the SUGMAD is Nirankar, i.e. formless.

"As such, he is without personality, without name.

*Kal means negative.

29

He cannot be said to be anywhere, as he is everywhere.
Since He is everywhere, all and everything, he must be
impersonal. Of course, He may assume any number of
forms; but none of these forms embrace his entire
being, any more than one sun embraces the sum total
of physical matter.

"When the SUGMAD limits ITSELF to some ex-
tent, however slightly, IT becomes Agam Purusha. If a
little more limited, Alakh Purusha, and when IT takes
a definite form for the purpose of administrating the
affairs of the universe, the SUGMAD becomes Sat
Purusha, or Sat Nam.

"Sat Nam is the first, definitely limited, manifesta-
tion of the Supreme Being. But IT is not limited, ex-
cept to form only. Sat Nam, true name, is that which
defines ITS individuality, and points definitely to the
first personal manifestation of the Infinite One.

"The names of the SUGMAD, in other languages
than the Sanskrit and Hindi, are as many as are the
ideas of IT. God is Anglo-Saxon adaptation of good. IT
is the chief good, or the sum total of God. Deus is the
Latin name, signifying something like supreme emper-
or. Theos is the Greek appellation, meaning the chief of
those august powers who sat upon Mount Olympus
and ruled the world.

"Adonai, or Elohim, or Yahveh, are some of the He-
brew names assigned to the god who was first a tribal
deity of the Jews, but later proclaimed lord over all
gods and worlds. He was the supreme law-giver, the
commander of all the armies of Israel. He was the
majestic warrior whose wrath was so much to be
feared. Love was not in his makeup until later.

"We have others, for example, Allah, the Merciful of
Islam. Varuna, the greatest of all ancient Hindu gods,

30

outstanding in the Vedas. Brahm, Rama, Brahma,
Vishnu and Shiva, and a host of others in the Indian
sacred books.

"Zarathustra spoke of Ormuzd and the Norseman
had his Thor. The North American Indian worshipped
their Manitou and each primitive tribe and nation had
a being to adorn, admire, and to protect them.

"The ECK travelers know the great SUGMAD by
many names. For names are only labels. They care so
little for the knowledge of who IT might be, but are
seeking to know what IT is and where IT is found."

He finished, stood up and looked around. Outside the
mountains had turned a pinkish color and then green.
It was time to go and I left knowing that on the
morning, Rebazar Tarzs would start again on his dis-
cussions of the Far Country.

I would be back.

31

32

Chapter 2
THE SEARCHLIGHT ON RELIGION

The Hindu Kush is a high mountain range which
penetrates Afghanistan in the northeast corner and
runs across the nation in a west-by-southwest course.

Hindu Kush means Killer of Hindus. The bloody
events of the past which have happened in this beauti-
ful range of mountains has given it this ominous name.

The range in its northwestern end has peaks above
20,000 feet, with Tirich Mir reaching 25,263. The
passes are some of the highest in the world, that of
Lowarai, 10,200 feet; Darkot, 15,400 feet; and
Baraghil, 12,400. Not the highest passes, they are
among those which reach the top scale in heights in the
Himalaya mountains.

It was a perfect summer day with only a few fleecy
clouds in the sky. The view from the front of Rebazar
Tarzs' mud and brick hut was one of grandeur.

At a distance the Tirich Mir seemed more imposing
than it had at any other time. It is a cold, rough spire
of snow and ice, reaching into heights where moun-
tains are not supposed to be. I felt, as if I were looking
into another world. This peak, like Everest, Kanchen-
junga, Godwin Austen, Nanga Parbat, and Annapurna,
reaches far above the abode of man into the supernal
land, the Far Country.

Sitting there and watching, one becomes lost in
thoughts of the supernatural. One soon learns that this
is the world of spirits and gods and the mysterious
forces of life. In those mountains are the ECK masters
and teachers, as also in the Karakoram range and the

33

Himalayan mountains.

We ate a mixture of what tasted like honey and meal,
drank the buttered tea, then Rebazar Tarzs began.

"Today, I will turn the spotlight upon religion. There
are several great forces of religion in the world today.
When I use the word great, I speak of numbers in each
varied system of faith. Buddhism is the largest in the
world, followed by Christianity, Mohammedanism,
and Hinduism. The other various religions make up the
fringe in memberships, mainly Confucianism and
Taoism.

4 The destruction of lives in the name of a holy being
has been the bane of this earth. The fight between ma-
terialistic organizations, calling themselves religious
faiths under the banner of a true God, is the worst of
the conditions man has invented.

"No savior who came to this world intended to
propagate a faith. Instead he wanted to give a few
simple truths learned in the Far Country, and have
them passed along to those who would listen.

"The ancient masters followed this method. They
hardly wrote anything, for none of their followers had
the ability to read nor write. They passed the word by
mouth. Once they initiated a person into the holy path
which they were following, then they would turn to
another.

"None had a clinging, social teaching as you find to-
day in many of the organized churches. Therefore you
find that religion is simply a social institution, demon-
strably true of the western religions, and woven
through those in the Oriental countries.

"Name one religion which is in existence today and I
will show you that it is a product of the social con-
science, instead of the Truth of the SUGMAD. All

34

laws, which are called the Law of God, are hardly any-
thing except the evolution of the social conscience
from the Law of Manu, the Code of Hammurabi, the
Law of Moses, and the Canons of the Christian Church.

"What do they represent?

"Nothing more than the rules and regulations of the
priest-craft to control their followers, for a political and
economic hold over the multitudes. Didn't Fubbi
Quantz know this when he was challenged by the
people in his day of open ministry?

"What has been more hideous than the caste system
established by the Law of Manu? Or the civil restric-
tions set by Hammurabi's Code, or the refusals impli-
cated in the Law of Moses, or the moral issues estab-
lished by the Christian canons? Restriction, restriction
and restriction! This is all these social indicators
give!

"So this leads us to the set of principles laid down by
Jesus on the Mount. He was getting closer to the
Truth than those who preceded him, but his laws were
merely for the unfoldment of the social conscience,
sweetened for the listeners' ears in another fashion.
What he said was simply that you must do it my way
or you do not enter Heaven!

"Buddha said that everything lay in the middle
path, and eventually you would become the Buddha.
The middle path is the weak path, and the Buddha is
the way through the mind.

"The way is neither to the right, nor to the left, nor is
it through the MAHANTA, the Living ECK Master.
It is not below you or above you but it is here; the way
to enter into the Far Country.

"Christ said that they way into the Kingdom of
Heaven, meaning the Far Country, was within. But he

35

was wrong. He said again in the Gospel of John that
He was the Way, as the Christ. And again I say that he
was wrong!

"Now I tell you," Rebazar Tarzs emphasized with
his left forefinger. "The way into Heaven IS! This is
what I can tell you in so many words this and this
alone, for it is the same as saying that God IS! You
recall that this is said time and again, in every lan-
guage of the human race.

"Therefore the way into the God realm IS; I will
illustrate this by saying that Is or Isness means now,
existence and spiritual reality. I say to you, explain
speech to the homo sapiens. You can try every possible
way to explain what speech is. You call it sound,
words, vocabulary, but it doesn't make sense. Neither
does the Way make sense, when I say that it IS.

"It can best be explained by saying that it is sound.
The human element can do without sight, smell, feel-
ing, touch, but it can't do without sound. This is also
true of Soul. The whole principle of Soul is founded
upon sound and this sound is the way to Heaven.

"Jesus spoke of this sound current as being that
which supplies the Earth world with everything
needed for living, when he spoke of the lilies by the
road. They toiled not, nor spun not for their beauty,
yet they succeeded in being beautiful!

"This is the way into the Far Country! This is the
path which one must follow, yet not one organized reli-
gion teaches that the divine sound is the existence in
all universes. No priest recognizes it in this world.

"This is a part of the ignorance of the priestcraft.
The Christian Church, in playing its part in world his-
tory, destroyed the political power of the ancient
Roman emperors and established its Pope as the

leading exponent of western religious leadership. The
church has held this position since its establishment
over a thousand years ago.

"It has survived schisms when other groups broke
off from the mother church and tried to establish simi-
lar power; but it has always come back stronger be-
cause the Church recognizes that as long as it can con-
trol the social conscience of the Christian society, it
can rule. The Hindu Brahman rulers recognized this
centuries ago, and as a result founded the caste system
in India which made them the highest of the social
classes. Buddha set a precedent by trying to break this
system of the Brahman priests; he wanted to make all
his followers Buddhis like himself, which wasn't at all
possible.

"So as usual, when Soul is implanted within the
body and cannot leave, it turns to cunning and politics.
Buddhism evolved into a church like Christianity and
so have the Moslems, along with a half hundred other
esoteric groups whose leaders believed that it was
easier to be a ruler in religion and live off the people.

"Just like the politicians do!

"You are right if you believe that I am being critical
of religions, or rather, the groups of religions, philos-
ophies and cultures which today parade themselves
under the wide banners of faith. It would be ridiculous
to deny this.

"As you grow older in your observation of the
peoples of this Earth world, it becomes more notice-
able that stupidity is the reigning virtue. The masses
are always willing that somebody takes the responsi-
bility of caring for them. This lack of self-dependence is
brought about by the need of a father-symbol, hence
the seeking out of a masculine deity, and later a femi-

37

nine deity which is called the mother goddess.

"This is the key to the religions. The need of a father,
or mother godhead in order to give service and adora-
tion in the form of worship. The priests, who dis-
covered this in the early dawn of history on earth, en-
couraged the primitive tribes to obey certain rules and
follow set patterns of rituals and rites.

"If you know enough about religions, it will be
observed that the codes and laws of each individual
group have a positive and negative effect. That is, you
are promised a reward provided you obey the codified
rules of the church; however, if you are at all neglectful
of the rules, you are promised a punishment.

"Christianity says you can burn for eternity; some of
the Hindu religions say you can be returned to the
lower form of animal life. Other religions have you sent
back into a stone, or mineral form.

"This is a pretty rough way of saying that you have
to behave and get along with the church or you will be
an outcast; to be an outcast from the church is a social
evil. What this amounts to is something pretty sim-
pleit is a socialization of the various groups of people
in this world.

"If you do understand this, then you know that reli-
gions are hardly anything more than man made, and
that the priests are certainly not appointed by any-
thing other than themselves. A long history and tradi-
tion behind a family, church or state seems to insure
that it's right. Buddhism, which is the oldest of the
modern religions, is far from truth, although it has a
grand history and tradition. This is true also of Christi-
anity, Confucianism, the Upanishads and a few hun-
dred more.

"I don't find that you can put your finger on any-

thing until you adopt the viewpoint of being the ECK,
ITSELF. When you learn the balance of your being
within IT, and IT within the center of yourself, then
you are not questioning your relationships with people,
nor concerned with social institutions, forms and func-
tions of human groups.

"When you have discovered that the social con-
science is not a part of Soul, you are freed from karma,
adharma,* and reincarnation. You will instantly drop
the mind body and enter into the plane of Sach Khand.
Something else you will find to be true, is that the
lords of the various planes throughout the whole grand
divisions of the universes are no longer in power as far
as you are concerned.

"They will continue to rule those Souls who need the
father-mother symbol to lean upon. For you, this is no
longer true. It's as if you had outgrown the president
of your country, and he needed you, but you had no
need of him, whatsoever. This being true, you are
independent, you can come and go wherever you wish,
anywhere in the Far Country.

"The lack of social conscience does wonders for Soul.
It is the key to longevity in the human body. A true
master has little conscience toward the social virtues
and ethics of this world, factors which the priests and
ministers of the church seem to hold so dearly.

"The masculine principle cares little about social
conscience, while on the other hand the feminine princi-
ple is the promoter and the progressor of this aspect of
Earthly life. This is why law and order is a prominent
part of any society. No spiritual traveler is foolish
enough to let himself get entangled with a set of laws

*Adharma wickedness.

39

on any plane; law and order, as I told you previously, is
a negative system. You must understand that law and
order survives on every plane, until you enter the
Alakh Lok, and progress upward until you reach the
world of the SUGMAD.

'This formless thing I call ECK, which previously
was called the Advaita, or formless, which is the name
the Hindu religion gives it, fills the very ethers of the
world in a fluid state, and is a life giving sound, that we
know as the ECK. IT has no laws, no interest in any-
thing except to obey the will of those who use IT.
Beyond the Sach Khand world, IT becomes so sensi-
tive that even the thought of Soul will have effect and
IT rushes instantly to obey.

"Spiritual travelers who have entered into this world
know this and become sensitively careful of their feel-
ings. People in lower worlds have no understanding of
this. These higher worlds of the first Grand Division
are not worlds of thought, but rather of feeling and
assumption, working under that grand quality called
the divine imagination.

"These are the only qualities that Soul must pre-
serve in order to be an inhabitant of these worlds. In
the psychic and physical worlds, man rushes from
event to event and is controlled by circumstances; in
these worlds he, or rather the Tuza, becomes the con-
troller of Its own destiny, as Henley said in his poem,
'I am the master of my fate, the Captain of my Soul!'
This is true when you reach the Alakh Lok world, and
care must be taken to manage the imagination, lest it
run wild and send Soul hurtling again into the lower
worlds.

"Take back to the world what you will of my teach-
ings, but be certain that you include the basic factor

40

which I give you; that man is a social animal when his
consciousness occupies the body but when he lifts it
out of this world into the upper stratum and drops the
social conscience, he becomes Soul, the ECK, ITSELF.

"If I have never given you other than this, nor give
you another piece of truth, this would suffice for the
rest of your days in the Earth world. But like all ECK
Masters, you will never be happy until reaching the
end of the journey.

"Yet listen. The world of the ECKANKAR is an end-
less universe, for there is what might be called the plus
element within it. You never will find its ending. It is
too vast for words, too vast for feeling, and too vast for
imagination.

"Spirit or ECK is the working instrument for that
which we call the SUGMAD. What is the SUGMAD?

"That which we call the SUGMAD is an unknown
quality. Many mystics, Plotinus, Meister Eckhart, St.
Teresa of Avila, St. John of the Revelations, Farid
Al-Din Attar, Jalal-din'l Rumi, and many others never
got near the SUGMAD. They believed that their mys-
tical experience got them near IT, but they hardly
touched the world of Alakh Lok, if at all.

"These mystics, as well as those who wrote the
Bible, the Buddhist texts, and the Upanishads be-
lieved in authority. In the Bhagavad-Gita there is a
line which goes something like this 'Worship me with a
leaf, a flower, but worship me!' This is what Krishna,
the Christ of India, says to Arjuna, his disciple. This is
authority speaking.

"The spiritual traveler who seeks the authority of
the SUGMAD or God, whatever name you wish to call
IT, is on the path to failure. No one, who knows any-
thing about the Far Country, will attempt to look for

41

authority anywhere, be it on this Earth plane or be it in
the worlds beyond, in the Far Country.

"Gasset y Ortega, the Spanish philosopher and
statesman, came closer to the truth when a few years
ago he wrote in one of his many books, 'Man is being
forced by his nature to seek some higher authority. If
he succeeds in finding it of himself, he is the superior
man; if not, he is a mass-man, and must receive it from
his superiors. To exist in a community, men must har-
monize their desires; some kind of general equilibrium
has to prevail. Men who leave the inner check, as
Babbitt called it, must therefore submit to an outer
one; they become mass-men, ruled by their superiors.

'A man without the interior armor of value has no de-
fense against the pressures of his society. It is pre-
cisely the loss of value which has turned the inner
directed person of the nineteenth century to the outer
directed automaton of today.'

"This is what one Soul inhabiting a body said a few
years ago. He was a spiritual traveler who had gath-
ered his knowledge from a plane far inside the Far
Country. But what he said was truth, and you cannot
deny that all seek authority; even the mystics have
sought authority, this being the security which all reli-
gions hold up to mankind on this earth plane and up to
the plane of the SUGM AD.

"The history of the saints in the Catholic church is
filled completely with the worship of Christ in many
forms; the husband of the virginal nun, the Christ
child, the redeemer, the avenger, lover, father and way-
shower. He is in a million forms for the saint, mystic
and well-meaning Christian.

"Naturally, God appears to all men in the same fash-
ion, regardless of their faith and religion. Those who

42

seek the unknown quality have experiences which are
far out of this world, to use the vernacular expression.
Experiences are worthless; you can have them for a
rupee a dozen, or in the thousands if necessary, but
what is the use of such?

"Nothing whatsoever. Man is still working with the
social conscience. Let me give you the example of
Catherine of Sienna, fourteenth century saint, who did
so much good work in Italy for her people. This is all
well and good, but it is still in the field of social con-
science, and that is not what the spiritual traveler
seeks.

"The true spiritual traveler, regardless of what any-
body says in any of the planes here or in the Far
Country, doesn't seek mystic experiences, nor to better
himself, nor is he interested in people or working for
SouL

"He backs away instantly from any authority what-
soever. He calls upon none, not even the SUGMAD,
for aid in anyway, for he knows that it depends upon
himself to solve the issues which he must face any-
where, here or in the Far Country.

"You ask me to explain what he is after?

"Certainly, sir. He looks forward to complete free-
dom, and he is aware that only the SUGMAD can give
him this unknown freedom. It does come in the sense
that it is granted outright; it is not something which
you may have by entering into a certain room. It is
none of these at all, only the opportunity of reaching
this high world where Freedom is. Continuing to dwell
there brings this quality of the SUGMAD for the very
word in the language of ECK means carte blanch, liber-
ty, liberation and independence. In the name of free-
dom, this is freedom, the very essence of release from

43

all encumbered qualities.

"You do not give up the yoke, as Christ said in the
New Gospel, for there is none to surrender. The
SUGM AD is not a superior being or thing in a sense to
take on any of your burdens, none whatever, nor is IT
that which gives you blessings.

"This basic freedom can best be described as similar
to the bird who has power over the kingdom of the air.
You, suddenly, discover that this same freedom is in-
stilled within you, Soul. You have the power over all
things, wisdom beyond understanding and freedom
that is more than you can comprehend.

"These three qualities are what you have been
seeking, and they are gained upon entering the World
of the SUGMAD; Power, Wisdom and Freedom/'

Rebazar Tarzs left off here and prepared some tea.
We drank silently in the white light of the noon sun
upon the walls and roof of the mud hut. It could have
been 120 degrees from the heat that poured into the
place, but he never seemed to be affected. Not a drop of
perspiration showed on that smooth, swarthy face.
I wondered about him in this lonely outpost far from
civilization.

"What do you do with yourself?" I questioned.

The question seemed to surprise him. "I have guests
frequently, like yourself, who are interested in knowing
something of the worlds beyond, or I have discussions
with those travelers we call the saints. Sometimes
trips are made into unknown regions of the Far
Country. Yes, there are worlds yet to be explored on
that side, as well as some lands in the lower worlds,
including the planets and parts of the earth.

44

"I have also used this way station for many Souls
wishing to cross over from this material world into the
Far Country. From this hut I have sent out messages
to others to change the minds of those who wish to
destroy certain areas of the earth world for their own
gain.

"Yes, I've been very busy here/' He waved his left
hand at the bare room.

Its furnishings were little more than a small fire-
place, where hung a kettle, and a cot in one corner
which looked as though it had never been slept upon.
The window on my left had no pane nor any covering.
The hot sunlight poured through. The door was with-
out a covering.

The place was simply a shelter with a roof overhead.
I commented on this, but he smiled and made no
answer.

"Freedom is what man seeks throughout his search
for the SUGMAD," he said, slowly shaking his great
head. " Hardly a Soul seems to understand this in the
lower worlds. Basic freedom consists in having the
possession of a will which can be exercised at one's
own discretion.

"This will can never be taken away or tampered with
at its source. It can be killed by reducing Soul to a sub-
level; or if Soul is imprisoned in a world of hell, it will
exist in a minor form.

"Reaching the world of the SUGMAD gives a free-
dom which is the fulfillment of independence from any
restraint whatever. This is a condition which
encourages and allows for active exercise of the wilL
No outside interference is possible to change the
course of the will for freedom through the SUGMAD,
once it has determined its goal.

45

"The World of SUGMAD is beyond explanation.
None can tell you of its beauty and wonders, only the
results upon the Soul which enters into it and the quali-
ties which are gained. This is a world of pure spirit
and the Tuza, that gains a place here, becomes pure
spirit only.

44 IT, the SUGMAD, is the sovereign lord with whom
the saints have to collaborate in carrying out their
sacred missions of giving the right instructions to
Tuzas who wish to enter into this world.

"Many believe that IT is the great Father, the Su-
preme Guru, and the Light Giver. What you might
say, in trying to simplify the idea of this unknown
quality we call God, or X, that which we know as the
SUGMAD, is that IT is Soul Itself.

"What do I mean by this statement?"

He pounded the earth with his left fist to emphasize
his point. "Now listen to me very closely! This is the
essence of ECKANKAR, the whole of the truth.

"There is no God as known by the Christians, Jews,
Janists, Buddhists, Taoism, or a half hundred other re-
ligions in the earth world and the fourth grand division
of the spiritual worlds that make up the realm of God.
This includes the Sukhsham Desh, Brahm Lok,
Daswan Dwar, Bhanwar Gupha and Sach Khand
worlds.

"Nobody knows within these worlds what the true
deity is. They have no understanding and because all
must lean upon authority, each plane has a mocked-up
God, conjured out of the imagination of the inhabi-
tants of those worlds over periods of time.

"You may not believe this but the example of the
Gods that existed in the physical world can be cited,
e.g., the Greek Gods Zeus, Hermes, and the host of

46

Olympian deities who ruled that world. They were as
real as you and I, in a sense, because man had made
them. They existed as long as the Greeks believed in
them, but when St. Paul who combined an effete Juda-
ism and confused Christianity, founded a re-con-
structed Judaism which went into history as Christian-
ity with Jesus as the world God and savior, all other
Gods died.

"He broke the hold which the imagination held upon
the Greeks and Romans, and established his own image
for the peoples of the western world. He preached a reli-
gion which had a little of everything in it, including the
Hindu, the old Greek, Mithra, Roman and others until
it became one.

"This is how all religions are established, through
the imagination of the followers. The priest establishes
the image, and holds it before the people to worship.

"Billions of years ago there was a mighty deity
called the SUGMAD, known to all the great races of
the world. This deity was so powerful that IT forbade
the worship of ITSELF as God. IT lived in that world
beyond the reaches of all mankind, but IT appeared
often upon the physical plane to prove that IT was a
living being.

"During ITS sojourn upon this plane, IT explained
carefully to the leaders of the races that IT existed
because they allowed IT to exist. Otherwise, IT had no
form, no shape nor any faculties which could be used in
transmitting ITS ideas to men unless they furnised IT
with them.

"In other words, IT could manifest to men provided
they would make use of their imagination; it was only
through this faculty that IT came to this plane. If
enough would believe and concentrate upon IT, there

47

would be a matrix, or rather a mold, formed in the psy-
chic world, reaching up through the planes into ITS
world. IT would use this as a channel and come
through it to manifest upon earth to men.

"The SUGMAD is part of every Soul. IT is the
sacred faculty in men which is called the imagination.
This is the divine spark in all Tuzas and it is that part
which can draw the SUGMAD down to earth or take
Soul up to the SUGMAD.

"This is the great secret which I give you!

"These leaders of men in the lower world wanted to
know how IT could walk among them and teach them.
So IT gave them the divine quality, the imagination,
by taking a little of ITSELF and placing it within each
man.

"The great SUGMAD returned to ITS home in the
Heavenly world when IT had finished with ITS work,
and found to ITS disadvantage that IT had given
away so much of ITSELF that little was left. Now it
was a question of having it returned or IT would not be
able to exercise the full ability of creation which IT
possessed.

"IT possessed this up until the time that it was di-
vided among men, then IT retired into the heavenly
world of the Far Country, watching over all affairs of
those creatures in every plane from this physical earth
to ITS own.

"I speak with forked tongue in saying that IT
doesn't posssess ITS full ability of creation and that
again IT does possess it. It is put this way for you.

"The SUGMAD made all creation, and divided up
ITS creative ability with each creature. By doing so,
IT lost a certain amount of ITS godly powers, but if IT
wishes, this power can be regained in a sense by with-

48

drawing it from each Tuza; yet, to do so would destroy
the Tuza. This is the only thing which the Tuza pos-
sesses that gives it a divine spark of power.

"Therefore, if you are following me closely, you can
see that the SUGMAD cannot do without ITS own
creation, the Tuza, nor can the Tuza do without the
SUGMAD.

"It was for this very reason that when the leaders of
the lower worlds discovered the true secret of them-
selves, a fight between them and the SUGMAD was
begun, in hopes of overthrowing IT. They created
Gods for the lower worlds and put them upon the
thrones of each plane for the people to follow. This has
nothing to do with what the Christians call the Devil
and his demons.

"This is the truth of the imaginary faculty. IT dis-
covered ITS mistake soon after man began to work
with the imaginary faculty, and used it for destruction
and the making of material things for man's own par-
ticular use. The SUGMAD went to work and com-
pletely drove man and his woman out of the beautiful
Astral world into the universe of this existence.

"Here man struggles and fights to re-enter into the
world of the Far Country, but little does he know what
the essence of his nature is. He is controlled through
the priestcraft, the materialists and those who claim to
have leadership in education and in the society of civi-
lized nations.

"Others control his imagination faculty. He has no
chance to develop it toward the makings of a channel
for the SUGMAD, which it was supposed to be in the
beginning. Instead, those who preach hardly know the
true meaning of the Godhead. They preach unknow-
ingly the love of the material and that their savior

49

died on a cross to save them from sin.

"An ignorant belief, to say the least.

"If you have full understanding of the mechanics of
the imaginary faculty and the use of it, you can enter
into the Kingdom of the SUGM AD, the highest in the
Far Country.

"You can become part of the SUGMAD, ITSELF,
and you then become All Powerful and All Wise, like
the SUGMAD. You are able to exercise the same
Freedom.

"Can you imagine the lower worlds being created by
the creatures of the SUGM AD 's own creation?

"This is just about what happened during the early
ages of this planet. After the people became able to use
the divine spark of life within themselves, this planet
began to take shape and was formed into a piece of ma-
terial cosmos.

"It became this way when the SUGMAD let go the
divine spark of life and it fell upon the earth like the
morning dew. This is illustrated in the old Bible when
the Tribe of Israel awoke one morning to find the
desert covered with manna. This is an allegory of the
divine imagination being flung from heaven upon the
earth, for man, in his blind stumbling, to seize and use
for his holy purpose.

"It is said that the SUGMAD called upon a deva* to
carry his mirror of divine imagination across the fields
of heaven to another part of the Far Country. While
strolling along the starry path the deva stumbled and
broke the mirror into a million tiny pieces. The pieces

*Deva Angel.

50

of divine imagination fell upon the world of people, and
were found by the luckier ones.

"Some never found these pieces and to this day are
without any spark of imagination in themselves. Of
course this is only a wonderful fable, in a sense, for all
those who walk the planets of this universe are blessed
with the holy, divine spark of imagination. It is that
many never learn how to use it within themselves.

"The way of the divine path is therefore through the
imaginative faculty. This is the secret path, the divine
roadway to the SUGMAD, the royal road of the ECK
Masters. It has many names, and its simplicity makes
it complicated.

"The imaginative channel can be a forked path or it
can be a straight road into the far world of the
SUGMAD. It can be the negative path of the material
world, or the positive path of the spiritual world. Re-
gardless, it is the path which all people take, and it is
the only way which the spiritual travelers use in their
upward climb into the Far Country.

"The attitude and assumption constitute, of course,
the principles which have been laid down before you.
One must assume that he is going to stay with the
spiritual and adopt the attitude that it is the right
thing for him to do. He will become the highest of spir-
itual travelers throughout the whole of the Far
Country by doing this.

"Travel in the Far Country is assumed by the use of
the spiritual eye, or what is known as the Tisra Til.
This is the third eye, a point in the subtle body, just
above the pineal gland between the physical eyes. At
this center, the spiritual travelers begin their
concentration and from that they go upward into the
many planes of the Far Country.

51

"It is here that the attention is gathered into a single
concentration and the imagination sends it forth into
the worlds above, releasing the Nuri-Sarup, the light
body, which goes out into the subjective worlds alone.
The attention of the spiritual traveler is shifted from
the objective to the subjective and it goes traveling
outward into the other worlds under control of the
operator.

"The body is left in a deep trance. This trance is
often in the form of a deep sleep and, if awakened by
some unusual noise or by another person entering the
room and speaking, it is liable to be killed by the shock,
or put into a state of deep insensitivity from which it
could take days to recover.

"Often the body is guarded by another, for as in the
case of Ramakrishna, it may be days before Soul
returns to claim Its body. Meanwhile it has to be
washed, fed and cared for; so the disciples who know
the art of spiritual traveling can do the proper things
for the body, without injury to it or the spirit which
occupies it.

"If you are working through the channels of sleep it
is needful to take care of the body. Many have died
from the shock of something which occurred while out-
side the body during sleep and the medical physicians
of the material plane have claimed heart attack or
death from unknown causes.

"It is as easy to leave the body asleep, as when
awake. The traveler lies down in bed, puts his imagina-
tive attention upon a series of images he wants to
occur. He knows when the body is asleep, so he steps
out and travels on a certain plane if he wants to go
into another plane he goes through the same process
again.

52

"Projection out of the body during the sleep state is
done in the following manner. First, you lie quietly on
the back, with the eyes closed and throw your
thoughts outward into that world where you wish to
be.

"You may not have ever been there previously, but
you may mockup what it looks like and put yourself
into the center of it. You must have a full perception of
what goes on around you: have the feeling, smell, sight,
taste and hearing of what environs are on the plane
you wish to be. Make the picture perfectly and stay
with it; gradually you will drop off to sleep, and
suddenly you are aware that you are standing in the
center of the world to which you have travelled.

"Do not be alarmed for this projection is simple.
Always remember that the basic principle in the next
worlds is that you can change everything in the
twinkle of an eye. The ethers of the astral and mental
worlds respond swiftly to thought and you must be
careful of how you think while moving about in these
planes. The higher you go, the swifter the vibrations of
the thought manifestation.

"For example, if you are moving along the pathway
of the causal world, which you know as the Brahm Lok,
and your thoughts suddenly concentrate upon a cer-
tain amount of money for the physical body left behind
you when you return it would be lying beside the
body. Sounds very strange doesn't it, but this is how
so many of the travelers manifest opulence. This is
why the holy ones shun wealth as a class because they
know how easy it is to get. To work like the rest of the
human race is something to be scorned. This is why the
saints and magicians laugh at the preachers and
priests of religions. The latter ones know little more

53

than cunning tricks to get money out of people to serve
their own purposes. But the spiritual travelers have
the knowledge and ability to manifest it out of the
ECK current. Yet they seldom will for there is a price
to pay for this.

"The high sounding ideals which the earth religions
preach about hardly can be right. Therefore, if the very
thought of Souls rules the first three worlds, how can
religions establish ideals based upon what they call
morals. Anyone can establish a cult, religion or sect,
provided they have the energy, belief and the knowl-
edge of how this mind power works in the first three
worlds.

"Those so called mystics and saints of the Catholic
church, or other faiths have hardly put themselves
above the three worlds. They believe Brahm Lok to be
the paradise, the heavenly world where all Souls will
find their good reward, where St. Peter stands at a
golden gate welcoming all who have earned the right to
enter into the world of goodness, where the recording
angel has all the deeds one has ever thought or done,
upon the eternal records.

"Naturally this exists for the Christians on the
Brahm Lok plane, likewise for the Buddhists, the
Taoists and all other faiths, for each over a period of
ages have built a heavenly world for its faithful where
they shall go after the death of the physical body.

"This death of the physical body is nothing, but so
much emphasis is placed upon it by the human race.
The spiritual medium, although a negative receiver of
those on the far side of the curtain, brings much truth
about the Tuzas which have gone to the heavenly
world. Some spirits do come through a spiritual me-
dium and speak to those who wish to listen. However,

54

you must be very careful for it can well be the speaker
is not who he represents himself to be. A good test is to
ask him personal questions about things that you both
had together while on this earth plane, e.g., you can
ask a close relative about some intimate and personal
relationship which only he would know, other than
yourself.

"It takes energy to keep one intact and traveling
through the spiritual worlds. The human body is a fine
cone of energy consisting of atoms spinning from right
to left if you could see this with your psychic eye, this
would be the way your body would appear. Soul is a
much finer vibration of atoms spinning and since it's
not so hard to move these atoms, it means the energy
will stay there throughout all eternity. Pretty messy
for the SUGMAD when Soul reaches the real heavenly
world, isn't it?

"I mean that IT is filling up ITS world with these
spinning tops, so it seems. Not at all, for the higher
Soul goes up the path toward the World of the
SUGMAD, the finer becomes Its vibrations and the
less it will be found that It spins, that is the vibratory
rate of the Soul body. In this world It is almost a view-
pointhardly anything more.

"So many think Soul is hardly anything more than a
static piece of atomic mechanism. This isn't true. The
manner in which Soul exists as an entity is through the
vibratory rates of Its light body, and It can live
throughout eternity in this manner for It is self perpet-
uating. It is like the self-winding clock which can never
run down, and since Soul is a miniature of the
SUGMAD, you can get an idea of what this great
Being is.

"I cannot explain to you any more than this. Occa-

55

sionally I will give you a view upon this magnificent
Entity, but to explain what and who the SUGMAD is
in a straight dialectical lecture is impossible.

"We are going to break off here and get some tea.
Later I'll take up the subject of the Disinterested
Works which you will find to be extremely important
in your study of the spiritual works in your journeys
throughout the Far Country."

56

Chapter 3
THE DISINTERESTED WORKS

The movement of the sunlight upon the mountains
during the day is one of the most fascinating phenom-
enons of nature for me. I love the sunlight, and though
often in the hot, tropical countries it may become the
enemy of man, it is still a part of this physical universe
which attracted me to the world.

The great snow-packed peaks, now blue in the hazp
that had settled over the Hindu Kush, were to the
north and south of the mud hut. Lonely against the
cobalt sky they were a tug at my emotions, for the
scene was a reminder of those days spent in the Pacific
Northwest United States.

Somewhere among those awful gorges and upflung
masses of rock was hidden a cold spring of water
known at the Nirmala Charan* or sometimes called the
Waters of Immortality. It lies close to the headwaters
of the Jhelum river.

I spoke to Rebazar Tarzs of these strange waters
which were supposedly a fountain of youth and often
word drifted out to the civilized world about them.
Many had come to this part of the globe seeking but
only a few knew of the location and still fewer ever
found the Nirmala Charan.

"The Nirmala Charan," he said, musingly, in his
deep voice. "Yes, I know where it lies hidden back in
the mountains. Only those who are capable of prac-
ticing the disinterested works may find it.

*Nirmala Pure water.

57

"Among the people of this region a legend has been
circulated which has more truth than the tale bearers
realize.

"Alexander, the Greek conqueror, made a march
over the Hindu Kush range down through the Khyber
and through the lands spread out before him like a
picture post card.

"After that crossing, he gave orders to his sooth-
sayers to find the fountain of youth. They went
forward and found by the Jhelum's headwaters far
back in the mountains a cold spring which was the
Nirmala Charan; here they made a sacrifice and
studied the sacred signs. The signs were propitious. So
they hurried with a skin of the precious waters to the
camp of Alexander on the plains of Peshawar.

"Alexander raised the skin to his mouth and was
about to drink when a toothless man with gnarled, thin
hands and sunken face came forward, shouting. The
ancient one prostrated himself before Alexander and
then cried out: 'O King, if you drink that water you'll
be like me too old to live, too old to die. I drank some
several hundred years ago. Look at me!'

"Many spiritual travelers know the site of these
wondrous waters but none discloses it to the world for
if they did the precious spring would no longer exist.
So many would visit the place that someone would put
a fence around it and sell the water, before it dried out
and became nonexistent.

"A fable to many who hear it, but nevertheless true.
The old man was a spiritual traveler who wanted to
protect and keep the spring hidden from the eyes of the
profane. Disguising himself as an old man, this friend
of the spiritual Tuzas appeared before Alexander the
Great and halted the act of what might have been an

58

onslaught to find the waters of immortality.

"This spiritual traveler is still living in the same
body in these mountains. He is over three thousand
years of age. Perhaps I will take you to him someday.
You will learn much by sitting at his feet.

"Now the disinterested works are those of the bal-
anced mind. The spiritual seeker becomes indifferent
to all things, to all of this life he lives in the physical
world. The Zen-Buddhists have a good expression for
it; after experiencing the satori* you die in the flesh
and become reawakened in the spirit. For the rest of
your physical life on earth, you are dead, and when you
die, life is reawakened.

"You surrender to that divine spark of the SUGMAD
within, and from that moment onward you are moved
by IT, sustained by IT and live in IT. All else has no
importance to your life.

"This is the act of non-attachment to which the
Bhagavad-Gita gives so much emphasis. Lord Krishna
tells Arjuna this: 'But the disciplined self, moving
among sense objects, with the senses free from attrac-
tion and repulsion (interested only as a spectator of the
passing show), mastered by the Self (Supreme) he
goeth to victory'.

"There are five destructive passions. They are:
Kama, Krodha, Lobha, Moha and Ahankara. First,
Kama, or lust is a normal function allowed to run an
abnormal demand where it becomes abnormal desire.
It may include drugs, alcoholic drinks, tobacco, or even
foods which are eaten for the sake of their taste.

"The chief function of Kama is to pull men down to
the common animal level and keep them there. It

*Satori Enlightenment.

59

obliges them to fix their attention on that which is
common to both man and brute.

"It is a principle of psychology that whatever the
mind concentrates upon, that thing becomes a part of
the individual.

"Second, Krodha is anger. Its action is to stir up
strife, cause confusion and scatter the mind so that it
cannot concentrate. It destroys peace, engenders
hatred and turns individuals and groups into enemies,
solely for the purpose of destruction.

"Some of the signs of Krodha are: slander, evil
gossip, backbiting, profanity, fault-finding, jealousy,
malice, impatience, resentment, mockery, destructive
criticism, and ill will. Anger is mental carcinoma.

"Third, Lobha is greed. The function of greed is to
bind us to material things, and cloud the mind to all
higher values. It is the most poisonous of all the un-
holy five passions. As Kama binds man to the animal
plane, and Krodha to the mental plane, so Lobha binds
man to the mineral plane. It makes a worship of the
commercial gods of gold and silver.

"Some of the signs of Lobha are: Miserliness, lying,
hypocrisy, perjury, misrepresentation, robbery,
bribery and trickery of all sorts.

"Fourth, Moha is attachment, meaning delusive
attachment, infatuation. This is the most insidious,
the most deceitful of them all. It creeps upon its vic-
tims, like the others, or it comes with flares of
trumpets like the tamash that goes before the
approach of the king. But it generally comes with the
appearance of well dressed respectability, of noble
bearing and good credentials. It can announce itself as
your ally and friend and its ideals are plausible.

"Moha begins its deadly work under the guise of a

60

most respectable friend. Its method is to blind you to
the relative values of your surroundings and associa-
tions so that you may begin to set false valuation upon
them. After you have become absorbed in them, then
you will have no time for anything else. This is exactly
the purpose of Moha. You are kept forever on the go,
most of the time between work. Moha takes you from
your spiritual traveling.

"Hence Moha is the channel of procrastination. It
involves you in everything possible to keep your time
on nothingness, so you can become a slave to it, be-
come attached to it.

"The main signs of Moha are worries, anxieties and
business complications. None of these have any impor-
tance in the Far Country, so you shouldn't be bothered
with them here.

"Fifth, is Ahankara, vanity, the last of the deadly
five. The word Ahankara has two meanings. First, it is
the faculty of the mind which gives the power of aware-
ness of the Soul, self-differentiation, the I-ness. It is
that faculty which executes the mandates of the
Buddhi, or the SUGMAD, in the interest of self. But
the abnormal exaggeration of this faculty becomes the
Ahankara, which is vanity, or self-admiration.

"Ahankara has a thousand claws by which to dig
into the minds of its victims. Its deadly poison infil-
trates the entire being. Beginning generally in infancy,
it seldom ceases to operate until the death of the body
and then it can still carry on, until Soul shakes it off in
some manner or by the help of a teacher.

"It is the work of self-righteousness which makes it
so strong. It is the last of the five deadly passions to
surrender. Its method is to distort the view point, to
present everything out of proportion, to make itself

61

the center of the world. It destroys all sense of humor.
"Some of the phases of Ahankara are: bigotry, self-
assertion, obtrusive show of wealth or power, bossi-
ness, scolding, faultfinding, liking publicity, making a
show of religion, and being noisy about giving to
charity."

* * *

"The disinterested works include the karma-less
actions," said Rebazar Tarzs staring at me with his
flashing black eyes. "I will show you how karma binds
man in the first three planes of the spiritual universe. I
can also show you that it is possible to escape from
creating karma.

"There is no escape from karma, for once it is created
and the debt is incurred, it must be paid. But there is a
way of living without creating karma. You know that
all living beings in the first three planes of this uni-
verse create karma by every act of their lives. Even the
Bhagavad-Gita says that inactivity itself creates
karma, and no one can escape it. But there is always a
way of escaping it. What is that way?

"By acting always in the name of the SUGMAD.

"The SUGMAD itself is karmaless. So is the saint
who has followed this principle until he has worked out
his karma by living in such a way as not to create
further karma. You can enter into the same plane of
exalted heights through the same actions.

"This principle once applied gives Soul freedom. It
can meet and satisfy all of its own karma, by the aid of
the SUGMAD, and after that rise above the action of
the karmic law. As long as you remain in the three
lower worlds, you are subjected to this karmic law,
unless you follow out the principle of karma-less
action.

62

"Then you are no longer subject to this law, because
you have risen above the plane of its action. You are
free from the laws of all regions where karma operates,
and you will never again be bound by that law.

"All that the spiritual traveler does, is now done in
the name of the SUGMAD. He seeks to return the
divine spark as his sacrifice to the holy altar of the Far
Country. He has no desires of his own, and does
nothing without the full approval of the SUGMAD; all
he does is constructive. If he made any karma at all,
even if such a thing were possible, it would be good
karma; and good karma elevates you.

"Now, if you wish to escape the creation of karma of
any sort, then whatever you do, must be done in the
name of the SUGMAD, while acting as his agent. So
long as you do that, you will not create new karma,
because you are acting solely as the agent of another,
and always the principal is responsible for the acts of
his agent.

"You must do this not merely in a ceremonial way,
but with your entire thought and Soul in it. In deep
earnest, you must let yourself do all things, every
detail of your life, in the name of the SUGMAD. This
will, by necessity, oblige you to do only what you think
the SUGMAD intends for you to do.

"This is the psychology which is a part of the
philosophy of ECKANKAR. Do every action in the
name of the SUGMAD, and you have no responsibility
toward any living creature in the lower worlds, under
the plane of the SUGMAD.

"When you approach a task, or a proposed act, you
will remember that it is to be done in the name of the
SUGMAD. You will fix your mind merely on the name
of the SUGMAD, and in sincerity it will be done as a

63

genuine service.

"The SUGMAD does not. The catalytic agent is the
ECK power which works between you and the
SUGMAD. It carries out your action relieving you of
the responsibility which would otherwise have settled
upon your shoulders.

"You must remember that nothing is your own. All
belongs to the SUGMAD, because all creation belongs
to the greatest deity, and you use your body, mind and
Soul as the property of the SUGMAD. The main point
I am making here is that if you use your mind and your
body and possessions in the name of the SUGMAD,
you are not creating any karma.

"Essentially it is the SUGMAD acting and not you.
You are merely the agent of the SUGMAD, while at
the same time the SUGMAD is your agent. So long as
you are acting sincerely and whole-heartedly as the
agent of the SUGMAD, it is really the SUGMAD who
is acting as your agent.

"Gopal Das, noted ECK Master, said that if you give
all, you will get all. In this saying there is wisdom and
a great promise. It means that if you give up all, mind,
body, wealth and Soul to the SUGMAD, the
SUGMAD must by ITS own law serve you in return.
You will receive riches that surpass all else on earth,
and in exchange for this, you will gain a freedom that
makes you master of limitless worlds. It is not the
SUGMAD that wants you or your mind or body or
property. It is for your benefit alone that the
SUGMAD asks you to dedicate the one thing IT wants
returned the divine spark, the faculty of imagination,
so that IT can become whole again.

"Instead you give up all this divine spark of imag-
ining. This you must never do, for you are a part of IT,

64

and IT is not your own. You must always be yourself,
your real self regardless of all else and become in the
end a co-worker with the SUGMAD.

"You will find the SUGMAD will always keep you
near, work for you, never let you make mistakes. IT
never lets you go, for IT knows what is best and cor-
rect in every possible emergency. In no sense is your
personal liberty ever circumscribed or limited, for you
are more free than ever before. You have no fear of any-
thing; you go where you wish and do what you like
with the most perfect assurance.

"Here is a divine paradox by surrendering all to the
SUGMAD, you gain your liberty. For your will exer-
cised in the right direction is the will of the Supreme
SUGMAD. And that is really the secret of this whole
matter.

"I will point out here before finishing this discussion
on the karmaless actions that there are two different
administrations of karma that of Kal and of Dayal*.
You and Dayal are the same, and both refer to the
Supreme Being, the Lord of the infinite universe. Kal
is the lord of karma for this world and all regions up to
the second division which is called Tirkuti.

"Karma is administered by him in the great bulk of
humanity. In fact it is the case of all those who have no
teacher on this plane. They follow the routine of soci-
ety, and karma holds sway over their lives, from age to
age.

"From the wheel of karmic destiny there is no
escape, except to become one who is a spiritual travel-
er. But the very moment that you have been initiated
into the secrets of the Far Country and can know and

*Dayal-The Living ECK Master-the MAHANTA.

65

practice the ECK, all of your karmic accounts are
transferred to the SUGMAD's keeping, automatically
passing from the hand of the Negative Power.

"After that you, working under the directions of the
ECK, will work in karmaless actions. From that hour
forward, the Kal, or negative power, has nothing to do
with your karmic debts and has no power or control
over you. The agents of death cannot approach you,
nor can you ever be called into the courts of the
Dharam Ray for judgment. Your destiny in this life
and in the next rests entirely in your own hands.

"This all sounds strange to you, but it is one of the
ancient teachings which has been handed down by
word of mouth through the ages. You have received
them to pass along to Gail.

"By practicing the good works the spiritual traveler
conquers, first, the lower worlds and then the higher
worlds. The supreme path called the ECK Marg, is
that which is known as the secret path of the sound
current.

"The Gita gives a small part of the results of this. It
says that he from whom comes no disturbance, who
cannot be disturbed by others,, who is free from joy,
from anger, fear and anxiety; such a one becomes the
toast of heaven. He who does not depend on anything,
who is pure and active, who does not care whether good
comes or evil and who never becomes miserable; who
has given up all efforts for himself alone; such a one is
heavenward bound.

"A man winneth not freedom from karma by ab-
staining from action, nor does he, by renunciation, rise
to perfection. No one can, for an instant, remain wholly
actionless. Helpless is every one in this world, each
driven to action which results in nothingness.

"All comes to him who has control of his senses by
the mind, with the organs of the senses uninterested in
what he does. He is worthy of the SUGMAD.

"I did not give you the correct wording, but rather in
my own, so that you would get the meaning.

"The disinterested works are done by the art of indif-
ference.

"Let me point out here the value of training for Soul
in its spiritual journeys in the realms of God. As the
spiritual traveler, you must learn and know where all
the dangers lie, for if you don't there is much trouble to
be met.

"The chela may, as an untrained traveler, meet with
weird and unusual experiences which are frightening
to the core of being. They are mostly the fantasies of
the mind! But once you leave the first division and
enter into those worlds beyond, it all changes.

"You take control of your destiny."

Rebazar Tarzs became silent for a time. He sat cross
legged upon the dirt floor, bending forward while
making marks with his left forefinger on it.

After awhile he spoke again. This time he said, "The
oldest and biggest question ever propounded to human
intelligence is: How does one find God?

"I have just answered that question in speaking
about the disinterested works, which are gained by the
art of indifference. To be indifferent to anything is to
kill it, to destroy it completely. One doesn't know that
all things come to an end when attention is withdrawn
from it.

"This is interesting because only the disinterested
find their way into the Far Country and come to rest at

67

the throne of the SUGMAD. The disinterested are
those who have a determination to reach the highest
heaven, but care little if they do. They are not dis-
appointed in the many things of life which come their
way; they couldn't care less if they didn't have money.

"This is an art that comes only with practice. One
might say it is a professional art to love too much or
too little is terrible for the heart, and hard for the emo-
tions. That Soul who does is bound to lose in the long
stretch of life, and will hardly get any further than the
world of Brahm Lok.

"Man can't be interested in all things at a time. His
attention must be centered somewhere, and as long as
it is dwelling upon the SUGMAD then it can't be put
in other directions. To split the attention is the desire
of those enemies who wish to take you away from your
goal.

"There is a certain technique about this art of indif-
ference which I find difficult to explain. It's an indiffer-
ence which comes with the practice of not letting any-
thing reach the core of your being. By putting himself
outside of all materialistic and emotional matters, the
spiritual traveler can journey through the planes of the
Far Country into the highest heaven.

"Let me give you an example. Look at the sea with
its great breakers washing up against the shores of the
long coast. The sea is pliant; you can pick it up in your
hands, throw it on the sands, and beat it, but it still
breaks off into drops. It is nothing when you finish
with it, but it is still water, the great sea, which made
up of many drops, becomes a vast ocean.

"Also there is the wind. What can you do with the
wind? Can you catch it in your hands? It cannot be des-
troyed, nor can it be pierced with a sword. It is like

68

Soul for it never dies, and for this very reason the wind
is considered by many ancients as a part of the
SUGMAD's breath, or ECK, the spirit.

"This is the way that the center of your very being
can be. It can be beaten, lashed, pierced with a sword,
submerged in water, and taken to a high peak to be
pushed off. But it cannot be destroyed. By knowing
this, you become invulnerable like Achilles, who except
for his right heel couldn't be killed. He had been dipped
in the river Styx but his mother failed to put this heel
underwater, and as result he was killed at Troy when
shot through the heel by a poisonous arrow.

"You are without a spot which can be vulnerable to
the arrows and slings of gossip, or the weapons of war
which are flung at you by the enemies of the Far Coun-
try. Now there is a way of taking care of these misfor-
tunes and dreary places of the earth life. There is a way
by which you become immortal.

"In the world of Das wan Dwar is a river called Man-
sarover, a stream of the sweet nectar of the heavenly
gods which flows out of a lake of the same name. Once
you, the spiritual traveler, bathe in this river of immor-
tality, nothing can harm you. This is your insurance
against karma, your place among the gods of the uni-
verse.

"All those who lived on this earth in those early ages
of its development were bathed in this strange river.
Hence their long lives, and the factor that they were
the gods who walked this earth and were inveigled into
marrying the daughters of men; finally they
disappeared because they lost their divinity. Not lost it
but forgot it, all because the women of the earth whom
they married kept telling them that they were not gods
but ordinary people.

69

"The gods came down to the earth and became men.
Of themselves, women don't understand that they too
could be goddesses, but this they can't understand.

"I'm going off the point for a moment here, to speak
about women and the earth plane. Women are respon-
sible for religion. They must have a yardstick or an
authority upon which to lean. They act with inde-
pendence and make believe that all is well with them-
selves and the world.

"The ancient Greek women were likely better off in
their status in life than in these days when there is a
supposedly developed equality of social status.

"So much for that.

"The path of indifference which I've been discussing
is paradoxical. You have the problem of desire. Buddha
probably brought out more about this than any other
savior who came to this earth. He taught the art of
desirelessness to all his disciples. If you want to be
free, have no desires. Do not put possessiveness upon
anything of a material or spiritual nature.

"The three lower worlds are fleeting worlds of tem-
poral events. Therefore nothing is lasting in them, nor
should anyone put their faith and belief in this world of
materialistic nature. Here everything is compounded
of parts, and is therefore subject to dissolution. Every-
thing which arises is produced by some cause.

"Desire of course is a part of karma. By desires we
are bound to the objects of desire. This is a fixed law of
nature on this plane. Whatever you desire begins at
once to travel toward you, unless a stronger desire
from a different source attracts the attention to it.
Attention and love are the means of connecting us with
objects external to ourselves. Everything in the uni-
verse is subject to Newton's laws of motion. By desires

70

we become lost in this world. Remember that Buddha
claimed that desire is the cause of all suffering?

"This is why the complete detachment of self from
every worldly object is necessary. It avoids bondage to
those things. This is why you should love nothing with
a desire to possess. The moment that you do this,
desire something material or spiritual, you enter into
the first stages of slavery. You shouldn't even desire
rewards for your actions. Anyone who looks to rewards
will become a slave to such rewards. So long as man
craves rewards, he is bound to those rewards and Yin
Quo, here I'm using the Chinese word for karma, is his
master.

"It is with complete Vairag* that one enters into the
world of the SUGMAD. Man must attain this state of
mind which is like the sun, shining upon all alike, yet
asking nothing in return. Soul lives forever by giving;
not by receiving.

"This is the grand paradox, not only of all spiritual
thought, but of all that ECK has to offer. You get most
by not wanting anything, but working in the same
manner only by giving.

"Conversely, by receiving much you impoverish
yourself. By selfish accumulation you become bank-
rupt. As Emerson, the American philosopher, said,
'you run in your own debt. ' For in the long run, you can
never get something for nothing. Each piece of coin
must be repaid, no matter how it is paid, if it isn't
earned in the spiritual sense. The law of balance in the
spiritual realms is just as inflexible as the law of gravi-
tation. To give and give only, not once thinking of
rewards, is the beginning of immortality. No man

*Vairag Mental detachment.

71

becomes a Buddha, a Kakusha, a Tathagata or
Bodhisattva by fleeing from pain or by seeking com-
forts or demanding rewards.

"Accept all alike that comes to you, and go on
giving, make yourself open to the ECK.

"Sorrow is born of desire. This being truth, then
what use is the good for knowledge unless it has a cure
for desire itself? To read a book or listen to a lecture on
the subject will never remove desire, nor will it allevi-
ate sorrow.

"It is useless to tell any man that he must overcome
sorrow. He cannot do it, and would fight if you tried to
force him to stop. The mad vortex of desires which is
attacking man, in a way of speaking, is keeping him
constantly at war with his fellow man, and causing
each nation to destroy the other.

"It still remains a fact of history that not one man
has ever controlled his senses disinterestedly, just by
the power of his will, simply by willing it so. By will
power on may hold impulses in check, follow or not
follow his desires. But if one is to completely overcome
the desires and impulses, he must find something
which the mind and Soul likes better.

"It can never be accomplished by negation alone.
This supreme need is supplied only by the heavenly
bani* melody which is given by the SUGM AD through
the ECK.

"Every man comes to this work duly prepared. If he
is not so prepared, he will not arrive at this point. It is
one game that no man can beat.

"The first requirement is Viveka. This means right

*Bani -Audible life current

72

discrimination. It simply means that one is to use all of
his intelligence properly, he must think long and deep
and be able to discriminate between the true and false.
Underlying the entire problem will be found certain
great and universal truths and principles which should
be learned well and kept always in mind.

"The most ancient truth is couched in a classical sen-
tence in the Vedic literature. 'Ekam sat vipra bahudha
vadanti/ which means when translated 'That which
exists is one: sages call it by various names/

"It teaches there is perfect unity in the Supreme
SUGMAD. All that lives is permeated and vitalized by
the one great Being through ECK.

"The other noble concept is 'Tat Tvam Asi' which
means 'Thou art that/ Its deeper meaning is that each
individual is the Supreme SUGMAD, and that there is
no essential difference between the SUGMAD and the
individual Soul. Man is the divine spark of imagination
linking his being with the SUGMAD. When you reach
the Sach Khand plane in the upper areas of the Far
Country and behold Sat Nam, you see yourself in Him
with overwhelming joy.

"When you reach this point and have found Viveka
working within you, there are certain things which will
happen within. First, a gathering up of all evil tenden-
cies and a laying them aside for the second point. This
second point is concentration, the one pointed mental
action, which, when perfected, leads to samadhi, or the
beginning of spiritual travel.

"The next step on the path is Vairag, which I've
discussed somewhat a few minutes ago. This is the
mental detachment of oneself from the external world.

"This doesn't in any way mean that you detach your-
self physically from the objective world about you, for

73

you need not leave your family, or private duties. De-
tachment is not austerities. Vairag means that you are
to detach yourself in your affections, in your innermost
feelings and interests. This means to cease to identify
yourself with your possessions and environment.
Don't make them the substances of your life and
thought. In other words, you must always keep your
own independence of them. This applies to all things.

"But it means this, that you must love with detach-
ment. One may love while keeping his own indepen-
dence. Then if you lose your possessions, which is
always a possibility while living on the earth plane,
your life is not utterly wrecked, and at the same time
you are able to travel in the Far Country knowing that
it is of more importance than all your worldly posses-
sions.

4 'You cannot be bound up with earthly duties and
worldly possessions. You take nothing with you into
the Far Country but your own inner possessions which
are the qualities that the SUGMAD has given you
from your original birth in time and space.

"One cannot assume the attitude of self-righteous-
ness. This automatically defeats his own purpose and
nullifies all progress made. He must keep Ahankar,
vanity, subdued, and he must allow charity and love of
knowledge, power, and strength to have full sway over
his thoughts and actions.

"By desire, we are bound to objects of desire. This is
why the complete detachment of the mind from every
worldly object is necessary, if we are to enter upon the
path to the Far Country. That detachment avoids
bondage to the world and its objects of sense desire.
We should not love anything with a desire to possess
it. The moment you do, you enter the first stages of

74

slavery. This applies to a family or goods. But as said
before this does not exclude family love. A detached
devotion to family may not be so easy, but it can be
acquired. A detached love is a much higher and nobler
sort of love than that which demands possession, and
then that possession goes on to self-identification with
the object of one's love. When such identification takes
place, one is completely lost. He is not himself any-
more and he is less able to even serve the objects of his
affections, while he is a slave to them.

"The next step on the path to the Far Country is
that which is known as Shanti, or santosha, the peace
of self which comes when one is rid of desire.

"The last step in the attainment of perfect Vairag is
to get rid of desire itself. This is where many noble men
and women have failed, even some great yogis. They
could not get rid of desire itself, even after they had
separated themselves from all connections with the
world. But the real Vairag is not attained until all
desire has been overcome. This is perhaps the most
difficult of all undertakings. Desire has been declared
by those saviors and adepts who have come to this
earth world to help others, to be the greatest evil that
besets a man on the path of spiritual attainment. Their
universal verdict is that desire must be gotten rid of at
all costs.

"You gain santosha, by getting rid of desire. If one
wants nothing, he has everything. From the days of
Buddha to the present, the prevailing teachers in the
Orient have taught that desire is the cause of all
sorrows and the other ills of man. Hence, the cure of all
ills is the destruction of desire. Just how to accomplish
this stupendous task has been the great question of all
sages.

75

"Desire has been pictured as a wild beast roaming
the country, seeking whom it may devour. It is our
worst enemy, the chief instrument of the mind to bind
man to this material world. Desire draws us to the ob-
ject of sense. The senses overwhelm the mind and the
mind enslaves Soul. Following desire, the mind goes on
creating karma and entangling itself in the net.

"Desire never ceases its demands. It doesn't let man
rest, and it follows him into his inner chamber and tor-
ments him in the midst of his prayers. It never relents,
nor does it ever slacken its chains, or cease to apply the
lash, even though the poor victim lies weak and spent
upon his deathbed. Even then desire follows him into
the next world. It will try to make man desire to live
and this desire is a chain upon the spirit.

"Now the paramount question how does man get
rid of desire?

"Everybody writes books or lectures on how to get
rid of desire, but none give the true answer. An ECK
Master can get rid of desire by placing something
before it which has greater attraction. This is only sub-
stituting one desire in place of another, but the
masters put the desire of the SUGM AD in your mind.
Otherwise you hold desires for things and sensations
of a worldly sort, for things which belong to the animal
plane, which holds man on that plane and monopolizes
his attention. His business is to rise above the world of
senses, the world of lower desires. If you are to travel
constantly in the Far Country, it is absolutely essen-
tial that you detach yourself from the sense objects,
from all desires for them. You can go away from the
things themselves, but that is not getting rid of them.
If you do not get rid of the desire itself, you are no
better off than at the first.

76

"So if man can fasten his attention to something
which is not of the sense world, something which is im-
perishable, something which, instead of binding him
here, actually liberates him from his bondage, draws
him in the opposite direction, and takes him up to
liberty and immortality, then that thing becomes his
chief goal. A desire for that is a worthy desire.

"The evil of desire is not desire itself, but the nature
of what is desired. How can the mind conceive the
desire for a good thing to be evil in and of itself? The
good or evil lies in the direction toward which a desire
pulls man.

"Whatever desire keeps man from becoming a spir-
itual traveler in the Far Country can be considered a
bad desire. That which is the stronger desire will pre-
vail. A pull in the direction of the SUGMAD is the
greater desire.

"There is one thing known to human experience
which will destroy all lower desires. This is the bani,
the sound current of the SUGMAD. It is the supreme
instrument of deliverance from bondage. It is the one
means of detaching man from worldly objects that
perish and of lifting him up to liberty and indepen-
dence.

"Man attains perfect Vairag when he enters con-
sciously into this divine stream of life. Controlling and
destroying desires are two different things, and know-
ing this, man can progress upward along the path to
the SUGMAD's domain.

"Destruction of lower desires can never be done by
negation. Yet negation is the method employed by
ninety-nine percent of the human race, by parents, by
teachers, by reformers, by the courts. They all forbid
things. They tell people what they must not do. They

77

write in their laws, Thou shalt not/ A few understand-
ing ones offer something better to attract the minds of
the disobedient. But it should never be done by nega-
tion.

"The world rushes madly into a mire of sensation,
bondage to work, bondage to pleasures, and bondage
to a thousand things. Karma kills out all progress of
the spiritual traveler and he sinks into the mud of
desires.

"But then the traveler learns of bani, and by use of
this lifegiving force he becomes a light unto himself,
and a light unto others, for he is no longer in bondage
to the lower desires. He is the master of his own
destiny, for he has freedom and independence to act as
he wishes anywhere in the planes of the Far Country.

"He is a Master above all Masters. He is the
MAHANTA-the Living ECK Master!"

78

Chapter 4
THE IMMORTAL TUZA

The bronze sun moved overhead into its noonday
position and the hot light poured through the open
door and window. The mountains in the far distance
changed from a deep hue to a brilliant golden haze. The
peaks sparkled like a million diamonds from glaciers
and snow fields. They were a rugged outline against
the white skies and here and there clouds hid the high-
est peaks like children under covers of snow blankets.

A fly droned around the ceiling making noises as
though it had a duty to perform within the mud hut, by
its very ability to disturb the two in human shapes
below it. It wheeled and dove with the agility of a
fighter plane.

Nothing but the dirt floor upon which we were
sitting while sipping at the buttered tea which Rebazar
Tarzs had poured in the thick, heavy mugs, seemed
real. This was something like a scene from a science-fic-
tion novel which I seemed to have been reading, and it
was working out in a dream.

For a moment I could not get my senses together be-
cause of this unreality. Like a man grasping for a straw
while struggling in water over his head, it was all too
much at the present. To take in and absorb all that
Rebazar Tarzs was saying was more than the mind
could handle.

Most minds reject the truth when it is presented in
full volume like this, coming from the great ECK
master, Rebazar Tarzs. Naturally, he understood this
and took his time making the presentation, for it was

79

complex and needed much explanation along the way.
He had taught many the wonders of the Far Country,
and taken many of us through these high planes so
that our feet would be steadied upon the ground when
we left our physical bodies and went into the country
beyond.

Finally he finished his cup of tea, wiped his lips with
the sleeve of his left arm. He looked like a monk of the
medieval days would have appeared. Visibly similar to
the ancient looking followers of the older orders of
mystery cults, he seemed to take pride in his manner-
isms.

He drew a circle in the dirt with his left forefinger.
"This is the Tuza," he began in his husky, deep voice.
"This is what it looks like in the other worlds. It is
nothing more than a viewpoint but it has wavelengths,
the ability to know, can move about in the spiritual
universes and has an uncanny awareness. This is the
real center of man, what we call Soul, the divine self
which becomes reality when you shift your conscious-
ness from the external to the internal.

"This is what most mystics call 'going within',
switching the positions of the consciousness. Once you
take control of Soul, then you are able to do anything;
there is no limitation.

"This consciousness is the awareness of the real self.
It is that part which you dwell within, when you be-
come the spiritual traveler and move through the
worlds of spirit, upward to the SUGMAD.

"There is nothing greater in the eyes of the
SUGMAD than Soul for It is that which holds the
divine secret, -the sacred imagination, which the
SUGMAD wants again for ITS own! This is why IT
calls all Tuzas to return to ITS place in the far sky,

80

because IT needs ITS eye as a whole, and not as a part
as it is now, divided into many parts. IT must see every-
thing through the eyes of the Tuzas and by ITS own.

"Soul can balance itself in the heavens of space with-
out any visible support, but looking through the maya
we can see that it flings up anchor points and estab-
lishes them on some object in the heavens invisible to
the eye, though strong enough to hold an anchor point.
These points are golden balls with lines similar to very
thin wires. They run out on a sort of a reel, and pull in,
as Soul wishes.

"They can be flung into space and attached to a piece
of the space world so the Tuza can hang there, swing-
ing like a child on a summer swing. Soul can be
steadied by flinging out anchor points in all directions
until set within a web, similar to a spider's net. Nothing
can dislodge one as long as he wishes to remain in this
position.

"Now the Tuza is immortal, of course. The SUGMAD
had a large number of Tuzas ages ago and released
them upon Earth for the purpose of developing it into a
garden spot of the universe. It had been a dull, garbage
heap in this world of planets and stars, until in ITS
mercy the decision was made to give it an opportunity
to become beautiful, and peopled with homo sapiens
who would take care of it.

"After IT generously gave ITS imagination faculty
to all, the people were bound and determined to use it
to steal their neighbor's possessions, and make war on
one another.

"All Souls are immortal, and as the Gita says cannot
be wetted, pierced by sword, burnt by fire nor be in-
jured in any manner. It is all there is; that which is the
hope of heaven and the scourge of all things, is willful

81

and unhappy.

"The problem of the Tuza is unique. The individual
Tuza can become aberrated like the mind. If It is dis-
torted in the imaginary faculty, trouble is likely to fol-
low for a long time, and there is hardly anything that
can be done unless some spiritual traveler gives It
help.

"The problems which it suffers are involved with the
faculty of postulates and considerations, meaning of
course that while the Tuza is capable of these, it may
become a victim of another Tuza's postulates and con-
siderations.

"There is an old story about a Soul which was given
a set of considerations by another Soul, that it was a
rock. So the poor Soul sat for ten thousand years,
which is only a short time in the God realm, thinking
that it was a rock, until one day another Soul wandered
past and asked It for heaven's sake what was It doing?
'I'm a rock/ was the answer.

"So the first Soul, realizing what had happened,
undid the spell by breaking the considerations which
the other had accepted. Now this sounds silly but stop
and think how many times throughout your earth life
that you did accept somebody's consideration for your-
self. Maybe a Healer said you would be a long time get-
ting well, and you accepted his consideration. You
didn't get well for a long time either.

"This is what I mean by postulates and considera-
tions being a two edged sword. They can work against
you, as well as for you. Once you're free, then nobody
can make your considerations, but as long as you are
on this Earth plane, you are in danger of having to
accept other considerations which are not your own.

"Tuzas fight one another with electronic beams.

82

Those which are aggressive do, and often a few are
hurt, having to crawl off somewhere for recovery. You
can never kill a Tuza under any circumstance, but you
can cripple It temporarily with electronic beams.

"Now Tuza is the only thing in all the universes
which can occupy the same space as anything else.
Only spirit can do this, and of course Soul can occupy
the same space as spirit.

"Let me give you an example. Two rocks cannot
occupy the same space, neither can two bodies of the
physical flesh. But Soul can slip into a body while it is
occupied by another, and certainly can cause havoc,
providing it is of that disposition. The spiritual traveler,
better known as the Tuza, Soul, can go anywhere and
do most anything within the Far Country.

"While It is limited in some respects with the
SUGMAD, there is nothing within the physical planes
which can be called greater and have greater freedom
than Soul."

"There is no assured immortality until the Tuza has
reached the regions of pure spirit, far beyond all mater-
iality. Only then is Soul above the complications of
mind and beyond the grasp of karma, beyond all dis-
solutions and grand dissolutions which come to the
worlds below the Sach Khand region.

"The length of life upon the Brahm Lok plane leads
one to believe that this is the immortal world. It often
extends into thousands and millions of years. But the
spiritual traveler is familiar with the vast regions far
beyond and above the highest regions known to those
who seek without the help of the ECK Master.

83

"The Christian religions speak of this plane, and so
does the Bhagavad-Gita, but both are results of
writers who never went beyond the Brahm Lok region.
Both the Christian gospel and the Gita are purely
works of dialectic fiction, not historical reports.

'The Sat Desh, or world of the SUGMAD which I
have previously called Anami Lok, is the grand region
of all creations and of immortality. It is unchangeable,
perfect, deathless. It is forever untouched by dissolu-
tion or grand dissolution, and so are its inhabitants.

"It is divided into four distinct worlds, each having
its own characteristics and its own Lord or Governor.
From above downward, they are named: The Anami
Lok, Agam Lok and the Sach Khand.

' The light of these four planes is so very intense that
it is impossible for any mortal to get an understanding
of it. It simply cannot be described.

"There are two kinds of dissolution which occur in
the Far Country. The one, simple dissolution, is that
which dissolves all those worlds up to the Brahm Lok
plane, after millions of years of existence. The grand
dissolutions occur after immeasurably long periods of
time, extending to the Sach Khand, but not including
this plane, the first world of immortality.

"Both of these dissolutions include the entire physi-
cal universe, every sun, moon and planet in it. At that
time every star and all satellites are wiped out. There
follows a period of darkness equal in duration to the
life of the universe. When the period of darkness has
expired, a new creation is projected, and the heavens
once more are alive with sparkling stars. With each
new creation begins a Golden Age for each planet and
its inhabitants. But between the minor dissolutions
there are also periods of renewal for the life of each

84

planet, when Golden Ages succeed dark ages.

"Dissolution will come at a time when all the worlds
of the physical universe will be dissolved; after periods
of darkness and silence, new worlds will take their
places. The inhabitants of all of these worlds to be dis-
solved are drawn up to higher regions in a sort of coma-
tose state, to be replaced upon the worlds when they
are again ready for human habitation. They will then
begin a new life here under more favorable conditions.
These periods of dissolutions come to the physical uni-
verse after many, many hundreds of millions of years.

"The spiritual traveler who will accept and listen to
the creative sound current, the ECK, will find himself
renewed in the spiritual worlds. It takes possession of
you, it re-creates you, and then you find yourself a citi-
zen of a new world. The attractions of sense disappear,
and you are exalted. You are purified and your mind
renewed. You will live anew, and never shall the shadow
of death ever cross your path. You have definitely
become immortal.

"Beliefs and speculations offer very little support for
the hope of immortal life. All the elements of the many
world religions are of doubtful value for the reason
they are dependent upon ancient books and metaphysi-
cal theories. This takes the matter out of the category
of knowledge, and so robs it of its chief value.

"Now in order to get to the roots of immortality we
must look at the basis of the philosophy of ECKANKAR.
It is not a religion, nor a philosophy as known to the
scholars of the educational systems in this physical
world.

"The sad fact remains that nobody on this physical
plane knows anything about Soul, the real self. What
are the component parts of It? This question is never

85

answered in the laboratories of the earth world.

"The several parts of man will be a quick study for
you, beginning with the lower stratum, which is man,
the animal. He is a physical body, called by the Orient-
als, Isthul Sharir. He has a body which gets hurt, sick
and which finally dies and returns to the soil.

'There is another man inside the physical body, a
much finer body, called by the spiritual travelers the
Sukhsham Sharir, or subtle body; Nuri Sarup, or light
body. It is commonly called the Astral body by the
occultist. It makes connections with the outer world.
"When seen by the physical senses it appears to
sparkle with millions of little particles resembling star
dust. It takes shape with the character of the indivi-
dual, and has five senses, just the same as the physical
body. When the physical body dies, this body remains
as the instrument of expression on the Astral plane.

"Inside the Nuri Sarup and quite distinct from it,
there is still another body, much finer and more subtle
than the astral. It is known as the Karan Sharir, the
Causal body. So named because in it is the real cause,
or seeds of all that is to ever take place in the indivi-
dual's life. It is also called Bij Sharir, the seed body.
"This body is divided into two or more strata, each
of which is given a different name. One is sometimes
known as the mental body because it acts as a sheath
around Soul, and is very sensitive to impressions from
the mind. Its function is to receive and transmit im-
pressions between the mind and Soul on one side, and
between the mind and the astral body on the other.

"A perfect record of everything the individual has
experienced is established from his countless ages of
existence. Out of these experiences, character is
formed, and from that character, all actions flow.

86

"The mind body is the fourth unit in the construc-
tion of Soul, or rather the man. It is so closely related
to the Karan Sharir that it is not easy to distinguish
between them. The mind body is a sort of sheath cover-
ing Soul.

"When reaching the Daswan Dwar region all bodies
have been shed except the mind body because Soul no
longer needs them. It can without instrument of com-
munication or contemplation know all things, rejoice in
all things by direct perception.

"When Soul rises upward from Daswan Dwar, it
sheds this mental body and becomes Self. It alone has
the power of knowing by direct perception. All knowl-
edge opens before it without any sort of instrument.

"The mind itself is sometimes divided into different
sections, according to the plane upon which one is oper-
ating. The Nij-manas, the inner mind, carries the seeds
of all actions within itself. It carries the sanskaras, the
impressions of all former lives. Sometimes we speak of
the causal mind, the Suksham mind and the physical
mind, according to the region or plane, upon which the
mind is operating. But this is only a distinction for con-
venience.

"Last of all we come to the real man, the Tuza. Soul.
These two terms we use synonymously. This is the
very core of his being, and It is the fifth unit in the
structure of the being that is known as man, as you see
him in this life. Remember he has all five of these ele-
ments while living here now. All the lower units which
are only instruments, he discards, one by one, as he ad-
vances upward. This is because he has no use for them
on the higher planes, each instrument being suited for
expression only upon a particular plane of life.

"The Tuza is the real man, the spiritual traveler, or

87

as some prefer to call it, the Purusha. The individual
Tuza is the spark from the divine light, a drop from the
ocean of the SUGMAD. It is in the Tuza that all con-
sciousness resides, and all power. All below it, even the
mind itself, is unconscious, automatic and mechanical
in action.

"In fact, everything in existence is entirely depend*
ent upon the ECK for its life and activity. Even the
humblest plant, or the smallest insect, lives and carries
on its activities, by virtue of the ECK, the spirit that
gives it being.

"All else in man passes away, or is discarded by him
on his upward flight toward perfect freedom. Were it
not for Soul's temporary sojourn in these material
regions, there would be no need for any of these instru-
mentsthese bodies and the mind. Owing to the ex-
treme subtleness of spirit, It cannot contact the
coarser worlds without an intermediate instrument. It
is obliged to clothe Itself in some sort of medium of
contact. For this reason the Supreme SUGMAD,
ITSELF, cannot manifest on these material planes or
appear to men and give them instructions. A material
body is necessary in all cases.

"In any case Soul is a derivative of the SUGMAD
and identical in substance. The entire world is filled
with Souls. There is no place where Souls are not. Some
have better minds and better bodies than the others.
In this respect there is little difference between the
amoeba and man, between an insect and a savant.

"Now I have moved you along to an understanding
of the problem of Soul. From here I go to the mind and

88

the very center of all worldly problems.

"In the region of Tirkuti, the second region of the
spiritual worlds, and that of the Brahm Lok plane, the
mental world, the mind is acquired. Soul in its descent
through this region picks up the mind as its equipment
for use on the lower planes.

"This region is the seat of the Universal or Cosmic
mind, as sometimes called. It is the place from which
all mind is derived. Just as Soul originates in the
region of universal energy, so the mind is acquired in
the region of the universal . mind. A small portion of
this universal mind is detached, so to speak, and is
joined to Soul, not in a permanent union, but in a temp-
orary union.

"It is wrapped about It, covering the Tuza, and at
the same time obscuring much of its light and hamper-
ing its activity. The Tuza, equipped with this neces-
sary handicap, begins its career in the regions of mind
and matter. At that moment it begins to accumulate
karma. Before this it had no karma except that which
the eastern wisdom names Adi Karma. This is the
primal karma, and it consists of the action of the crea-
tive force, the real ECK, whose function is to bring the
Tuzas to the material planes, in order that they might
begin to accumulate experience.

"The Tuza begins to acquire experience upon its own
initiative; its era of swadharma, self regulation, is now
starting. It begins to establish an individual law of its
own life, its own regime, and to create its own destiny.
It begins to enjoy, to suffer, to reap rewards and to pay
penalties.

"This is the beginning of its own karma. Thus it in-
augurates its long, long series of Earth lives. By each
and every act, from that time on, it stores up karma.

89

Even when it is least active, still it is making karma,
and in all of this activity, its mind is the chief instru-
ment. It is the mind working always under the law of
cause and effect that creates karma.

"The mind is not self-conscious, nor self-acting. It
has no power of automation, or of initiative. It is simp-
ly a machine, though highly sensitive and extremely
powerful when motivated by the ECK. As a machine, it
can be made to do what it was intended to do, just like
any other machine. It will never do anything different
from what it was fashioned and trained to do.

"The western teachers have always taught the mind
had powers of origination and initiative, but this is un-
true. Mind and ECK have been greatly confused in
western psychology. Only the ECK can think, origi-
nate and take the initiative. Mind works only when
activated by Soul.

"Only the negative power and its subordinates have
minds, just like human beings. The fundamental differ-
ence between mind and the ECK between Tuza and
instrument, must be understood, if you are to compre-
hend the psychology of the ECK travelers.

"You see now that mind is no essential part of man
himself. It is only an instrument which encumbers
Soul, obscures its light and impedes its progress. But
it is absolutely necessary while you are operating on
these material planes.

"Again I say that mind alone is a machine. It cannot
think, cannot will, cannot love, it cannot remember,
nor suffer nor enjoy. To do all these things it must, in
every instance be activated by the ECK. ECK alone is
the motive power to mind, just as the electric current
is the power that moves the machinery. We usually
think of the mind as the chief power for moving the

90

human body.

"Mind is matter, yet quite refined in its essential
qualities. It is next to Soul in all of its essential quali-
ties. The chief function of mind is to serve as an instru-
ment of spirit for all contacts with the material worlds.

"Mind is a useful instrument, provided it is kept
under the control of Soul. Mind is an excellent servant
but a poor master. If it becomes the master, it may
speedily bring disaster. We have always been taught
that mind reasons; but it doesn't reason. It acts with
automatic precision, exactly as it is stimulated to act.

"The mind is able to carry on deductive processes,
but has no power of induction. This is often demon-
strated in the cases of hypnosis. Give the subject cer-
tain premises, no matter how absurd they may be, and
he will act upon such premises, with automatic deduc-
tions. But such a mind has no power of synthesis and
rational induction. Soul alone has light in it, and Soul
alone can work independently and rationally. You have
only to observe a little, the actions of people the world
over to see for yourself that they act more like ma-
chines than they do like rational beings.

"They are moved by mind in grooves, just as they
have been taught to act. It is a rare individual who
does independent thinking and when one does that, it
is because the ECK is in operation, emancipating self
from the domineering control of mind.

"This subject is so very important that I must
devote more time to it. You must make yourself fully
acquainted with the mind in all its faculties, and its
several methods of action.

91

"The mind is divided into four parts, called Antish-
karans; functions or modes of action. It has four pri-
mary attributes, faculties, or qualities. These are its
antishkarans. These four divisions of mind are named:
Chitta, Manas, Buddhi and Ahankar.

Chitta is that function or faculty, which takes cogni-
zance of form, beauty, color, rhythm, harmony and
perspective. It enjoys these things and what it doesn't
like, it rejects. It receives its impressions mostly
through the eyes as instruments of perception. It then
passes on its finding to the Buddhi. In all of these reac-
tions, its processes are as regular and automatic as are
the reactions of chemistry.

Manas, is mind stuff, per se. It is that which receives
and registers impressions through the senses of smell,
taste, hearing and feeling. Its chief function is taste.
It tastes, relishes, enjoys, or rejects what it doesn't
like. Feeling and taste are practically the same thing.
All of its reactions are automatic. The manas enjoys
what it has been trained to like, and its reactions are
instantaneous. It either likes a taste, or it rejects it
automatically, then passes it on to the Buddhi, for
final judgment.

Buddhi, is the intellect proper; that power the Tuza
uses as its chief instrument of thought. When empow-
ered by spirit, it produces thought. It discriminates
and decides. It passes judgment upon all the findings
of the other two faculties, its decisions are then passed
on to the final court of execution, Ahankar.

Ahankar accepts the decisions of the other faculties,
handed on to it by the Buddhi and executes the man-
dates. It is the executive faculty of the mind. It is also
the I-Ness of the individual, the faculty by which the
individual differentiates self from all else, and it is the

92

faculty which enables the individual to distinguish
between his own interests and that of others. It is the
faculty which, when unduly exaggerated, becomes
vanity, or egotism.

"To sum up what I have just said: Manas receives
and tastes; Chitta takes notice of form and beauty;
Buddhi is the instrument of thought, discrimination
and decision; and Ahankar executes orders.

"Let us not condemn nature, but try to understand
and obey it. It is man's best friend, if you first learn to
obey.

"With understanding you work in close cooperation
with nature to your best advantage.

"There is practically no limit to the powers of the
mind, but few people know how to awaken or invoke its
forces. It's a good thing they don't in their present
state of spiritual evolution. When man learns to accept
responsibility, these mind powers will automatically
increase,

"When properly awakened, trained and vitalized by
the ECK the mind can do anything for you. A trained
spiritual traveler, knowing how to awaken and control
the powers of his own mind, can stop a train at any
place he may wish it to stop. He can start a downpour
of rain in seconds out of the clear sky; or he can dry up
a flood of waters. He can do anything he wishes. But
this is only playing with natural forces. All miracles
are but the play of mind. They are not the operations of
any divine power, as most people believe. But to do
these things one must learn two things he must
become morally responsible for his actions, and he
must learn to control his own mind. After that he can
do what he wishes. He must be responsible in the sense
that if he isn't he would lose his powers at once. It

93

stands to reason, and it is substantiated by all of our
daily experiences, that if such gigantic powers were let
loose out of control, or if they were invoked by an evil
mind, it might bring about disaster of the most terrible
sort.

"It is a provision of the SUGMAD that no man is
able to invoke such powers until he has first learned to
control his own passions, to check all evil tendencies
and all selfish impulses. Otherwise, such a man might
wreck the whole physical world. Only the spiritual
travelers can do these things.

"The essential point here is that the mind is a very
great power, and must be kept in control. Rightly used,
it may be made to work marvels; but if allowed to
assert itself in a lawless manner, it can bring unspeak-
able disaster to its owner, and sometimes others as
well.

"I have given you the essences of the five passions:
Kama, Krodha, Lobha, Moha and Ahankara. These are
in English lust, anger, greed, attachment to worldly
things, and vanity. These passions take possession
when mind is allowed to run wild, out of control of the
spirit.

"So long as the ECK controls the mind, the four fac-
ulties perform their proper functions and these pas-
sions cannot manifest themselves. But when the mind
runs wild, out of control, under the impulses of one or
more of the five passions, it is generally headed for
destruction.

"Whenever any of the five evil passions are allowed
to run wild, in each and every case, a mighty force
which was meant for our good has been turned into an
instrument of destruction. No faculty of mind ever
works itself. It is motivated by spirit, and it is as auto-

94

matic in its actions as is the explosion of a stick of
dynamite. It is only when spirit takes control, that
mind is directed in safe and sane channels. It may then
be compared with a fine car that has a good driver at
the wheel.

"Every agitation, stimulation, or excitation of mind,
in any of its functions, creates thought-forms which
may be seen on the subtle planes. Thoughts are things,
just as much as clouds, or houses. The four faculties of
the mind when set in motion by any sort of stimulus
begin automatically to create thought-forms and set
waves in motion. The mind will do these things with
the regularity of chemistry, or machinery. It works in
this pattern and can do nothing else but this. It has no
power to originate independent thought, nor can it rea-
son upon any proposed course of action.

"I am aware this is all contrary to the western psy-
chology, but western psychology does not understand
the mechanism of mind. Mind cannot depart from its
beaten path, any more than a locomotive can will to
leave the track upon which it has been set. Habit is the
chief method of mental action. Habits are likened to
grooves in which actions run. The first thing which
mind does, after it is agitated and brought into action,
is to establish a groove, which you call habit. Man is
usually a driven slave of habit and custom.

'The mind resents innovation, dislikes change, and
accepts without question, what it has been taught to
believe as truth or right. The mind adores routine, and
it can be trained to a very high degree of skill in a given
line of activity. This marks one very great advantage
of its automatic quality.

"The mind when activitated by the ECK, forms
thoughts, and each thought takes a definite shape on

95

the astral plane. They may be seen there by anyone
who enjoys astral vision."

* * *

"Now," he said, pacing the floor of the hut furiously,
attacking the subject of mind as though it were a per-
son, "Can you teach a machine to believe that it is not
good to run into trees? Can you convince it that the
highway is better? You can argue with it for years and
then turn it loose on full power and it will run straight
into a tree, if that tree is in its path.

"So it is with most people. They will usually go on
doing as they did before, in spite of all rational persua-
sion. If a little light filters in from the spirit, a person
may change his course of thinking or acting, but never
otherwise.

"If the mind enjoys a certain sensation, it wishes to
repeat that sensation as often as possible, quite regard-
less of whether the sensation is good for the person or
not. This is why there are so many drunkards, liber-
tines and dope fiends. It is why people indulge in anger
and vanity. Mind will usually do what it likes, regard-
less of consequences, unless checked by fear, or some
higher impulse, from the spirit. It is only when Buddhi
interferes that the mind will forego an indulgence of f er-
edit.

"Of course if it feels pain from a certain performance,
it instantly rejects that mode of action, regardless of
its own ultimate good. It is not easy for a man to stick
a lance into his own abscess, or allow someone else to
do it, even though he knows it is best for him. It is only
when the ECK asserts itself that one will do such a
thing for his own ultimate good. Unreasoning children
will never consent to be hurt, even when they know it is

96

best for them. Perhaps, in such cases, the Buddhi has
not reached sufficient development for the ECK to
make use of it.

"Mind alone is neither moral nor immoral, any more
than your automobile. It is a machine as much as your
car. The cannibal can see no more harm in eating a man
than you do in eating a piece of beef. To some other
people, both are harmful. Morality, sin and righteous-
ness are largely matters of custom, and geography. So-
cial customs, ceremonies, rites, religions and politics
are based upon mental habits, and are usually handed
down from one generation to another.

"Customs make it wrong in one country to enter a
temple with shoes on, while in another country it is
wrong to keep your hat on. Custom makes it wrong in
one section to have more than one wife, while in another
it is a sign of poverty or inferiority to be so limited.
Mental habits have all the inflexibility of an iron ma-
chine. In fact, iron may be bent; but you try to change
a long established custom and your neighbors will seek
your immediate destruction. The whole human race is
a slave to custom. Every single individual in the coun-
try may condemn that custom, but at the same time
every one will do his best to perpetuate it. All of this is
because mind, both individual and social, is machine
like in its action. It cannot reason.

"Can you imagine vast armies going out with delib-
erate aim to destroy each other, if they had the power
to reason? Crime and moral rectitude are both mental
habits. International strife is only blind passion run
wild, en masse.

"There are some advantages in this machinelike
action of mind, but there are equally grave dangers in
it. If the mind, through a gradual process of suggestion

97

and experience, becomes accustomed to certain
grooves of action, it often leads to the wreck and ruin
of the individual in spite of himself. This is an extreme-
ly pathetic aspect of the matter. People become entan-
gled in the net of habits and customs, while deep in
their hearts they ardently wish to get out of them; but
have not the power of will, or strength of character to
extricate themselves. They go deliberately and know-
ingly to destruction, in spite of themselves.

"The more a habit is indulged in, the more easily and
certainly the mind will run in that groove. At the same
time, Soul Itself becomes less and less able to impress
Itself and Its wishes upon the mind, or even to get a
hearing at all.

"Soul is an exceedingly fine and delicate reality. It
has tremendous power in its own sphere of action. But
on the fields of coarse material, it has but little power
of self-expression. On the other hand, if the Tuza has a
trained, and responsive mind, it may do almost any-
thing it decides to do. This is why mind control,
through spirit, is so important, and is so insisted upon
by the ECK travelers.

"Mind may be divided in another way, besides the
four faculties. It may be spoken of as the higher and
lower minds, which is the common, the scientific classi-
fication.

"There is only one mind, acting on different planes.
It may also be divided into three partsthe Pinda, or
lower world mind; mind which manifests itself in the
common affairs of this world. Second, the Sukhsham,
that mind which works on the Astral plane, and last,
the Karan mind, nij-mind, inner mind, or the causal
mind.

"These correspond to the three bodies of man, and

98

the three worlds in which the three bodies operate,
each in its own sphere. With equal logic you might say
there are six minds, because the three I've just men-
tioned may be divided into two, a higher and lower.

44 In this world, for example, you may speak of a high-
er mind which engages itself in the highest forms of
thought activity, e.g. philosophy, literature, music and
art. The lower mind engages itself in' grossly material
things, money making, digging, eating, drinking, and
the indulgence of any of the passions. But in any case
there is only one mind, functioning on different planes,
and upon higher or lower things on each plane.

"At the top of all, the mind which lies next to spirit
is the real nij-mind, the purest. Below that, each sub-
stratum of the mind becomes more adulterated with
coarser and lower substances. Last of all, at the very
lowest stratum, there is a sort of mind which is but
little more than electro-magnetism. When the atten-
tion is on this lower plane, it is the lower mind working.

"It is here engrossed in its own desires, its passions
and its plays,

"When the attention is on the astral plane, it is the
Sukhsham mind which is used; when the attention is
on the causal plane, it is that mind which is working.
But in each and every case, it is the same mind, but
playing upon the different planes of existence.

"The higher mind, the nij, is sort of a pilot, or gyro-
scope, whose function is to receive the impressions of
the Tuza and pass them on to the subordinate minds
for their regulation. The important point is that all
aspects of the mind are automatic.

"None of them ever calculate results, or assign a
moral content. Each of them accepts what is given to
it, and reacts upon it, without question or consider-

99

ation. Neither does any aspect of the mind ever con-
sider what is best for the individual, except just what
it has been taught by experience to like or dislike. In
other words, mind is not a rational entity. It reacts
automatically and always upon the basis of what it
likes or dislikes; it never considers what is best. If the
element of calculation enters into the process you may
be sure a little of the light of spirit has entered into the
affair.

"The mind, if given a stimulus, or as one says, a
temptation, will always act in accord with the sum
total of its own past experiences. It cannot act in any
other way. It cannot even will to act in any other way.

"Now if the mind always acts automatically and in
exact line with its previous training, how do we
account for any new or radical departure from the
beaten path of its habits and desires? The answer is on
the basis of a new driving force entering the machine
from without.

"It is because a different driving force enters the ma-
chine that mind obeys, has to obey, the stronger of the
two impelling forces. Physics is the best field for the
study of mental phenomena. There is not a single
action of mind which cannot be reduced to Newton's
Laws of Motion, and the reactions of chemistry. It is
no wonder that modern physicists are inclined to bring
all mental reactions under their mechanistic theory of
the universe. In the absence of complete knowledge,
they are fully justified in their conclusions. If we had
to deal always with mind alone, and spirit never enter-
ed into the problem, the mechanistic theory would
apply with perfect accuracy. It would fit every fact of
experience. But when the ECK begins to enter the play
there is no foretelling what may happen. Soul operates

100

by Its own light. Mind must follow, whether it likes it
or not.

"Now that you see that mind is only an automatic
thing, you know that all intelligence, light and power
come from Soul. But Soul works under a serious handi-
cap, for this world is not Its native habitat. All the
coverings worn by Soul serve to burden It and to weak-
en Its powers of expression.

"Soul is in enemy country, and always surrounded
by the five faithful servants of the Negative Power,
Kama, Krodha, Lobha, Moha and Ahankara; lust,
anger, greed, attachment and vanity.

"These five are commissioned to mislead Soul and
mind and make trouble for them. It is their business.
The worst feature is the mind itself being swayed by
them. It has close relationships with them and lends a
ready ear to their whispering.

"But Soul, the spiritual traveler, has a safe harbor
into which It can sail when these five negative powers
start working up too great a whirlpool. It can always
go into the higher realms beyond the mind planes and
enjoy the world of the SUGMAD."

101

102

Chapter 5
THE WORSHIP OF KALI

Rebazar Tarzs quit pacing the floor and dropped
upon the earth putting his legs under him. He spread
the robe over his knees, hiding his lower limbs, giving
the appearance of a great Buddha in silent contempla-
tion.

After awhile he opened his eyes again and stared at
me for a long time. Finally he said, "I've brought you
this far, my young friend. Now I will talk about the
Kali, the Earth mother, whom all India worships, and
most of the world people, though the latter are not
aware of this.

"The Hindu religion has a trinity, consisting of
Brahma, Vishnu and Shiva. These represent the three
currents flowing out of the Brahm Lok world; they are
creation, continuity, and destruction. The Hindus gave
them worldly names in order to personalize each cur-
rent, so they would be recognized. They are: Brahma,
Vishnu and Shiva, which are worshipped in India and
other parts of the Oriental world as Gods.

"These are called the sons of Kal Niranjan, the nega-
tive power, whose other name is Brahm. The female
counterpart of Brahm is Shakti, who in fact represents
a minor creative current. Out of these two great cur-
rents, the three subordinate currents flow into the
lower worlds, and to these are attributed the creation
of all lower worlds. These three became creators, lords
and governors of the lower worlds, under their father,
Brahm, and their mother, Shakti, They are said to be
under the supervision of their mother. In fact, these

103

three represent creative currents. They carry the crea-
tive impulses from the greater powers above, but they
have been given these individual names, as persons.

"It is well to remember that all creative currents
may become personal; that is, take individual form and
assume individual duties, as Krishna, Christ, Buddha
and others. Now these three have generally been ac-
cepted as the Hindu trinity of Gods, as commonly
known in their literature and religion. Millions worship
them in spite of their subordinate position. These
powers are the real servants of man. They perform a
certain function in carrying on the work of the world,
in producing human bodies, and in keeping these
bodies going. They are the agents of the SUGM AD in
serving mankind, but not gods to be worshipped by the
human race. They are almost menials in the grand
hierarchy, but each of them have certain powers and
prerogatives, and within his own sphere he is all-
powerful. He carries on according to definite laws and
rules laid down for his government. These again are
laws of nature. Brahma, Vishnu and Shiva may be
regarded as servants of the negative power or his
working committee. In all respects, they do his
bidding, each in his own department.

"Still lower than these three, there is another current
or God, or power, who is also one of the working force,
helping to carry on the administration of the physical
universe. His name is Ganesh. He stands practically at
the foot of the list of subordinates whose business it is
to serve mankind and help to carry on the work of the
world.

"In the subtle region close to the earth, there is a
great host of beings called devas, devtas, bhuts, prets
to name a few. These are generally called angels in

104

English. They are beings somewhat above ordinary
men and they help to serve man in many ways. They
have great powers and are quite willing to serve peo-
ple who live in harmony with them.

"Last of all, is humanity itself at the very foot of the
grand hierarchy. If man works in harmony with all of
these powers above him, he will surely receive their
help and will eventually become a spiritual traveler.

"The Kali is the mother goddess of India. I have pur-
posely left her until the last for she is worshipped by
the Hindus as the great creative force. She is the six-
armed deity which rules over all, a powerful current
representing the female or feminine principle of that
country. She is the consort of Shiva, but assigned to
the place where Shakti is supposed to be.

"Now the Kali represents destruction, the goddess
which destroys all yet replaces it with fertility of life.
In other words she is a sex goddess. Another name for
her is Mahamai, or the great mother, and in the yoga
system she is the power, the strength of the deity pre-
siding over the ganglion at the throat. It is sometimes
called the Kanth chakra, the fifth center that lies near
the cervical plexus. It has to do with respiration. But I
will go into these chakra centers later.

"The Kali is worshipped, as I said before, by the
Hindus. She has been brought to our attention in the
west mainly by Ramakrishna, the great Vedantist
prophet of India.

"The Christians know her as the Virgin Mother, but
without the six arms, and the Greeks had a name for
her, Ceres. All religions have a mother goddess, the
feminine principle of the universe.

"Ramakrishna laid for hours before the statue of
Kali in his hometown, in the temple of course, pleading

105

with the mother goddess to give him just one little
glimpse of her. He sang hymns, songs of praise and
talked constantly to the statue, as if she were alive. If
he had been in any other country on the globe it would
have been possible that he would have been locked up
for insanity. But he wasn't insane, for when the Kali
finally gave him a touch of ecstasy, he went into a
trance for many days and had to be cared for like a
child, hand fed and bathed.

"This feminine principle, which is known mostly to
the Hindus, is frankly the opposite of the male, or posi-
tive principle. The Chinese have worked it out in the
idea of Yang and Yin. Yang is the male principle and
Yin is the feminine.

"I am going around in circles somewhat to explain to
you what the Kali, mother goddess of India, is like. I
want you to understand completely when I'm through
with this part of the discussion. This feminine principle
is somewhat destructive in its nature and is closer to
the lower world than the other currents. Being destruc-
tive means that it is also the creative side of the
current.

"This is a part of the Shiva currentwhich is the
triad Brahma, Vishnu and Shiva. Do you remember
the two faces of Shiva? Well, this is the part of the
Shiva current which most Indians of the Far East wor-
ship. This is a part of the Shiva sect. The sect is a fol-
lower of the two faces of Shiva, worshipping Shiva as
the Father God and Kali as the mother goddess.

"Shiva is known as the creator of the world and Kali
as the destroyer. She represents the great womb of the
universe, for out of her is born all life. Some yogis write
poems to her, cry out in agony for her smile, and finally
get a touch of heaven through her.

106

"In other words Kali is the symbol of what is called
Mother India. Now I point out that all men love to
think of their home country in the symbol of woman-
hood. They look upon all life as the feminine principle,
because they have been taught that womanhood was
greater than manhood.

"This is some of the misteachings on the earth plane.
It comes about because India's religious system was
spread too far west and too far east during its advent.
You don't find many of the Hindu cults in the west;
maybe Vedanta has made a strong stand in the west,
but the other religious groups within the Hindu reli-
gious framework have not. Yet the influence of Hindu-
ism has been so strong that it did replace a section of
thought in China, Japan and, to the west, in most of
the nations along the Mediterranean coast.

"Christianity adopted the Virgin Mother idea from
the Indian philosophy, mainly the Shakti, mother of
the triad group, and completely lifted and made it over
into a westernized idea. The whole point is that Kali
has become the symbol of the feminine mind. The
whole mystery of the feminine principle is found in the
Kali symbol.

"Priestcraft taught man long ago that motherhood
was greatest because out of it comes the birth of life.
Doesn't the female of all species give life, be it plant or
animal, or the human species? But if you look beyond
this thought, you might see that maya, illusion, is the
veil through which life comes. This is because man is
not able to look into the true side of all nature; and this
maya, which was created from time immemorial, has a
way of hiding all things to the profane sight of man.

"Buddha was supposed, according to the famous
poem 'The Light of Asia', to have stepped through the

107

veil of illusion onto this earth. In other words as a tra-
veler in the spiritual worlds, he descended from the
Brahm Lok, and regressed into the singular physical
form, and found his way into the earth world, through
the womb of a woman. So do all ECK adepts, the
M AHANTA, including yourself.

"Now the word maya has a dozen meanings. In the
west its name is Maria, Mary, May, Molly, Polly, or
Poll, or even Marietta. Hence comes the Mary who
gave birth to the savior Jesus, for he only used her
body in order to visit this planet. It is the way of na-
ture that all things must be born in the miniature man-
ner of babyhood and grow to adultship. This is one of
the laws of nature on this planet, and even the saints,
saviors and adepts use it, mainly so they may not
startle man too much; for what he doesn't understand,
he would not accept.

"This form of maya, as I have said, is represented by
the female body which hides as the womb of time and
space.

"Western psychology puts an emphasis upon an
aberration of its men; that man longs to return to the
womb for its comfort; where he laid in soft darkness,
protected by the woman's belly, and fed without strug-
gle. This is an escapism which is often laid at men's
feet to chastize them and get them to accept women as
their equal.

"Now I'm going to explain the true psychology of
the Kali goddess so that you may have a greater under-
standing of the feminine principle, that current which
creates life and form on this earth, and destroys it
without regret.

"Let's have a few minutes of rest before going on
with this subject."

108

"Now the Kali is a form of worship which is con-
sidered a blood cult. It was originated during the
reconstruction period in India, when the development
of the female side, the wife of the deity, began. The idea
grew that the god was unapproachable, but the Sakti
or female side brought mankind in touch with the
deity, an idea that of course underlies Mariolatry in
Christian thought. In case you don't know what the
word means it's the worship of the Virgin Mary a
term of opprobrium often used in the western world.

"The Saktas, the worshippers of Kali, grew to such
importance, especially in Bengal, during this period
that it formed a right hand and left hand group. It was
the left hand Saktas who became the troublemakers in
India; this was the blood cult, Kali, the Vampire whose
presence influenced men to Thugism, sex cults, and the
evil of murder.

"The right hand Saktas were the worshippers of
woman, the mother they had rituals of worship of the
female organ of reproduction. They believe that this is
the height of divinity, for woman's womb represents
the creativity principle in nature. Of course this is not
true as I explained before. Kali is often portrayed in
statue form with a long protruding tongue which is
precisely parallel with the Egyptian god, Bes, and with
Medusa as represented in early Greek sculpture. All of
these are of Gorgon origin, i.e., each is a fierce counte-
nance intended to frighten evil spirits. She often wears
the linga, the symbol worn by Shiva, as an ornament
on her head.

"In the temples of Kali, and in a vast number of
village temples in the rural Indian states, animal sacri-

109

fice is still in use. But as in the temple of Kali at
Kalighat, Calcutta, she accepts only the blood as her
portion of the sacrifice.

^One fact must remain clear. To the Indian the idol
of the Kali may have been a stone image to the eye but
it is a living personal goddess to him. The image has
been made by human hands, but the goddess lives in it,
using the stone or metal body as the human uses the
human body. She lives in the temple among her people,
receiving from their hands the food by which she sub-
sists, welcomes them to her presence and makes them
her guests. She listens to their prayers and answers
them. She hears and speaks, eats and sleeps, moves
and acts.

"The whole of the temple worship depends on this
belief. The villager goes to the temple to see Kali's
face. He believes he looks into her own divine eyes. He
prays with fervent prayer, and hears the goddess
answer him with her own lips. Not only the villager
does this, but in the lives of all the saints you can meet
the same belief.

"Kali is represented in various forms; as Sati for ex-
ample the faithful wife who cast herself into the fire so
as not to be present when her husband and father were
quarreling, and who was the prototype of all the satis,
devoted widows, who consented to be burned alive on
the funeral pyres of their husbands.

"Next she is Parvati, the girl from the mountain;
Uma, the Beneficent, whose carnal and mystical union
with the Divine Spouse is part of her cult; more fre-
quently as Durga, the Inaccessible; Chandi, the Vio-
lent; Gauri, the Wild, Kali, the Black; or sometimes as
Annapura who gives rice in abundance.

"Associated with several of these are a series of war-

110

like tales about conflicts with demons and a ritual
practice based on human sacrifice. Sometimes she
bears a serene, pacific aspect as in the poets' vision
that sees her as the Mother India; but for the most
part she is a cruel, repugnant figure dripping with
blood, hungry for human flesh, adorned with bracelets
of snakes and a necklace and girdle of skulls.

'"She is the female shakti, energy of Shiva, and be-
cause of this position she is so honored without giving
due honors to her divine spouse. For this reason she is
given high status among the men and women of the
Far East.

'The Saktas who adore the wife of Shiva as his sakti,
or energy, call their manuals, Tantras. These books
contain a literature of such vast importance that I
wonder how so many, over the centuries, have missed
their substantiality. The contents have guided priests
and gurus in their labors through the centuries, while
they have been regarded as inspired authorities by
poets and thinkers.

"What it contains is most important to you and my-
self and every spiritual traveler in the worlds here and
beyond. While secrecy goes with savagery in the Kali
or Sakta cult, it also has left us something for our own
knowledge to help in the Far Country.

4 They have a word a Word of Power a magic
word. If uttered by one who has so subdued his nature
as to be near the spiritual worlds, it may move moun-
tains and achieve empires. It is the very word which all
inner cults of religion have sought, a Word which was
boomed out from the idol in the great inner temples of
Egypt, the Power of Word that was on Aaron's Rod,
the Power of Word the Psalmist says, 'When the sea
heard, it fled'; the Power of Word that was on Solo-

Ill

mon's Ring, and which Jesus, said the Jews, used to
work his miracles. The Power of Word which all men
seek, 'The gyatri' that must never be said, the sacred
cry of obscure meaning *Om Mane padni hum!' 'The
Jewel is in the Lotus/

"Nobody seems to find this word which is written
into the Tantras, the secret mystical word which is
there but not written. This is the paradox of all things
which the worship of the Kali has brought out.

"Now that I have said this much, it behooves me to
bring you up to the next step. There is the Kali, there is
the Shiva, the two faced God; the male and female God
of this earth world. On one side you find the face of
Shiva, the male God, with his symbol, the Linga, the
phallic organ of man; the other face is that of Kali, the
female side with the koni, the female organ of woman.
Both represent two individual cults; the phallus is the
male energy, and the vagina is the female energy.

"Therefore the Word of Power is somehow tied in
with the energies of the universal power, the ECK,
which sends its forces into the human elements, the
body and its bodies or sheaths. The Tuza is aware of
this lost word, but somehow It hasn't yet found it in
the worlds below. It is possible that the Tuza won't,
until getting into the Sach Khand region, as an Initiate
of ECK.

"So you see that man worships the Kali in many
forms, throughout all religions, or he worships the fem-
inine principle, so to speak. He is concerned mostly
with destroying and rebuilding in this world. His aber-
rations keep him on the move destroying most of the
things which come in his path, and it is through the
feminine principle that he is interested in the ways of
creating and destroying.

112

"So it is strange that in this weird philosophy of
destruction, you find the Word of Power. This Word on
the planes of the lower worlds is a two edged
sword for it can create or destroy; the creative side is
the male principle and the destructive side is the
female principle.

'This power is in every woman who walks or has
walked the earth planet. It is in her makeup to give life
or destroy it; this is her nature and sad as it may be,
the more freedom that a woman has the more that she
wishes to experiment with life. She gives birth to
babies as a creative process, but this is only one of her
functions on the earth planet. Observe the nature of
woman in your casual relations with them they want
to pull everything down to their level this is because
woman feels inferior to the male species. She will go to
untold lengths in order to bring a man dlown to her
level and make herself equal. This is the Kali force
working within her. This is the power, or the word
which the Tantras keep so secretly hidden and never
write down, but at the same time tell you what it is and
what it might be.

"The menstruations of woman are tied to the forces
of nature, and because of this cruelty, Kali herself is
forced to demand the blood of humans and animals.
This is to make up for what she loses monthly. She
fights the desperate fight against nature and not win-
ning, she takes her revenge by demanding that all
women obey her and seek the equalization of man. She
is gaining more strength and status from the ages
through which she lives, until possibly one day, Kali
may be the leader of all races that is woman might be-
come the head of the family and leaders of nations.

"This is why you and all spiritual travelers must

113

study the worship of Kali. Man is coming into the era
now where he is fighting for his position in the society
of races, because women are trying to take his place.
There have been many matriarchal societies in the his-
tory of the earth and every time this has happened,
there has been a major regression as the feminine prin-
ciple rules.

"The more civilized a nation or society becomes, the
more it is influenced by women, the feminine principle.
After it reaches its zenith as in the Golden Ages of
Greece, when Pericles ruled, the feminine principle
starts to turn the tide of attitudes with many female
qualities, like love, charity and forgiveness. Each is a
feminine quality and not at all like the qualities of the
SUGMAD, those taught by the great spiritual Lords
on the upper planes of the Far Country.

"Kali is a civilizing creature, representing a minor
current in the lower world which is not very well known
by most of the people who worship her in some form, be
it the Virgin Mother Mary, or the Rain Goddess of the
Congo.

"I'll take up more about Kali later! "

"Sakti is the worship of Shiva, the form of pleasure
derived from the guthya or Koni, the female organ.
Shiva is the Linga, or the worship of the phallus. The
union of these two is the cause of all joy in the uni-
verse, say these followers of the two cults. It is also the
unknown belief of all religions and cults on this earth.

"Kali therefore represents the essence, power and
force in life. Her followers have the complex that is
sometimes met in the work of the somewhat super-
feminists, that the female is the superior and dominat-
ing force in the world and must be allowed to control it.
You hear this being taught by mothers and feminine

114

men to small children during their early years.

"The important aspect of this fecundity cult is that
the doctrine of reincarnation is associated with it, as in
most religions that give credence to the subject. It
means that every birth allows a waiting Soul to tread
one more stage to salvation. The looseness of the moral
code in regard to sex is an excuse given to help a Tuza
reach perfection through reincarnation.

'This is a part of the teachings on the Kundalinu
The Saktis believe that the worship of the mother god-
dess, Kali, and the performance of the sex act can bring
about release of the Kundalini; that acts of violence
will also release this strange powerful force.

"The Kundalini is actually the sex force, in a manner
of speaking. In other words the kundalini is a dichot-
omy with two sides, the physical side and the subtle.
The Sakti use the physical acts in order to release the
kundalini, which is neither permanent nor stable in any
manner.

"Those who follow the Patanjali system of yoga use
the Pranayama exercises, which release or awaken the
kundalini from its dormant state in the indri chakra, or
swadhistana center. It lies near the sacral plexus and is
associated with the function of reproduction. It is the
creative center in man. Not the brain or the mind; as I
pointed out before, this is actually the creative center
in man.

"When awakened this force rises through the central
canal of the spinal cord, known to the anatomists as
the sixth ventricle; to the occultists as the Susumna
path, with two smaller canals, one called Ida, on the
left, and the other called Pingala, on the right. When
the Kundalini rises to the brain, fully aflame, a series
of important changes take place in the consciousness,

115

especially in the feelings and emotions.

"The individual is on fire, so to speak. He has also a
very great increase of powerspowers over the forces
of nature and powers over other people. If, however,
that individual has not been properly prepared for
these changes by a rigorous process of training in self-
control and mind purification, the results may be very
disastrous. Even death or insanity may follow.

"For this reason then, the way of the Kali is wrong
the ecstasy brought to man through affection for and
love of a woman, or the worship of sex in her, is danger-
ous if it arouses the kundalini. Take the example of
John Keats whose love for a woman was so great that
it released this power in him and brought his death; the
same happened to Lord Shelley, the poet, who went
nearly insane and lost his life by drowning; Byron also
had the same experience and went out of his life at
thirty-two.

"This Kundalini is dangerous on the lower planes.
No man should play around with it unless he is in-
structed by the MAHANTA, the living ECK Master.
It can do great injury to the body and bring ruination
upon the user's head, unless he is careful and properly
guided.

"The systems taught by yoga to release this flame
power are of the lower world, and of no need to the spir-
itual traveler. The Tuza who wants the release of his
kundalini must contact someone who can help him;
then he can begin to release it and move into the higher
spiritual realms.

"You see man, himself, is a microcosm of the greater
macrocosm, and in order for him to see this there are
certain methods by which it can be done, mainly, intui-
tion. Man is the microcosm and inside him are still

116

smaller microcosms, each one of which has a definite
relation to some portion of the outlying universe. The
entire existence of man is wrapped up in a larger being.
He himself is but a cell in the body of the cosmos. Yet,
taken as an individual, man is a small universe. More
accurately speaking, man is a cluster of universes, all
within himself.

44 In him lies hidden the sum total of all universes.
Each cell in his body is a still smaller universe and each
atom in each cell is still a smaller one. The body of man
is a vast and complicated system of universes, millions
of universes clustered together in a single unit.

"Man is indeed a complete replica of the vast sys-
tems outside of him, and in this fact lies a great hope.
It is a gracious promise to man by the SUGMAD.
Man, in the study of himself, learns about the great
universes on the outside. By going within to go out-
side, he awakens all his latent powers. Doing this, he
then comes into conscious touch with the entire sys-
tems of worlds, both physical and subtle, filling end-
less space.

"The exact process by means of which this is to be
accomplished will be revealed by the spiritual traveler
to those who wish to follow in his footsteps.

"Each and every man, when properly trained, is able
to detach himself from the physical body, while still
living in that body in perfect health, and travel to all
parts of the outlying universe.

"Everyone has this ability, whether conscious of it
or not, but during his sojourn in this world he has for-
gotten and lost the knowledge of how this is done.

"The microcosmic centers in the body are: (1) the
Mulchakra, which is also called the muladhara or guda-
chakra. It is located near the rectum and governs elimi-

117

nation.

"These centers are all shaped somewhat like the lo-
tus flower, more or less round, and the number of dis-
tinct parts are spoken of as petals. This lowest one has
four petals, the higher ones increasing in number, as
they ascend.

"It is an interesting fact that all of these body
chakras taken together, have exactly fifty-two petals,
corresponding to the fifty-two letters in the Sanskrit
alphabet, and each petal gives out a sound of a distinct
musical note, corresponding to one of the Sanskrit let-
ters. These sounds can be heard by any person whose
finer sense of hearing has been awakened. He can then
see these chakras and listen to their sounds. It is
claimed that these fifty-two sounds comprise all of the
sounds which can be possibly made by the vocal or-
gans of man. It is said that the ancient rishis and
masters, listening to the fifty-two sounds, fashioned a
character for each one, and that is the way the Sanskrit
alphabet came into existence.

"The second chakra is called the Indri-chakra or
linga chakra, where the Shiva God is worshipped, as
well as the Kali. It is also called the Shat-dal-kanwal.
Located near the sacral plexus, it has six petals. It has
to do with reproduction.

"Third is the Nabhi chakra. It is often called Ashta-
dal-kanwal. It is located at a point near the solar
plexus and has mostly to do with general nutrition. It
has eight petals.

"Fourth is the Hrida chakra. It is also named Dvad-
ach-dal-kanwal. It is near the cardia plexus and has
twelve petals. Its function is to serve the circulation of
the blood and breathing.

"Fifth is the Kanth. It lies near the cervical plexus

118

and has to do with respiration. It is also named the
Shat-das-dal-kanwal, the lotus of sixteen petals.

"The sixth center is called Do-dal-kanwal, the two
petaled lotus. It is located back of the eyes on a level
with the lower part of the eyeballs, but exactly in the
center of the brain cavity, at a point in the subtle body,
corresponding with the position of the pineal body.
This is the seat of the mind and the Tuza.

"This is the center of control over the body. All cen-
ters below this one are subordinate. All deities or
forces which are said to govern the body are them-
selves subordinate to the mind and spirit of man which
reside in this center.

"Above this center is another center called Char-dal-
kanwal, whose function is to supply the four-fold
Antishkarans, the mental faculties of the mind, with
centers of action. These four faculties are: Manas,
Buddhi, Chitta and Ahankara. Each of the petals of
this lotus has its own sound, and these four complete
the fifty-two letters of the Sanskrit alphabet. This is
the lowest of the six centers in Anda and lies nearest to
Pinda, the fourth grand division.

"Just above the Antishkaran four petaled center
comes the Tisra Til, third eye, at which the chela con-
centrates his attention, when practicing the spiritual
exercises of ECK. Thus the Tuza resides in the Do-dal-
kanwal, when in the body, and leaves through the
Tisra Til.

"This is enough for today. Tomorrow I'll talk some
more on these centers."

"Now to finish the Tisra Til or the third eye. This

119

subtle organ is also called the Shiva-netra, the eye of
Shiva. It is also Nukti-i-saveda, the black point-
known mainly to the Saktas, followers of Kali, the
Black Goddess.

"In the case of the Nukti-i-saveda, the concentration
is worked in reverse and Soul, in getting out of the
body, is kept earth-bound, doing many things which
often ends in violence. It's a sort of left hand path, or
black magic.

"There are many centers still higher in the brain,
each corresponding to a region in the higher worlds.
There are twenty-two important centers in man's sub-
tle body, besides almost numberless smaller ones
which may be likened to the smaller nerve ganglia in
the body. They all have a certain function but it is too
much to explain here, so we'll keep to the high spots.

"I have given the six centers in Pinda, the lower
world, or body below the eyes, as a study. This is be-
cause so many yogis emphasize these and use them,
but no spiritual traveler uses them. They begin their
concentration at Tisra Til, and from there they move
upward.

"If one begins there, the next station above Tisra Til
is Ashta-dal-Kanwal, the lotus of eight petals; then the
next above that is the true center of all the Astral
worlds, the Sahasra-dal-Kanwal, and this is the first of
the great regions traveled by the spiritual travelers in
the Far Country.

"All great yogis generally stop here, many of them
fully believing that they have attained the highest in
the Far Country. It is practically the starting point of
the spiritual travelers on their upward journey toward
the supreme region. That supreme world lies eight dis-
tinct stages above, or seven exclusive of Sahasra-dal-

120

Kanwal. Sahasra-dal-Kanwal lies just below the
Brahm Lok of the Hindus, which is known in the lan-
guage of the ECK travelers as TirkutL

"This is the second stage on the path for the great
Yogis. For the ancient Hindus and the Vedas, it was
the end of all, the residence of the Supreme Godhead.
In the science of the spiritual travelers, Brahma is
known as the Negative Power.

''It was inevitable that the feeling of bhakti, or love,
which is inseparable from the life itself should eventu-
ally manifest itself in something like the Tantric cult of
Kali. Tantra's fundamental characteristic is a full, un-
conditional acceptance of life and the world of creation,
as they are, whereas the intellectual denied their
reality.

"The former was life-affirming, whereas the latter
life-denying. The intellectual, in fact, was the represen-
tative of a petrified civilization's intellect, rational,
coldly logical and sterile. The greatest modern expo-
nent of Tantra, the Kali cult, was Sri Ramakrishna,
who defined Tantra in this manner, 'The bhaktas
accept all the states of consciousness. They take the
waking state to be real also. They don't think the world
to be illusory, like a dream. They say that the universe
is a manifestation of the SUGMAD's power and glory.
The SUGMAD has created all these sky, stars, moon,
sun, mountains, ocean, men, animals. They constitute

His glory He is within us, in our hearts. Again, He

is outside/

"Ramakrishna added that Jnana, the path of knowl-
edge, that is obtained through radical negation led to
the Absolute, impersonal Godhead of monism. But
bhakti, the progressive affirmation of unquenchable
love, leads to something else; to the worship of the cos-

121

tnic force of the universe, sakti, as symbolized by the
goddess Kali.

"The popular, optimistic and almost sensuous as-
pect of the Kali cult as given in the Tantra, is the natu-
ral complement of the more negative and intellectually
aristocratic Vedanta in its complete acceptance and fu-
sion of the four basic pursuits of man: prosperity,
(artha), sensual love (kama), earthly duties (dharma)
and final release (moksha).

"In the Kali movement, the Hinduism of the last few
centuries, is finally expressed most completely in its
catholic rites and devotions: consecrations, transub-
stantiations, incense and offerings accompany yogic
meditation. More than anything else, this cult has
given free rein to the development of the powers of the
imagination. And nowhere as in India, has the power of
imagination been able to recreate art and cause a meta-
morphosis in the devotee himself, than in the Kali wor-
ship.

"Sri Ramakrishna said at one time. The Divine
Mother revealed to me in the Kali temple that it was
She who had become everything/

"The Kali described by the Tantra text is one who
should be adored with liquors and oblations. She who
has a gaping mouth and uncombed hair; who has four
hands and a splendid garland formed of the heads of
the giants she has slain, and whose blood she has
drunk; who is as black as the large clouds and has the
whole sky for her clothes; who has a string of skulls
around her neck and throat besmeared with blood; who
wears ear-rings, consisting of two dead bodies; who
carries two dead bodies in her hands; whose form is aw-
ful and who dwells in the burial grounds of consumed
corpses.

122

"This is the Divine Mother of the gentle saint, also
the goddess of the criminal, blood-thirsty Thuggee
cult. Can you imagine anyone worshipping this out-
landish symbol?

"Kali is but the primitive energy called Shakti in
this lower world, and whoever can understand this all
creative element which can also destroy, is among the
highest in the world of the Anda. She is the burning of
the fire, the subtle side of Shiva.

"Other mystics in India have followed this strange
goddess. Vivekananda was her disciple. The great In-
diafi teacher, Aurobindo Ghose, found refuge in her
arms. Subhas Bose, a ranking member of the Indian
congress, whose opposition to Gandhi's non-violence
platform brought him into the light of international
news, was a devotee. These are among a few who have
been followers of the Kali.

"Having brought you this far, I will go to the next
step. The symbol of the Kali is the manifestation of the
feminine principle in man and woman. She is the repre-
sentation of all womanhood, the great mother, the
moon goddess, the divine mother.

"This mother goddess is the heavenly representative
of womanhood. She is the Mother, the Woman who is
immortal. She does not die like man, but lives eter-
nally, the prototype of woman, the eternal feminine.
She lives eternally and it is her unchanging, enduring
character which is her most marked characteristic. She
is the power behind God, or to quote the early Greek
writers, she is the fatal goddess, the Goddess of Fate,
and often therefore the inexorable one, the goddess of
death, whom even the efforts of her devotees cannot
mollify.

"The Kali is the All-Giver, mother of Gods and men

123

and of the creatures of the field. Her story appears
again and again in primitive mythologies. Sometimes
she is the Moon Mother, the creative Earth Mother,
Mother Nature. In many systems her concept closely
resembles that of the Kali so it is hard to say what is
the mother goddess that all ancient people worshipped
and is still found today in the Kali and the Virgin
Mary. All are represented as the same generative and
destructive powers. The Chaldeans, Greeks, Scandi-
navians, Hindus and Chinese speak of their mother
goddess, sometimes as earth deities but always in the
terms of the generative and destructive powers.

"In all ages and in all places men have conceived of a
Great Mother, a Great Woman, who watches over
mankind from some place in the sky, or from the place
of the gods and the temples. This concept can be found
in practically every religion and mythology whose con-
tents have come to my knowledge.

"These Great Mothers, whose worship has domi-
nated the religious thoughts of people far removed
from each other in time, space and culture, have an
essential similarity which cannot but amaze you. The
Great Mother was worshipped in ancient Babylonia, in
the Near East, in Egypt, in Rome, in medieval Europe,
even to this day among the peasants of Europe, in the
Celtic countries, in ancient Mexico, among the North
and South American Indians, in Africa, in Australia, in
Polynesia, in India, and in ancient China.

"In all these places, and the list is not complete, the
Mother has certain clearly defined qualities. She par-
takes of the characteristics of the moon, and in a pecu-
liar sense, she is the women's deity. She represents the
feminine qualities of fertility and virginal births.

"All women find a worship for the Mother Goddess,

124

whether they are aware of it or not. It might be in the
church, or it could be of their nature to give adoration
to this strange being, which is actually the minor fem-
inine current on this earth plane.

"This feminine principle is in constant struggle
against the masculine principle, because it is consid-
ered natural. It is like water which can blend, or bend
at any moment and by doing so overcome the user of it.
Drink too much and you will die from over indulgence.
Immerse too long and you will drown. But stay away
from it and you die of thirst or dehydration. This is the
strength of the feminine principle.

"Women know this and in this manner they use man
for their needs. In other words they are the conquerors,
if man doesn't know it in time. You have only to know,
when a woman has set out to overcome you through
love, forgiveness and subtle conquest. She intends to
keep you in the lower creations, but if you can mold her
and make her pliant to your touch she can become a
great spiritual traveler.

"She can reach the world of SUGMAD without
man's help. Instinctively she knows this yet she
reaches out for man to hold him to her side. Once she
understands what can be done for her, then she will
seek out the ECK which can take her upward into the
airy heights of the Far Country/'

125

126

Chapter 6
THAT ALONE EXISTS

Rebazar Tarzs wasted little time after my arrival the
next morning. The sunlight made patterns across the
floor, via the window and door. A blue fly crawled up
the side of the wall and tickled his wings as though he
were going to dive bomb us from that height.

The long ranges of the high peaks in the Hindu Kush
mountains sparkled in white brilliancy. The shade was
cool and inviting, similar to days spent along the Mis-
sissippi River when I was a child. Everything was a
perfect setting, but more or less a setting filled with
unreality. Nevertheless I saw that it was easy to an-
chor my deeper self to this great spiritual traveler and
left it that way.

"Now a study of the Divine SUGMAD is in order,"
said Rebazar Tarzs, dropping upon the floor and
putting his legs one over the other in a lotus position.

"You know what the SUGMAD IS, and you have
some idea of what IT is like, and IT has to fit certain
mechanical laws which IT has set up for ITSELF in
the operation and management of the world processes,
and their complexities.

"You see the SUGMAD, in a sense, operates like an
individual. IT makes ITS own laws and must abide by
them. This is the way that man works on a mechanical
basis from habit. He sets up certain laws or rather
postulates by which he must operate. These postulates
or considerations may be in line with some other group
of Souls, but all the same he must establish them him-
self or they will not be followed in the general social

127

order in which he lives.

"This makes for rebels. Those who can't get into the
swing of things that everybody else is doing must live
outside the social order and suffer; although this might
be a slight social ostracization compared to that of
getting killed, as happened in Hitler's times.

"I don't know if you are aware of this, but the
SUGM AD is as fixed in ITS ways as many individuals
are on this earth plane. IT has to fight battles to stay
in a certain conformed groove, because once out of it
too many followers complain. So IT becomes as
mechanical as the poor weaklings IT commands. Yet
on the other hand the SUGMAD is also capable of
changing nature quickly; however any changes made
are usually done with lightning speed because it is con-
venient.

"The seekers of the SUGMAD must leave the earth
world sooner or later. Their work is never completed,
and has to be left to immature disciples who generally
ignore IT.

"Seldom do chelas become real ECK travelers. The
travelers tell their chelas that they have realized God
in themselves, but as soon as they depart, the disciples
begin to say that they feel God in themselves. There is
a vast difference. The travelers see the SUGMAD,
which is the real deity. They do not feel IT. And that
constitutes an essential difference. Feeling is more or
less blind and wholly unreliable. The spiritual travelers
actually enter and explore the Kingdom of the Far
Country, but the disciples read about it in books and
begin to speculate.

4 You don't find the SUGMAD through religion.
IT's beyond religion of any nature, and nobody is
going to seek for IT correctly when they know not

128

where IT is.

"The SUGMAD is beyond this world of senses, this
world of eternal eating and drinking and talking non-
sense, this world of false shadows and selfishness.

"IT is beyond all books, beyond all creeds, beyond
the vanities of the world. It is the realization of the
SUGMAD within oneself.

"A man may believe in all the churches in the world;
he may carry in his head all the sacred books ever
written; he may baptize himself in all the rivers of the
earth, still if he has no perception of the SUGMAD, I
would class him with the rankest atheist. And a man
may never enter a church or a mosque, nor perform any
ceremony; but if he realizes the SUGMAD within him-
self, and is thereby lifted above the vanities of the
world, that man is a holy man, a saint; call him what
you will.

"I will add that it is good to be born in a church, but
it is bad to die there. It is good to be born a child, but
bad to remain a child. Churches, ceremonies, symbols,
are good for children; but when a child is grown up, he
must burst, either the church or himself.

"This realization of the SUGMAD must be explain-
ed to you. Most people have no idea what one is talking
about, nor do any of the many writers who turn out
reams on the subject have the foggiest idea of what
this expression means.

"First of all, it is not a feeling. Secondly, it is not a
metaphysical speculation, nor a logical syllogism. It is
not a conclusion based upon reasoning, nor upon the
evidence of books or persons.

"The basic idea is that the SUGMAD must become
real to the individual. Not a mental concept of IT, but a
living reality. This can never be until the individual

129

sees IT. Personal sight and hearing are necessary, be-
fore anything or anybody becomes real to us. To prac-
tically all men, the SUGMAD is an abstract idea, a
mental concept. But how can you worship a mental
concept? When most people say they love the
SUGMAD, they mean that they have a certain emo-
tion, superinduced by suggestion. It hasn't got the
least thing to do with the realization of the SUGMAD.

"Now, the purpose of all higher thought is to convert
that mental concept into something that is real to ex-
perience. It is only then that the ECK traveler can
have a true insight upon realization.

"The real poverty of all religions has been their ina-
bility to make the SUGMAD real to their devotees.
Can you imagine that men would live as they do, think
and act as they do, if the SUGMAD was real to them:
It is unthinkable. It must be confessed that as sad as
that confession is, that not one Soul in all history has
been able to realize the SUGMAD by and through any
religious doctrine, or ceremony; not even by prayer and
mental devotion to an ideal.

"We know this is so, because such realization can
never be achieved by such means. In the very nature of
the case it is impossible. The best they can do is feel a
little closer to Reality, or to quicken the imagination a
little by prayer, Smarana* and concentration. If one
gets into subtle regions, even to some small degree, he
will experience a little uplift.

"This is good, but the feeling he gets will never carry
him to those heights where he will possess complete
realization of the SUGMAD. What then can lead him
to that complete, supreme desideratum, or realization?

*Smarana repeating of holy names.

130

The spiritual travelers can give you the answer.

* There is but one method of making the SUGMAD
real to you that is, to make you see the SUGMAD
and hear IT. If you say this cannot be done, that is be-
cause you are unacquainted with the path into the Far
Country, and the true methods.

"When the seeker enters the higher planes and there
beholds within his own finer vision some majestic em-
bodiment of the SUGMAD, clothed in divine power
and beauty; and when he hears the enchanting music of
the ECK, he then begins to realize the SUGMAD.

"But the realization is not complete at this point.
Only when he rises by the aid of the ECK, to the still
higher planes, and there in great joy blends his own
spiritual being with the Supreme SUGMAD, then it is
that he may experience this divine realization.

"From this fact, it must be evident that no religious
ceremony can accomplish so much. Certainly no men-
tal process can do this. It is a personal experience that
cannot be had upon this earth plane. It is not an experi-
ence possible to physical consciousness. One simply
must enter the super-physical planes to get it. Not only
this, but he must rise to very exalted regions, and this
can be accomplished only on the path to the Far Coun-
try, and with the help of the spiritual travelers.

"When the chela of a spiritual traveler ascends the
spiritual worlds, one after another, he enters Daswan
Dwar, the first plane of the heavenly country; he there
beholds himself as pure spirit, stripped of all material-
ity. And this is Self-Realization.

"After that, if he advances into the higher worlds, he
there beholds one or more of the most sublime manifes-
tations of the Supreme SUGMAD, and then merging
himself with these manifestations of the SUGMAD, he

131

comes to know the SUGMAD. And this is genuine
SUGMAD-realization. There is no other.

"No man can ever know the SUGMAD, until he con-
sciously becomes one with the divine Self. Anything
short of this is more or less speculative, imaginary,
visionary and imperfect.

"This is a summing up of the whole matter. Churches,
formal religions belong to the immature periods of hu-
man thought and evolution, to the childhood of the
race. Each religion serves its own purpose in its own
day and time. But each must eventually give way to
something more complete, as mankind advances to
greater spiritual understanding.

"Throughout the whole of human history, the very
essence of religion has been an effort to realize the
SUGMAD. How many have succeeded? What you
might call a handful!

"Only the great ECK travelers have had the perfect
system by means of which it can be done, and the trav-
elers have been very few among men. Efforts toward
this sort of realization have always failed, except and
only, when they have followed the method which I've
laid down here.

"If the ardent followers of certain religions insist
that many people have succeeded by their own meth-
ods, that is because they over-estimate a partial
success.

"Something is gained, no doubt, by nearly all forms
and ceremonies, by prayers and deeds of charity. But
not complete realization of the SUGMAD not even
perfect Self-Realization.

"Do you understand what I am saying?

"If you do, then we are on the right track, for it is so
hard to get anyone to grasp the essential meaning of

132

Self-Realization. We haven't gotten to the ECK, the
spirit of all things yetbut that is coming, for all
things are made up of the ECK, and not the SUGMAD.

'There is a vast difference between the two. I will ex-
plain later. "

* * *

"Now to continue on the subject of the Supreme
SUGMAD," said Rebazar Tarzs quietly, while looking
over my head at the sunlight streaming through the
doorway.

"There are six different ways the Supreme SUGMAD
has to make ITSELF known to men. Notice here that
sometimes I speak of the SUGMAD in the pronoun,
HIM, and other times in the neuter, IT. This magnifi-
cent power is not to be named, for IT is so great that
we cannot give IT a designation as is the earth men's
habit of tagging people by names.

"All right, the six ways that the Supreme SUGMAD
has to make ITSELF known to man are often called
rays of light from the Divine. They are spoken of at
times, as if they are personalities Ameshspenta,
which means the Holy immortals.

"They are:

"First, the Asa-Vahista, the Supreme Will, manifest-
ed in the world. Second, the Vohu-Mano, good mind,
divine wisdom, pure mindedness. Third, the Khashath-
ra-Vairya, all creative, all sustaining power. Fourth,
the Spenta-Armaiti, perfect piety with single minded
devotion. Fifth, the Haurvata, absolute, wholeness,
perfection, spirituality, and sixth, Ameretatat, immor-
tal life, freedom from death, or dissolution.

"These six represent both the maternal and paternal
qualities of the Supreme SUGMAD, the first three, the
father, and the last three, the motherly nature of the

133

Supreme.

"Of course there is the seventh, which is needed to
make up the total of the first six rays and the essence
of that we know as the ECK, the highest of all spiritual
powers. The ECK gives life, sustains all life and binds
together as the adhesive force we know as love.

"Now there is an eighth ray, if you wish to call it
that. Rather an eighth power, which you know as the
ECK. It is often called Sraosha in the Far Country. A
word derived from the Sanskrit root, Sru, meaning to
hear. This is most significant. It is quite clear to the
spiritual traveler that this ray of the Divine One is
something that can be heard. This refers to the ECK,
that audible life stream of the SUGMAD. It can be
nothing else.

"This Sraosha is the central theme in all the teach-
ings of the world. The spiritual traveler knows that it
is the supreme thing for man to seek and to cultivate.
He knows that when one fully attains to this Sraosha
or ECK, that the way stands open before him to enter
into the Far Country; all obstructions are removed.

"Going back to religion, you might say that religion
for anyone is not the church, the organized body of
those following a series of concepts, but it is the inner
experience of the individual. To get to this experience,
one must go inside and find his way through to the spi-
ritual worlds.

"He must detach himself from all sense objects by
concentrating the attention on something inside, and
suddenly he will be outside in the subjective worlds.
Does that make sense?

"By leaving the outer world and entering the inner
world of consciousness, the spiritual traveler finds
himself. There is no exception to this rule. This is the

134

true system of the ECK travelers, and it is true of all
other systems which yield any sort of high spiritual ex-
perience whatsoever. Here is the crucial point as the
methods differ, so will the experiences differ. The
method of the spiritual traveler is exacting. All other
methods are more or less haphazard, empirical and un-
certain.

"Because of these various methods which the many
religious organizations have, the experiences in the
other worlds are vastly different. Take for example
here on this plane; the experience of the movie actor is
going to be vastly different from that of a public
accountant. This is obvious.

"This explains why so many religions exist in this
world and in the other worlds up to the Daswan Dwar
plane* Each of the followers of the various religious
groups have different experiences, in their own meth-
ods. Within each method the experience is uniform and
therefore makes for reality for those following that par-
ticular method.

"There is a vast difference also in the differences of
religious experiences. This also explains why there is
such an endless variety and confusion in the results ob-
tained by all other methods.

"Also there is a vast difference in the degree and ex-
tent of penetration into the inner worlds, and so there
must be a corresponding difference in the results ob-
tained. This fact further accounts for the great variety
of inner experiences, and the variety of religions based
upon the experiences.

"One may leave the outer world and enter very
slightly into the regions of thought. If he concentrates
at that point, thought-forms will build up about him,
and his problems will be solved, so far as his own

135

thought can solve them. These thought-forms can be
seen by anyone who has astral vision. This is the re-
gion where mind plays its greatest dramas. It is on the
Astral plane that mind goes on creating molding and
shaping as it desires. All the while there is a constant
stream of suggestion pouring in upon the individual.
This helps to mold his thought-forms. Finally many
Tuzas, who are more sensitive are able to actually see
their own thought-forms and they imagine they have
seen some great characters outside themselves. Those
thought-images will often talk to them, out of the
depths of the sub-conscious self.

"There has never been a religion founded, never a
good book written, never a good picture painted, never
a good poem composed, never a good invention devel-
oped, except by going inside to some extent, and there
concentrating on the task in hand. Even if one is not
conscious of the exact thing he is to accomplish, he
gets results by concentration. That is the great thing
in the process perfect concentration, becoming oblivi-
ous to the outer world of sense, centering attention
upon that which is to be found in the Far Country. This
is the way of attainment, no matter in what line of en-
deavor. No matter what one is to achieve, this is the
one and only method leading to success. Concentrated
attention is the key that unlocks all stores of wisdom,
of truth and spirituality.

"When the traveler comes face to face with his own
mental creation at the beginning of his journey, and if
he is without previous experience on this path, he will
be almost helpless unless he has the guiding direction
of a traveler who has gone on before him.

"This has been the unfortunate experience of thou-
sands of those who have entered to some degree into

136

the inner consciousness; they got the impression that
some deity, or some angel, or relative is leading them.
They hear the Voice of God, they say. Or they get the
impression that God himself is giving them some
command, or instruction.

"But as a matter of fact, such vision, or voices, or im-
pressions, are as a rule, their own mental creations.
This process is plainly visible to anyone who has inde-
pendent astral vision. The individual himself is rarely
able to make the distinction, because he hasn't such
independent vision. He fondly believes God is speak-
ing to him directly, when he is actually hearing nothing
but the faint whisperings of his own mind, coming up
out of his subconscious self. He is deceived, self-
deceived. And so often he announces that he has re-
ceived a message from God, or that God is leading him
to do certain things. Many people say that God has
ordered them to commit murder, or do all sorts of
atrocities. It is their disordered mind.

"To the spiritual traveler who has learned much
about psychological phenomena, it is quite apparent
that any command from God is nothing more than a
creation of one's own mind, superinduced by a long
course of suggestion.

"It has happened many times in history. New cults
are started as result of this, movements inaugurated,
sacrifices made, and books written, solely on the
strength of such commands from God. These indivi-
duals are not to be blamed for their mistakes. Most of
them are serious, sincere devotees of religion. The
trouble is that they have no safeguard, no reliable
guidance. They cannot see inside, so as to detect the
fraud that is being perpetrated upon them by their own
minds.

137

"As soon as a person enters into the lower spiritual
worlds, only for a small distance inside, he is always
confronted and fairly assaulted by multitudes of his
own thought-forms. They have nearly all taken shape
out of his own past training and the ideas he has held
for long periods of time, aided by the suggestions of
others. They spring up out of his own long-cherished
desires. In the end, they mislead him into all sorts of
by-paths. This psychological process, we believe, is the
real source of most of that endless variety of exper-
ience which people call religious, and accounts for the
great multiplicity of religions. Even William James
was mislead in his studies of those who experienced
these varieties of religious phenomena.

"Every ECK traveler keeps a vigilant eye upon his
mental processes. When he begins to enter the inner
worlds, even to the slightest degree, he must beware of
his own misleading mental creations. In all of his
waking consciousness, he is to remember that his mind
is his worst enemy, as well as his most useful instru-
ment. But the main point is that he must keep it under
control every moment. The mind is a useful servant
but a bad master.

"The deeper one penetrates into the finer regions of
truth and reality, the more perfect his light becomes.
The spiritual traveler never imagines he is led by the
SUGMAD. He never gets a false impression, and he
never organizes a misleading cult out of his own dis-
ordered impressions. The SUGMAD never talks di-
rectly to people, as I Ve just described.

"The SUGMAD has ITS way of leading men to the
light. There are two methods used by the Supreme
One: First, is the method of the whole world, led by
natural law, personal experience and experimenta-

138

tion trial and discard. The second is finding the
M AH ANT A who will help you and give you his benefit
by taking you with him on trips into the Far Country
until you're able to travel alone.

"Remember that the SUGMAD doesn't interfere in
the affairs of men. IT never speaks to anyone, IT never
is seen by anyone, nor does IT impress anyone's
mind."

"Now, to be able to hear the Supreme One, is an
exalted attainment, far above that ever experienced by
any spiritual seeker, except a saint or traveler. But the
real saints and travelers are few in this world.

"A further word of warning has to be given here.
Even if the seeker sees visions inside, he must beware
of them. If he meets individuals, men, angels, even
someone appearing as the Supreme Deity, or claiming
to be IT or Jesus or a saint, beware that he is not
deceived. If the seeker is a disciple of a real spiritual
traveler, he cannot be deceived.

"He would have a definite infallible method of test-
ing each vision, or appearance, to prove if they were
genuine, as claimed. But should he not have this arma-
ment, he could almost be assured that he was being
misled.

"The mind is treacherous, and besides this, the lower
subtle worlds are filled with millions of other minds
who are just as treacherous as our own. Don't believe
them. Like the spiritual travelers say we shouldn't
even salute them, or speak to them unless they are
brought to attention by a traveler.

"If you imagine you see the Lord himself, any Lord
whom you regard highly, do not allow that vision to

139

carry you off your feet. The vision may be a creation of
your own mind, or it may be the creation of some other
intelligence, or an impersonation. Beware of it.

"Until one has the assistance of an ECK traveler, it
is wiser to avoid all inner experiences. Above all, one
should discount all voices which he hears. The use of
your initiate's word will determine if your experience is
genuine. If someone appears before you in a vision
claiming mastership or a Deity, the use of your
charged word will determine the vision. If a fraud, it
will disappear.

"Now let me give you the answer to another question
which apparently bothers many people. A genuine
ECK Master is the superman of the ethnologists and
philosophers. He is that which Nietzsche sought to
bring out in his Zarathustra.

"The Master is the highest developed man known to
history, and consequently by virtue of his develop-
ment, he has become the prototype of the race, the
most splendid specimen of manhood, the noblest of the
noble.

"It is generally understood that no man with a defec-
tive body, any serious deformity, can ever become a
spiritual traveler. His mind must be of a very high
type, keen, penetrating, quick of wit, and sound of
judgment. He may not be educated in a university or
college, but his mind must undergo the severest train-
ing and discipline. During the process of becoming a
living ECK Master, he attains all knowledge which
could possibly be given in the colleges and universities.
In all respects the spiritual traveler is the highest type
of man, when judged as man.

"The ECK traveler is the only man ever manifested
in all history in whom individualism and universalism

140

are combined in their full expression. That is, the
spiritual traveler stands alone, is a law unto himself,
does what he pleases, has what he wants, comes and
goes absolutely at his own will, and asks favors of no
man. Neither can any man hinder him in the execution
of his will. He is the only man who has no need to ask
favors of others; he has all things at his own command.
If he suffers hardships, or inconveniences, that is be-
cause he chooses to do so for some purpose. He always
pays for what he gets. He is not a slave to anyone, is no
time server, is not bound by any rule or custom outside
of himself, and is a citizen of the whole world.

"There is but one to whom the spiritual traveler
bows in humble submission the Supreme SUGMAD
Lord of All things in the highest height of the spiritual
worlds. ITS sovereign law is the only law the spiritual
traveler recognizes, and the universal law of all laws-
Wisdom, Power and Freedom!

"Now, the world is the theater of the intellect. At
least this is one of its fields of operation. It is the play
or sport of the Kali, mother goddess. In this field
science has made many conquests, and will doubtless
make more. But there is a vast field far above and be-
yond the play of the mind, where the developed travel-
er alone may enter It is into this higher region of the
spirit the traveler goes, and it is there his real achieve-
ments are made.

"Entering there by methods well known to him, he
finds that this earth world is nothing more than the
mudball of nature's vast and complicated structure.
Above and beyond this world of shadow and pain, lie
innumerable worlds of intense light. They are real
worlds, full of beauty, color, rhythm and joy. Escaping
for the time being the limitations of the body, the

141

spiritual traveler goes into the higher worlds, in full
consciousness, and then returns to report what he has
seen and heard, and otherwise experienced. He finds,
among other things, that death is only an appearance,
an illusion.

"When man leaves his physical body, at the time of
what we call death, he simply steps out into another
and higher world. He takes with him a finer body,
which he now uses unconsciously, and on that higher
plane, he uses the finer one just as he used the physical
body here.

'The Supreme One is the infinite, limitless, whole of
spiritual existence. The universal Tuza of all Tuzas, of
all worlds, cannot be wholly centered in and limited to
a single physical body, regardless of what the Catholic
religion teaches.

"The SUGMAD is all Wisdom, Power and Freedom,
and is the controller of the ECK, omnipresent and all-
pervading. The spiritual traveler who has reached
these heights is the same except for his physical limita-
tions. Spiritually, he has no limitations. But the body
is not the traveler, it is only a covering, one of his many
instruments.

"He may at will leave the body and work on any of
the higher planes, each higher plane gives him greater
freedom and scope of action. He himself has no limita-
tions, being one with the SUGMAD. Only the materi-
als through which he works limit his actions; in the
same manner they limit the actions of the SUGMAD,
too.

"The omniscience of the Lord may not be able to ex-
press itself through the physical brain of the traveler,
but the traveler may, in seconds, rise to regions above
the sphere of the brain activity, where his conscious-

142

ness automatically expands, even to the limitless.
When he returns to this plane he will remember just as
much of it as can be brought within the compass of
brain action.

'Therefore the highest spiritual traveler becomes
the giver of all life, the Lord of the universe. This is
true because the traveler on the higher planes is identi-
cal with the Supreme SUGMAD. If one must ask how
these things be, the answer is, because the traveler is
one with the SUGMAD and the SUGMAD is express-
ing ITSELF through the traveler's form. The travel-
er's form is therefore the SUGMAD's form. Whatever
the Universal ECK is, the individual traveler is identi-
cal in substance and attributes with IT.

"The beauty of all this is that every man is a poten-
tial traveler, and is therefore potentially identical with
the Supreme SUGMAD. He needs only development
and realization of this so spiritual traveling is the su-
preme goal of all human evolution.

"Who can know the SUGMAD, but one who -has
himself ascended to the spiritual heights where the
SUGMAD is openly manifest to sight?

"At the same time, throughout history, men have
gone along creating Gods in their own image. Thus
many a sincere student has taken refuge in agnosti-
cism. They say that man stands between two great
mountain peaks, the eternal past and the eternal
future, and no man can see beyond either of those
peaks.

"Theologians, in a frantic effort to prove the exist-
ence of a Supreme Deity, point to the construction and
order of Nature, the rhythm of the universe, its fixed
laws and its onward flow all of which they say sug-
gests an all-wise and all-powerful creator. But after all,

143

any argument based upon logical premises is just as
likely to lead us astray as do the dogmatic assertions
of the theologians. Of course there is no lie like history,
so it may be said that there is nothing more misleading
than logic. The Supreme can never be made a reality to
any man by mere logic, or by books, or by feelings.

"I sincerely believe that anything which has to be
proved by long processes of logic is not worth proving.
In other words, if the thing is not self-evident, it is of
little use. If anything in theory or teaching has to be
established by laborious processes of reasoning,
this very fact shows that we are on the wrong track
and should seek new methods of establishing the
hypothesis.

"Therefore the method of proving the existence of
the great SUGMAD which is worth our time, is the
experimental method of the spiritual travelers. No
other method has ever succeeded and none of them can
ever succeed.

"We'll leave off here/'

"Among all peoples, and in all languages, not only is
the name of the Supreme One different, but the funda-
mental ideas of the deity are different.

"In almost every land the people, in total ignorance
of the SUGMAD, have gone on creating anthropomor-
phic gods to their heart's content. These gods are all
given high seats in their heavens, from which they
keep a vigilant eye upon erring mortals, their recording
secretaries at their right hands. Nothing escapes the
recording angels, according to those who believe in
these gods. Of course, the idea must be all right, as by

144

the law of karma man must pay for each offense in due
course. A knowledge of the karmic laws is certainly the
source of all such ideas as recording angels, or punish-
ment for misdeeds.

"In spite of all the confusion regarding names and
characteristics among the gods, there runs like a
golden thread through all the accounts, the central
idea of a great over-ruling power that is greater and
better than man.

4 The human race had been taught to look up to the
gods with fear and trembling. That is, until the arrival
of Jesus who said that God should be loved. This has
been a central theme since the beginning of Christian-
ity, but it's one the spiritual travelers know to be a
half-truth.

"Christianity failed in several ways; mainly the
Supreme One didn't send his only begotten son to that
age of semi-civilized tribes who demanded his blood.
This is inconsistent with the ways of the upper world
for every MAHANTA, every Living ECK Master is
the son of God, the trinity, God, ITSELF manifested
for the uplifting of humanity. It is amazing that so-
called civilized man could even begin to think like this.
But it happens in Christianity, and someday the lead-
ers will have to pay for this!

"Frankly, no one has given any description or analy-
sis of the divine attributes, nor has any man ever im-
agined himself capable of doing so. But we find our-
selves in possession of two opposite sets of qualities,
the one we call bad and the other good. These two sets
work in opposition to each other on the lower planes.
They tend in exactly opposite directions, and they end
in totally antagonistic results.

"Hence, in this world life is largely made up of wars

145

waged incessantly between these two opposite sets of
qualities and tendencies. This accounts for the writing
of the holy scriptures, e.g., the Christian Bible,
Granath Guru, Koran, etc. Where did man get these
antagonistic qualities?

"Okay, then I'll get into the negative side of the
power. This refers to that individual in the grand hier-
archy who occupies the position of Creator and Gover-
nor nearest the negative pole of creation. He is not the
lowest in the Hierarchy.

"Under him are many subordinates, but of all the
negative powers, he is supreme. The rest may be called
his agents and subordinates. They carry out his orders,
just as he carries out the orders of his superiors. His
name is Kal Niranjan, and his headquarters lie at the
summit of Tirloki, commonly called the three worlds.
That is, the physical universe, anda, and the lower end
of Brahmanda, designated as Tirkuti or Brahm Lok.

"These three subdivisions of creation, in the minds
of the ancient rishis, constituted the entire sum of crea-
tion. Kal Niranjan was then regarded as the supreme
God over all creation. To the spiritual travelers, he is
the negative power so named because he is at the nega-
tive pole of creation, with many regions above him.

"Contrasted with this negative power, the travelers
speak of the ECK, the positive power. It rules the
whole of creation from the positive end of all the uni-
verses. While it isn't the very highest of all, the mani-
festation of the Supreme One, yet it is generally, re-
garded by the travelers as the Supreme Creator. It's in
fact, Father and Creator to all. It is a significant fact
that below him no member of the grand hierarchy has
power to create Souls. They have creative power over
everything else, but no power to create a Soul, and no

146

power to destroy one.

"In Sat Purusha, the ECK, the supreme creative
energy comes into perfect manifestation for the first
time in Sat Desha. Agam Purusha and Alakh Purusha
are so close to the ECK, so slightly differentiated, that
the ECK, often known as the Sat Nam, is generally re-
garded as the first actual or complete personification
of the Supreme One. He then becomes manifest as the
supreme executive power of the whole creation. His
region, Sach Khand, may then be known as the govern-
ing center of the entire system of universes.

'The Sat Nam is in reality the Supreme One, taking
form and establishing its throne as the King of Kings,
at the very gate of the supreme region. It is the sover-
eign Lord with whom the travelers have to deal most,
in carrying out their sacred mission of returning Souls
to their final home. To him all subordinates pay
homage, and from him they all take orders.

"Sat Nam is the great father, the light-giver, and the
supreme guru. To him we must all return, if we are ever
to re-enter the original home. He is truly the heavenly
father. All Gods, Lords, or Rulers below him, you can
love and honor, but the supreme devotion belongs to
the Sat Nam for he is the real Lord God of all worlds in
existence.

"The Alakh and the Agam, and the Nameless One,
the SUGMAD are so utterly incomprehensible, so fa-
thomless and impersonal, that you cannot approach
them, even in thought. But the Sat Nam stands mid-
way between the infinite light and the created uni-
verses; and so in time when we have been purged of
every imperfection we may approach him as the ruler,
see him with our own spiritual eyes and be welcomed
into the highest heaven that we can know, this side of

147

the SUGMAD's own world

"Meanwhile, while we are in the dark region of mat-
ter, we have to deal with the negative power. With him
we must contend in our struggle for spiritual freedom.
It is his duty to try to hold us here, while it is our duty
to try to escape. The resulting struggle purges us and
makes us strong, fitting us to the upward travel.

"The laws of the negative power are known as the
Laws of Nature. He is the author of all natural law as
we know it. For he is the creator and lord of the physi-
cal universe. He is the Lord God of the Bible, the Jeho-
vah of the Jews, and Christians, the Allah of the Mo-
hammedans. He is the Brahm of the Vedantists, the
God of practically all religions.

"None but the ECK travelers and their followers
know of any other God; yet this negative power, so
exalted and so universally worshipped as the supreme
Lord, is in fact only a humble subordinate in the Grand
Hierarchy of the universe. What is more important to
know, is that he is not free from imperfection when
compared with the Lord of All, Sat Nam.

"Remember he is the negative power and as such he
must have negative qualities. But when compared with
man, he is very exalted, full of light, goodness, wisdom
and power. It is only when compared with the positive
power that his lesser light becomes manifest.

"Now this great quality of love which the spiritual
travelers and others speak about is the binding force of
the universes. It is not a love as you and I observe here
in this physical world. It is an agreement with the
higher force the positive force which we know as the
ECK.

"This agreement, this agreeing force is the highest of
feeling, or force that anyone directs toward the

148

SUGMAD. Since we cannot put our mental fingers
upon the SUGMAD because of ITS formless being, we
can certainly look to the ECK for this agreement. If you
felt that you had to love all things and all beings, it
would be quite impossible to do so. The best way to
manage this quality which is called love by so many of
the ignorant, especially the theologians, is to be in
harmony with all things.

"You can love only a few and give good will to all.
This is perhaps the best way of explaining the quality
of goodness. These are only words; in order to have
semantics that give the best explanations of what we
are trying to get at, it's best to think of words only as
symbols.

"This is why the Sanskrit language was invented by
the higher Tuzas in those worlds far above this plane.
It might be called the language of the Far Country.
Sanskrit is more or less an illustrative language, made
to designate the powers and forces of the higher world.

"The gods brought Sanskrit to this world many
centuries ago. It was the ancient universal language of
this universe and many peoples on many planets
within this universe still speak and use it.

"You find derivations of it now throughout the
world; in China, Japan and other countries of the Far
East. The Chinese language has roots in the Sanskrit,
and the Japanese. Look at their pictures, and their
writings in their native language. It will tell you more
about the original Sanskrit than most of the languages
today.

"This language is still in use in the Brahm Lok
world, and so many who are returning from there to-
day to this plane for reincarnation are often surprised
to find it lacking in these countries where they are

149

born. As soon as they see it in the Chinese or Japanese
language, they recognize it immediately.

"We will stop here for there is so much to be taken
up in the discussions that our strength must be pre-
served for the time being. I have much to talk about
while you are visiting me during these talks."

150

Chapter 7
THE PATH TO ECKANKAE

Rebazar Tarzs sat down again and looked steadily at
me, before starting his talk. There was a quality about
this MAHANTA which was deeper than words. He
seemed far beyond this world, a traveler from the
misty future who came here to gaze upon this world.

He tucked the deep red robe under his legs with a
thick, square hand and looked up again.

"Now I'll talk about the ECK, that formless fluid,
the vehicle which the SUGMAD uses to carry all ITS
messages to this world and back again. It is the crea-
tive spirit, the great building force which is most often
called spirit.

"The SUGMAD is that deity above all deities and
things. In fact IT is unable to communicate with the
world of man except through ITS emanations, or rays
as I have mentioned before.

"In other words the SUGMAD cannot be compre-
hended by human minds, by the intellect, nor described
in words intelligible to man, so as to make ITS exis-
tence perceptible. It is necessary, therefore, in order to
render ITSELF comprehensible to man, the
SUGMAD make ITSELF active and creative. But IT
cannot be the direct creator, because being infinite, IT
is without will, intention, thought, desire or action, all
of which are qualities of finite being only.

"In other words the SUGMAD didn't make man in
ITS image as religions teach, especially the Christian
religion. So the SUGMAD was compelled to create the
world in an indirect manner through the ECK, the infi-

151

nite light and sound which IT is and in which IT
dwells.

"The ECK has ten rays or forces which are sent out
to the worlds below. The first is the male or masculine,
which is the Wisdom force; second, is the Power force,
often called the Life force; and third is the Freedom
force, the liberating quality.

"From these forces or rays flow the offshoots. For
example, there is the female, the passive potency,
which is the Intelligence ray; next, the creative ray;
sixth, the realization ray; seventh, self-determination;
eighth is adoration; ninth, physical, the wonder-
working ray; and ten, the nature or matter ray.

"These rays are not complex, but simply beams
which are offshoots of the great spiritual form, the
ECK, the first manifestation of the SUGMAD in the
Sat Desh world. The Lords and governors of all the
planes below Sat Desh are immersed with these ten
particular rays, making them a part of the Godlike
quality of the SUGMAD.

"Of course as the rays descend into the material
worlds, they are not as strong as in the upper regions,
because the negative power becomes a part of the rays
after passing the Brahm Lok plane. Kal Niranjan, Lord
of the lower worlds, has these same rays, as negative
rays. You can speak of the ten rays of the Kal power
which are the reverse of the ECK power.

"In the negative worlds the female power ray is
stronger, and intellect or intelligence is more depended
upon than Wisdom, Power and Freedom. All in the
negative worlds seem to lean heavily upon the female
ray of intelligence the example is all around you. All
of mankind is seeking intelligence or knowledge,
mostly materialistic facts. No one seems to understand

152

what wisdom is.

"Men call one wise who, glibly and superficially
utters a few platitudes, aphorisms and maxims. Those
who can do this live at ease, a burden on their fellow-
men; they are called philosophers, but woe to the ones
who give themselves this name they are hardly wiser
than the kitten which learns to scratch at the door so
the master will open it.

"Those who have been called wise are babes in arms,
for example; Socrates, Plato, Hegel, Thomas Aquinas,
Aristotle and a few hundred others who are the earth's
vanguard for this sort of nonsense. What have they
done?

"Little or nothing. Nothing more than singing a few
hymns to the nature god, saying that all men are equal,
making claims to a knowledge that is hardly worth
speaking of. Yet the earth people sing and have sung
their praises in books, words and song from the begin-
ning of these modern times. It is pathetic. If man
should find and know the true path to the SUGMAD,
he wouldn't waste his time studying Freud, and other
immature, negative psychologies and philosophies.

"These are the traps which the Kal Niranjan sets for
the unwary, and there are plenty on the earth plane, for
so many are struggling to make their way upward to
the other worlds, unconscious of the snares which are
holding them back.

"There is little wonder that men take to religion,
even if they have to invent one. Voltaire said that reli-
gion is the solace of the weak. Nietzsche repeated this
in his writings and talks. But be that as it may, the
weak and the trapped need some support, and far be it
from me to deny them. I wouldn't take their religions
away, even if I knew full well that it could be done.

153

"Religion has always been a haven for the millions
who mourn and suffer. It is undeniable that it has been
generally the unhappy who have sought relief in reli-
gion; any religion which happened to be near them, and
who can blame them. It's like a drowning man grasp-
ing at a straw.

"A spiritual darkness broods over this world and all
men are sick of it. Spiritually, and often physically, the
whole of mankind is sick, blind, deaf, dumb and cov-
ered with sores. Cancers of moral corruption eat their
way into the vitals of the human race.

"The race can change only when it awakens to find
and accept the spiritual travelers here among them,
ready to help all who come unto them. Nobody can
make his way very far into the Far Country unless he
has the assistance of the spiritual travelers.

"These ECK travelers know that the path of the
ECK is the only way to reach the world of the
SUGMAD. They know its dangers and blessings.
Leading the blind upward along the path until they can
see for themselves, the travelers find only the bless-
ings for their followers bypassing the dangers,
always letting their companions know what might be-
fall them if they are careless.

"Within this earth plane the female ray works quite
readily. It is the measure of success which followers of
the sciences of the mind enjoy. The answer lies in this
area in the well known laws of suggestion.

"Mind is the greatest power operating in this physi-
cal universe mind, activated by spirit or what we call
the ECK. Of course, all mind is vitalized by spirit; but
once activated by spirit, it is mind that controls all
physical forces through Prana, the primary force.

"Mind is the chief instrument of spirit for all con-

154

tacts with the physical universe. But mind has its own
methods of operation. In the subconscious reservoir of
mind, there lies an almost limitless store of energy. If
that reserve power can, by any means, be made avail-
able for our use, there is practically no limit to its scope
of action. It has been found that by and through sug-
gestion, the conscious mind may draw upon the sub-
conscious for its reserve power. This is the way psychic
healing works it offers a method of applying that
power to human needs.

"If the conscious mind can be made to accept the dic-
tum that there is power available, to remove pain and
cure disease, beneficial results must follow. The sys-
tem adds one more factor to the healing process. It
teaches, not that this latent power resides in all men,
to be drawn upon at will, but it is given by the Lord on
occasions, meaning the Negative Lord of the universe,
whom we know.

"So if the follower has faith, the power will come;
when he offers the proper prayers, it works. This
appeals to the religious sentiments in religion and
today many people have no idea that it is simply a
method of self-suggestion and auto suggestion. They
firmly believe that they are healed by direct interven-
tion of the Lord.

"You see, most of the faiths and cults of this earth
world work on this error or say theory. They continue
to work like this until a traveler arrives and shows
them differently, how to enter into the Far Country.
They are more concerned with bodily health and other
material things than getting along on the path to the
ECK.

"It will be remembered that the top or zenith of the
positive pole is charged with spirit substance to an ex-

155

treme degree; as we descend toward the nadir, the
extreme negative end, spirit substance undergoes a
gradual diminution. As a result of this thinning out
process, the various zones experience a corresponding
darkness, until finally they take on more and more of
the qualities associated with the bad or evil side of life,
as bad health and poverty.

"All that human consciousness classifies as evil, is
made so by a diminution or depletion of spirit. This
means darkness, of course, lesser life, lesser light. Man
cannot live happily without spirit, and the more he
departs from spirit, the more he experiences what to
him is evil. As with an individual man, so it is with the
worlds themselves. The less spirit substance in them,
the darker they are and the more troubles are exper-
ienced by their inhabitants.

"The Sat Desh country is a region of pure spirit. Its
inhabitants are pure spirits, in such countless numbers
as no man can estimate, all enjoying the greatest con-
ceivable happiness.

"This is the supreme heaven of all heavens; yet it is
quite unknown to any of the world religions, because
their founders have never reached these exalted
heights. It is known only by the spiritual travelers,
who alone can enter it. This is the land of the ECK,
where the light is greater than ten million physical
suns put together.

"No Soul can enter into this world unless It has been
properly prepared by the spiritual travelers, and once
attained It will never leave again unless It wishes to
descend into the lower worlds to help those who are
struggling upward.

"Soul can also go further upward into those heav-
enly heights above, which are numerous, but it is spirit

156

that motivates It, as fuel does an engine on this
earthly plane."

"The word psychology is taken from the Greek
'psyche' meaning science of the Tuza or Soul. That
assuredly was the meaning attached to it by the old
Greek masters; modern scientists have made it almost
exclusively a study of the mind; and even at that they
are practically limited to psycho-physiological phe-
nomena. They never know whether they are dealing
with chemico-physiological reaction of brain and nerve
tissues, or with something independent of brain and
nerve. No psychologist can tell you with assurance
what thought or spirit is.

"The ECK travelers can tell you, because they are
able to see both thought and spirit, and watch the
former form and disappear. Mental reactions, under all
sorts of stimuli, are just as visible to the Masters as
physical reactions are visible to scientists.

"Finally, the travelers are able to detach themselves,
even from the mind itself and observe themselves and
others as pure spirit. It is at that point that the travel-
ers obtain perfect knowledge about man. When he
actually observes himself as ECK only, free from all
coverings, including mind, he knows that he is essen-
tially the ECK, that mind and all bodies are but instru-
ments, coverings, needed only for contacts with matter
in the material regions.

"Now, that which connects man with the supreme
deity is sound; and sound can be described as the
'Word' which is identical with the ECK, yet below the
highest in the hierarchy, the SUGMAD.

157

"This life-giving stream divides into ten powers or
more, is a creative force and can be heard. The fact that
it is audible is extremely important. This idea must be
conveyed, if possible, in any name that is applied to it.
One of its names is the Bani.

"This audible current or wave contains the sum of all
teachings emanating from the SUGMAD via the ECK.
It is the SUGMAD's word, almost directly, and in-
cludes everything that the SUGMAD has ever said or
done. It is the SUGMAD, ITSELF, in expression and
it is the method of IT making ITSELF known in ITS
own language.

"The divine ECK, sound, word, stands for all that
the SUGMAD is or has ever said or done. It includes
all of ITS qualities. As said before, it is the only way in
which the universal spirit can manifest itself to human
consciousness.

"So when the Supreme SUGMAD manifests ITSELF
as the ECK, or Sat Nam, in Sach Khand, IT becomes
fully personified, embodied, individualized, for the first
time and brings into manifestation all of the qualities
of the deity.

"As the ECK IT becomes personal creator, Lord,
God and Father. IT becomes the fountain out of which
the audible life stream proceeds. This stream may be
seen and heard by all who participate in it throughout
the world. It may be seen and heard by such as attain
an awakened consciousness, under the training of a
spiritual traveler. When man hears IT, he hears the
SUGMAD; when he feels IT, he feels the power of the
SUGMAD.

"This sound current is the divine being expressing
ITSELF in something that is both audible and visible.
This current must not be understood to be like a river,

158

running in one direction. It is more like a radio wave,
flowing out in every direction from the grand central
broadcasting station. In fact, it does come from the
Supreme Creative center of the universe of universes.

"This wave has two aspects, a centrifugal and centri-
petal flow. IT moves outward from the central dynamo
of all creation, and it flows back toward that dynamo.
Moving upon that current, all power and all life appear
t<3 flow outward to the uttermost bounds of creation,
and again upon IT all life appears to be returning to its
source. It is the latter aspect of IT which we have to
deal with for the greater gain.

"Upon that wave we return to the SUGMAD. When
a traveler makes the connection, or as you say in radio,
tunes us in, it is then that we begin this journey up-
ward to the brilliant heights, leaving all perishable
worlds behind us.

"This wave is called Nada in the Vedas. In Vedanta,
sound is always spoken of as creative. Sound, or any-
thing that sounds, is that creative energy. It is referred
to as the Nada Brahm, meaning the primal word of
Brahm. By this Nada Brahm, all creation was brought
into existence, that is the lower worlds. The whole of
the visible and invisible universe is the manifestation
of this primal Nada. The Nada is the grand symphony
out of which all other symphonies flow in everything
below the Brahm Lok. It is the primal music of the uni-
verse.

"Every musical cord of this world is an echo of that
primal cord. It is the Vadan of the Sufis and the
Shabda of the Hindus. But all Sufis do not distinguish
between the original sound and its echo. We should
take care to distinguish between the echo and the
original.

159

"This sound has so many names in many languages.
It is the small still voice and the Voice of Silence. It is
the same divine sound, no matter by what name it may
be known. It is, in any case, a sound which can be
heard only by the developed ear, attuned to its higher
vibrations.

"This divine Logos is the real lost word of the
Masonic order; it seems that the spiritual travelers are
the ones who have rediscovered it again.

"To explain what this audible life stream is may not
be so easy. It cannot be defined or explained in words.
This is because it is beyond the capacity of any lan-
guage, and it is never again put into words.

"Stated in the simplest words I can employ, this life
current is the voice of the Supreme Creator, ITSELF,
vibrating through space; it is the only quality of the
SUGMAD which can touch everything in the uni-
verses. Yet, IT still must go through the ECK, and
because of this what we are receiving is only second-
ary; therefore, the ECK is the wave of spiritual life
being transmitted from the SUGMAD to every living
thing in the universe. By this current IT has created all
things, and by it all things are sustained. In it they all
live and move and have their being, and by this same
current they will ultimately return to their source of
being.

"Now to get a picture of this musical Life Current
you must understand that its heavenly strains are not
only filling all interstellar space, but they are ringing
with far more enchanting music through all the higher
worlds, unto the utmost bounds of the physical.

"The higher we go, the more enchanting the music.
In the higher worlds the music is less mixed with
matter, and so it is not dulled. After passing the third

160

region on the pathway of the Far Country, this sublime
music becomes so overwhelmingly attractive that Soul
grows impatient to go higher.

"It becomes absorbed in it and lives in it day and
night. It is Its life, Its joy and Its spiritual food. There
is not a cubic millimeter of space in existence which is
not filled with this music. Its life giving melodies may
not be consciously heard by all who are not trained to
catch them, but there is not a living being in all crea-
tion which does not derive its life from the sound
current.

"If you still think much of the word religion, then
you can say that this current is the only real religion.
It is the ECK, the philosophy of the Sound Current. In
fact, it is the only thing in the world which gives a tie
to the living and the SUGMAD. Without this stream
nothing could live for a single moment, or even exist.
All life and power comes from it; from the crawling ant
to the thunder bolt, from the tidal wave to the solar
cycle, every manifestation of dynamic energy comes
from this stream of the ECK.

"That which physical science calls energy, which the
Orientals call Prana, is only a manifestation of this life
stream, stepped down to meet material conditions.
Lake electricity in the air, IT is omnipresent, and IT is
omnipotent. In IT lies all energy, latent or dynamic. IT
only awaits the proper conditions to express ITSELF
as dynamic force, in one form or another. IT has many
forms of expression, most of which are not yet known
to physical science.

"Of course IT has to be stepped down, and at each
step IT takes a different character and quality, to
which we give names, if we can demonstrate them at
all. Most of them science has not discovered. But every

161

force known, from primal energy, prana, to electricity
and magnetism, are all modified forms of the same
eternal current.

"ITS stepping down is necessary to serve the
common cosmic and human needs. But at least, IT is all
one force, and for this very reason many say that God
is one. This isn't true. It is only one manifestation of
the Supreme SUGMAD, working through the ECK;
and by doing so becomes ITSELF the ECK or su-
preme spirit.

"The tremendous heat, energy and light of our sun,
of all suns, are derived from this stream. Every ray of
light in the universe is a phenomenon of this infinite
stream of light and sound. Upon its power hangs every
star in its orbit. Not a single rose may bring forth its
buds without this power and no little child smiles with-
out manifesting this power."

"The ECK travelers all say that there is no other
means of spiritual liberation, only the ECK. Without
actual conscious, participation in the life current, the
ECK, no one can escape the net of karma and reincar-
nation, or ever become free and happy.

"Hence all the travelers and saints lay the strongest
emphasis upon this great Reality. In fact, without this
life stream, no saint could ever manifest upon this
earth, and hence the whole world would sit in darkness
through endless ages. No Tuza can ever escape from
this dark material world without conscious participa-
tion in and a personal relationship with this current.
He must knowingly merge himself in this life stream
and upon it he must then rise to freedom.

"It cannot be done in any other way. By this current

162

alone, one is enabled to transcend all lower regions and
rise to the highest heavens. By other means men may
advance a little distance toward the light. But sooner
or later they are automatically stopped.

'The highway to the Far Country is the royal road.
It is the only way leading to spiritual insight and com-
plete emancipation. This is the gospel of the life
stream, and he who drinks of this stream can never
thirst again, but in him is a well of water springing up
into eternal life.

'This was the water that Jesus offered the woman at
the well of Sichar, of which he said, if she would drink
she would never thirst again. Truly, when one begins
consciously to participate in this life stream, there is in
him a well of water ever springing up, sufficient to
supply the whole world. There is a fountain which
cleanses him, and goes on giving life to every Soul who
comes in touch with it. It purges both mind and Soul,
making them whiter than snow. It flows on forever, a
healing stream for the nations, for the races of the
world, and whoever bathes in it will never go about the
world again seeking food for the real self,

"This indeed is the true light, which lights every
man who comes into the world. It is the ECK, the
master power and spirit. It is Wisdom, Power and
Freedom. All the great qualities you can imagine that
belong to the SUGMAD,

"In the first chapter of the Gospel of John, it is
called the Word, through which all creation came into
existence. If only the Christian disciple had grasped
this fundamental fact and held on to it, it would have
meant a very different history for the church. Unhap-
pily, the real meaning, which Jesus had in mind, was
wholly lost. In the third verse of chapter three, Gospel

163

of John, Jesus speaks of contacting the Current and of
actually hearing it. Then he distinctly says the new
birth is attained through it. All of this is exactly in line
with the teachings of the spiritual travelers. It's a pity
the churches have never understood this reference of
Jesus to the most important experience which can
possibly come within the range of human life.

"To the clergy this new birth is a mysterious oper-
ation, not in the least comprehended. In some way it is
supposed to be performed by the Holy Spirit, that
which we know as the ECK. But this process is
unknown to them. The travelers alone can explain this
statement of Jesus, for they alone know exactly what
the new birth is.

"The disciples of Christ were never spiritual travel-
ers, nor Masters, in the sense we know, either. Had
they finished their training and become one with the
ECK, in other words if they had become spiritual trav-
elers, the whole course of history would have been dif-
ferent. Instead, their own teacher was snatched away
from them by death, before their course of develop-
ment had more than fairly begun; after which the pure
spiritual science which Jesus taught was soon ob-
scured and lost. With that, among the Christians,
vanished the last remnant of knowledge concerning the
audible life stream. Jesus and his teachings were
covered up in a mass of dogma and superstitions.

"In the second chapter of the Acts of the Apostles,
an account is given of what happened on the day of
Pentecost. They heard a sound, as of a mighty rushing
wind, and then saw lights, like tongues of fire, sitting
on the heads of the apostles, and they were filled with
the Holy Ghost the sound current, ECK and they
began to speak in foreign tongues.

164

"Now, this is a phenomena which may happen, and
often does happen with those starting on the upward
journey with a traveler. It is an experience which
comes in the very beginning of their development.
Often it is, as if one is standing between two buildings
and a sound comes like that of a train rushing by,
heard for a moment and then gone.

"This is something like the rushing, mighty winds,
spoken of in the Bible. Other sounds are heard from
time to time; all of these sounds are heard before the
true ECK is heard. Again, one of the lights seen by all
neophytes appears like tongues of fire, as spoken of in
the New Testament.

"Later the chela sees many more lights and hears
much more of the heavenly ECK. As a result of these
experiences, the young traveler is filled with increased
light and power. Among other things he is able to
understand all languages. He understands them all, as
if each one was speaking his own language. This is a
universal experience of the beginner on the spiritual
path, and is encountered in the first region the Astral
world.

"Everyone understands the language of all others,
no matter what they might be. To become filled with
the ECK is simply to hear and participate in the
audible life stream and to become absorbed in it, to be
one with it. In becoming one with it, the traveler comes
into possession of many of the higher powers.

"This is actually the meaning of becoming one with
God which all the ancient Rishis spoke about and
which all or most scriptures tell us. The unity, the
becoming one with the Lord, is that which I've said,
becoming one with the ECK, with the audible life
stream.

165

"By becoming one with it, you have the science of
the ECK travelers, wrapped up in a few words. This is
the great truth of the Far Country, which all seekers
are desperately searching for and may never find.

"So you might say that the whole truth is this: the
spiritual traveler, the audible life stream, and spiritual
freedom, here and now. With these you have perfect
liberation during this lifetime. You do not have to wait
until another life of reincarnation to find it.

"All men wish for liberation, what the theologians
call salvation, but their type salvation is very different
from that of the ECK travelers. The salvation of the
travelers is liberation from the wheel of transmigra-
tion, from the ills of this life, or of any life. Last of all,
freedom to live forever in some heaven of unalloyed
bliss. This is salvation, as it is generally understood by
the travelers on this path. It must never be confused
with the theological salvation of the churches.

"You may pray to all gods on record, and they will
not hear you; you can call upon any religion known for
help, but it will get you nothing. It remains a stern fact
of nature that no man ever has or ever can gain
freedom from the ills of this life and escape the uncer-
tainties of the next, until he has the good fortune to
meet the ECK Master. If he has not done that, he must
return again and again to this life, until he does meet
the Master. That is the sum of it and that is final; with-
out his help no one can ever gain permanent relief from
this wheel of birth and death.

"On the other hand when a person finds the
MAH ANT A he will not fail to get spiritual liberation,
immediately. This is because the spiritual traveler will
connect him with the audible life stream, and so having
both the traveler for his help, and the sound current he

166

will get spiritual freedom which is here called Jivan
Mukti.

"So the formula is to find the MAHANTA who can
tune you in with the life current, the melodious banL
Then take hold of that current and merge yourself into
it. After this you will be lifted up to the city of
freedom. After you have passed the outermost fron-
tiers of the material and the impure worlds, you have
actually entered the regions of pure spirit; having
grown godlike and fit for the highest regions, you will
never return to these low lands of birth and death.

"You have attained Jivan Mukti, life everlasting!"

"Now I'm going into the various yoga systems. It is
well that we go over them so you will know those prac-
ticed by students in the East. They are interesting but
the ECK traveler doesn't need them.

"First, Hatha Yoga, which aims at the control of
mind and acquirement of the siddhis, or what are
called psychic powers. This is done chiefly through
asana, or physical postures and exercises. The asanas
have beneficial effect upon the health, and bring con-
trol over the senses.

"Second, Raja Yoga which seeks to concentrate and
still the mind by ways and natural methods of mental
discipline and control. Emphasis here is placed upon
the mind, rather than the body.

"Third, Ashtang Yoga is a comprehensive scheme of
yoga training. It consists of eight elements, the first
five of which Yama, niyama, asana, pranayama,
pratyahara, all refer to the body. The last three
dharana, dhyana and samadhi, all refer to the mind.

167

The aim of this yoga is to merge the Tuza with the
ECKANKAR, the universal Tuza.

"Pranayama, which chiefly consists of breath con-
trol and with that the control of the prana, plays a very
important part in this Yoga.

"Laya Yoga Laya means absorption. Laya yoga
consists in the absorption of the mind in the astral
light. This is generally achieved through the practice
of mudra exercises.

"Karma Yoga is the yoga of action. It enjoins upon
its followers the necessity of doing one's duty, what-
ever that may be, without fear of blame or expectation
of rewards. The essence of Karma yoga is the ideal of
duty well done and the vairag, spirit of unattachment.

"Bhakti Yoga is the yoga of devotion and it appeals
most of all to people of the emotional temperament.
Discarding all rites and ceremonies, it seeks union with
the ECK through the force of love alone.

"Mantra Yoga. This system aims at the acquirement
of psychic powers in spiritual or astral regions by con-
stant repetition of certain formulas which are supposed
to set up particular vibrations, especially when re-
peated with the mind fixed upon certain centers. The
formulas, as such, are believed to have an efficacy of
their own.

"ECKANKAR is what is sometimes known as Sahaji
or Soul travel, the way of the sound current. This is
practiced by the ECK travelers. It is the oldest system
known in the history of mankind.

"It consists primarily in the following of the inner
sound. This is the point which distinguishes the
methods used by the ECK travelers from all other sys-
tems. This is the supreme test which must be kept in
mind when studying the other systems. If the sound is

168

not a vital part of them, then they are not the system
of the great spiritual travelers.

"Many people insist that one system is about as
good as another, since all are intended to lead to the
same goal. Far from it. No other system leads to the
goal of the spiritual travelers, the highest regions in
existence. Besides, you will generally find that the per-
son who says that one religion, or one system of yoga is
just as good as another, has never practiced any of
them.

"That Master, who doesn't teach or practice the
science of the sound current, is not a master of high
order. Nor does his system lead to the highest achieve-
ments. Every real ECK traveler in all history has
taught and practiced the way of this life current. It
couldn't be otherwise, for this is the system estab-
lished by the SUGMAD through ITS early spiritual
travelers for this lower kingdom.

"Most followers of Indian yoga systems will agree
that most or all of the old systems are very difficult,
requiring much time, rigid asceticism, and great self-
abnegation. The path of the ordinary yogi is a rugged
one. The method of the spiritual travelers is not the
way of the yogis; it never has been. Before there was
ever a yogi system, the science of the ECK travelers
was known and practiced among men. But the exact
methods of the travelers have from time to time be-
come obscured, or even lost, in times when real travel-
ers were few or unknown to the general public. Then,
yogis developed methods of their own, trying to substi-
tute for the path of the travelers. The two systems
have been running along parallel courses for centuries.
Not only are the methods of the yogis different from
that of the saints, but their final objective is different.

169

"Most of the yogis, even the best of them, know of
nothing beyond the astral plane, the Turkya Pad, with
the possible exception of a very few who may have
reached the Brahm Lok.

"Here they are automatically stopped, unless they
have a spiritual traveler who himself goes further.
Stopping there, most of them believe they have
reached the supreme heights. There, they accept
Brahma of that region as the supreme God of all.

"But the travelers go so far above and beyond
Brahm Lok, that when they reach that region, they
have only fairly begun their journey upward. While
most of the yogis and imperfect travelers believe
Brahm is the supreme authority, the travelers know
that he is only a subordinate in the grand hierarchy of
the universe. While the OM of the Vedas and the Gita
is regarded as the most sacred word in all Hindu phi-
losophy, it is because they believe it to be the sound
symbol of the supreme being; yet the travelers know
that it belongs to one of the lower Lords who is himself
not above the regions of Awagawan of death and
birth.

"He, himself, is still under the law of karma, and is
therefore liable to fall into the snares of Maya,
becoming a mere man again, or even going lower than
that.

"He is bound by the very same laws which bind the
subjects over whom he rules. He is himself a created
being, subject to the same laws of all created beings
and must carry on under the wishes of the Supreme
SUGMAD. He is, by no means, the ultimate ECK, nor
is he at all the Tuzashottama energy, what you know
as the individual Soul energy.

"The way of the travelers accomplishes what the

170

yoga of the Vedantists can never do. It is vastly more
effective and moreover, it has been adapted to the
needs of modern man. This is its great glory.

"It is what the person of this world calls modern in
method and yet it meets all the requirements of all
ages. In every age of the world, the travelers have used
a system exactly suited to the needs of the people and
the times. People change, to some extent from age to
age, and so the travelers give them, in each age,
exactly that system of yoga best suited to their
requirement.

"But the yogis hold on to their archaic systems
which are now quite out of date, wholly unsuited to the
average man of this age. The nervous constitution of
the modern man is somewhat different from that of the
men of ten thousand years ago. The yoga of the trav-
elers may now be practiced not only by the ascetics,
but by aU men in all walks and conditions of life, while
carrying on their routine duties of office and home.
This makes it a universal system of spiritual science
for all, under any condition.

"If we take a look back at the study of world reli-
gions and philosophies from a detached point of view,
we can see, at a glance, that they talk about realizing
God and gaining salvation. If you ask any of the
leaders of the various religions and philosophical
groups just how they are to accomplish all of these
goals, they will give you a stock reply; they follow the
scriptures of their particular faith and believe what
their priests have to offer.

"They mostly speak of Self-Realization or Self-
Knowledge, God-Realization or knowledge of God, and
lastly, entering the kingdom of heaven, either in this
life or in the next but all is a mystery to them.

171

"However, their techniques are scanty and their
knowledge poor. None really know how to do this in
this life, here and now. Of course the end and purpose
of all of this is individual well-being, happiness.

' These three points, I Ve just mentioned are the very
things which the spiritual travelers offer to the indivi-
dual; but the methods by which the travelers propose
to accomplish these ends are entirely different from
that of any and all religions.

"You may ask just how do the travelers propose to
place at your feet the treasures of the God worlds? The
answers lie in the fact that their scientific methods of
leaving the body and traveling through the innumer-
able worlds have to be done through a system of exer-
cises.

"The successful practitioner, and there are very,
very few who are failures at this, will experience spir-
itual realization. This includes entering into the king-
dom of heaven, here and now, Self-Realization and
God-Realization.

"Those who fail are usually too lazy to spend any
time at it, too wrapped up in worldly affairs to let
themselves go inwardly and outwardly into the spirit-
ual kingdoms.

"More about this later!"

172

Chapter 8
THE REST POINTS OF ETERNITY

Dawn in these high mountains is always a colorful
drama, with wild streaks of light gleaming across the
peaks and down through the gorges and gulches. These
colors remind one of the Astral lights flowing out of
the great powerful mountain in the city of Sahasra-dal-
Kanwal, the capital of the astral worlds.

Sitting alone in the vast, wild spaces of that great
range of the Hindu Kush, I felt the uplift of every mo-
ment of that dawn, as if rising into the atmosphere of
the heavens far above, where the white clouds framed
picturesque symbols against an azure sky.

After we had partaken of a light breakfast of ba-
nanas, wheat cereal and hot tea, Rebazar Tarzs folded
his robe and dropped upon the hard, dirt floor. He
motioned for me to be seated; sitting down I prepared
for a long session of aesthetic discussion. "Now I'll
take up the rest points in eternity, " he said with a
broad smile. "Many people in the static religions think
of the heavens as a place where eternity continues their
great joy and happiness.

"This is not so. Eternity within the Far Country
couldn't be carried out like this under the plans of the
Universal SUGM AD at all. There must be rest points
between certain periods of the continuity of eternity.

"All eternity is a series of stops and starts, a con-
tinued action of motion in which the cycles run for
many yugas, or what we call ages. These ages may con-
tinue for centuries, according to our time, before reach-
ing a rest point. But they must reach a stop of this

173

nature in order to gather momentum to move along to
the next point.

"Therefore all eternity is on the move, moving for-
ward not into a future from out of the past, but always
in motion in the present. Since the Tuza doesn't age in
the Far Country, It always lives in the present. This is
an interesting point which one must consider deeply,
while at the same time thinking of the present this is
hard from the standpoint of living on this plane.

"But it must be done, and without this viewpoint the
whole of your insight will vanish quickly.

"The only thing the finite mind can compare with
eternity is an endless, an immeasurable time period.
Man claims that eternity is of infinite duration; ever-
lasting. It is eternal existence or immortality, the very
opposite of temporal. Continuing unintermittently, it
is timeless. It is what the Hindu religion calls Nitya,
eternal and everlasting.

"Often eternity is confused with reality, which is the
nowness of time. The Isness or the Nowness is used to
refer to the Supreme Being. The Nowness is closer to
eternity than any descriptive words used to describe
the everlasting. Now is an adverb designating the
present, and as long as we can look at every second of
our lives as now, we are observing eternity. No
adjective is capable of describing the phenomena of
heaven.

"The Isness of the SUGMAD is much more a term
we can use to describe the eternal lord of all things. A
Greek word denoting identity, it is about the only word
we can use to form any concept of the everlasting Lord
of all universes.

"So you have two words with Latin and Greek roots
which come close to establishing in the mind concepts

174

of the two greatest mysteries, which man has attempt-
ed to tackle and dissolve. First is Nowness, an adverb
used to describe the present time or moment, and
Isness, a verb to describe the allness and presence of
something, and that something, in our case, is the
SUGMAD.

"Therefore, from what point do we work, the active
verb of Isness or the Nowness of time? All right, I will
attempt to break these concepts into a finer point for
you. Isness is the creative point which is always
working, always creating; or better still, that which is
always moving like perpetual motion,

"On the other hand, Nowness is more or less a still-
ness of motion, a quieting into the present moment;
from stillness we receive the opportunity to live for-
ever in the present moment. In other words an alter-
isness, the extension of the creative moment into
lengths which give it Nowness. Here is the existence of
a cycle of action and this is represented by Vishnu in
the Hindu trinity; in the Christian trinity, it is the son,
the Christ, the preserver.

"This is interesting because we are now concerned
with one fact; in the preserving of Nowness, one is con-
cerned with the movement of himself from point to
point in time, what we know as time. In this universe
we know time because of the position of the sun during
its twenty-four hour movement around the Earth, the
zodiac of the universe divisions, like years, months,
days, hours, minutes and seconds; these are for the
convenience of a man to judge his position relative to
time. It is really a calendar for those engaged in busi-
ness, to make a tab for their material activities.

"The creative mind of man invented for himself a
horror for his own destruction. Since time is, in a rela-

175

tive sense, destructive and negative belonging to the
god, Shiva, which I spoke about some while ago, you
can understand now that the Isness and Nowness of
eternity is more of a Reality than you ever believed.

"Columbus was right in disputing the theory that
the world was flat, but he was not talking about the
universe or the heaven worlds. The spiritual planes are
flat, and the suns, which hang in the skies of those
spiritual worlds you have visited, have no movement.
They need none, because beyond the Brahm Lok no
spiritual world has night they do not need darkness.
What is the need of rest and sleep to the Soul who
reposes in the sweet peaceful quiet of the SUGMAD's
arms to use a metaphor correctly.

"In those high worlds no darkness is available. You
may move forward in an unceasing activity and never
be fatigued as on this plane. You need no activity.
Activity is outside a domain without action.

"This is a strange paradox; to explain it, I will point
out this in the beginning of my explanation. Man
thinks of eternity in the terms of time and space. Since
there is no time in eternity, I tell you that there is no
space in eternity. Neither of these relative qualities
exist in the world of the SUGMAD, anywhere above
the plane of the Brahm Lok. In fact there is little need
for either of them they are phenomena of the lower
worlds only.

"Now, the matter of space is nothing. Nothing exists
in the Far Country, except what Souls there wish to
exist. Since the SUGMAD occupies all of Its world,
when you become part of the Supreme, you are occupy-
ing all of ITS world. You are IT, already. There is no
need of space,

"Nothing can occupy the same space, except two

176

Souls. This being true, there is no space in the great
beyond. Neither do you travel in the vast world of all
worlds; there is little necessity to do so.

"Now in eternity, as I said in the beginning of this
discourse, there are rest points. These rest points are
concerned with start, change and stop of the Tuza.
This is all there is to the Nowness of eternity the
point of wasness, or time is an illusion. We are always
up against the illusion of time in the lower worlds, but
not in the world of the Supreme Being.

"Yet, living in this world, the Tuza must have sur-
vival of some kind or he cannot exist here; he would go
down into the worlds below and start working his way
up again.

"This is why we have rest points in the Far Country.
Being as no space is there, and that you fill the world
as does the SUGMAD, ITSELF, you must learn to
survive through these rest points. You do not travel
you only mockup a cycle of action and observe it as the
SUGMAD does. This is one of the postulates you have
to carry out or you do not survive. I mean that if you
wish to have a picture of another section of the uni-
verses, you don't travel there; you just observe it!

"This is too simple, you say; however, by being so
simple, it puts a mystery into the conditions of which I
speak. Take this as an example, suppose that you're
sitting in New York City, on the Empire State
building, as Soul rather in the Atma Sarup. You want
to see San Francisco is there any necessity of travel-
ing to San Francisco to see what is going on there?

"The answer is no!

"The reason is simple! You being a part of the uni-
verse, and since you are the SUGMAD, ITSELF, in a
way of speaking, you can merely observe it from your

177

position on the Empire State building.

"How much more simple can it be? Yet it appears so
very complex to your thinking now. All right, I will go
a little deeper into this. Look at it in another way. The
whole universe is made up of spiritual matter, and you,
as the Tuza control all this matter in this world, in a
sense of speaking. You are one with the Supreme, the
ECK, and all things are included in this stream flowing
outwardly from the highest positive pole of the uni-
verses to the lowest and returning.

"If you're able to detach yourself from this stream
and look into it, you can see all things; this is similar to
what is known on this plane as clairvoyance; you just
decided that you are going to see San Francisco and
you bring the reality of the city to you and what you
wish to observe there.

"You are also to be concerned with another quality
known as Hereness! Before you were working with
Nowness and Isness. So this trinity is going to be the
real trinity of the SUGMAD. It is this: Isness, the
creative moment, second, Nowness, the present, the
preservation of the moment, and Hereness, the present
state of life.

"I will clarify something here for you. Isness is not
creativity as we know it on this plane, but a reality
which is knowingness. Hence I know, I preserve this
knowingness, and I live in this present state of know-
ingness.

"We will take this up in our next discussion, after a
little tea for refreshing our throats."

In order to get to the depth of the trinity as I've
178

spoken of here, I'll have to get into causation. But first
look at the difference in the Christian trinity versus
the Hindu trinity versus the ECK trinity. The
Christian trinity is simply three forms of qualities
which are mental, and physical; the Hindu trinity is a
symbol for the currents of forces in nature, and the
ECK trinity is the qualities denoting the present state
of life.

"Since we are not dealing with space and time in
these upper regions, then we must work with a set of
abstracts founded on experiences based upon the
newness of everything. Causation is not a matter of
starting a cycle of action, because you are always in a
creative cycle which starts, changes and stops with
each rest point.

"Also the second factor that we must confront
shows us that in this high upper region, all work with
free will and never under a mechanical law. Each Soul
is a law unto itself, yet never interferes with another.

"Within this world below each of us carries his own
cause about him; like a shower of rain, each observer
carries his own rainbow. If I change my speed of mo-
tion, I create a new cause for myself, just as if I step a
few spaces in a rainy shower, I acquire a new rainbow
for myself. Relativity teaches that there is no cause
except the defective insight.

"Causation in the upper regions is relative, and here
the nature of all things is not accuracy and precision.
Energy is emitted by the Tuza himself to include only
that which he is doing, and this doesn't have anything
to do with another Tuza. As I said before, each works
unto himself similar to the McWilliams law where all
particles are moving in space according to their own
pattern but never crashing or interfering with one

179

another.

"There is strictly no causal behavior of any kind and
the law of karma is not included in this world. There
are subjective factors, unknown to the minds of men.

"The subjective factor is not included in any system
of reference, and cannot be fully deterministic in the
control of inorganic phenomena. If we wish to emanci-
pate the material world, we must emancipate mind also
which is partly made up of what we call self -elements,
spiritual particles.

"Being is not the cause of becoming. Causation is
one of the categories of thought. A man is not actually
born when he comes out of the female body; he doesn't
know then, that he is born. He is born actually, when
he gets the knowledge of birth. The relation of cause
and effect is not something found in nature, but is
rather a characteristic of the way in which we regard
nature. Understand this?

"The apparent indeterminism of the particle be-
comes meaningless and the determinism of the energy
wave has nothing to do with the course of objective
nature. This is the way it works in the heaven worlds,
of course. Soul works with the particles of spiritual
energy and the waves of energy to create a cycle of
action for itself. These actually are wave pictures.

"Soul changes its wave pictures to bring itself to
another rest point. There is no destruction of the wave
pictures, for they are shared among the millions of
Souls in this world. In other words, I possess a large
number of wave pictures, and so does each Soul within
this universe. There is no changing or deviation of
these pictures, but a shifting of them among the vari-
ous Souls who are working from rest point to rest point
within eternity.

180

'The spiritual particles are put together to make a
wave picture or energy unit, which is actually the rest
point. These points are similar to events in this world.
On this plane we are always going from one event to
another; or experiencing certain events in our lives
daily.

'There are no new events in this world. All exper-
iences have been experienced by someone at sometime
throughout the history of the human race. It is possi-
ble to have every possible experience of man in your
life provided you have the time, will-power, and moti-
vation. All you need to do is raise yourself above the
flow of the negative power within the plane and make
contact with whatever event you are seeking.

"It is experience that makes the Tuza harden Itself
to this world and wish to rise into the upper regions.
But on the other hand, the experiences or events in the
heavenly worlds are not too much different from the
ones on this plane they are similar in that they are
experiences, events or picture waves.

"What I'm trying to tell you amounts to this. The
main difference between the upper region wave
pictures and those of the lower is simply the degree of
refinement, the freedom of will in the upper worlds. We
work with using the wave-pictures for rest points in
eternity for the sake of bringing energy to ourselves,
instead of moving to the energy point. Understand
this?

"It's hard to get this across to you because in the
Far Country, we have little need of motion unless we
desire it; desire is the least of our operating apparatus.
We have little desires of anything because of the domi-
nating joy and happiness which comes from being in
contact with the SUGMAD, and from being able to be

181

in this heavenly world.

4 'So the relation of cause and effect cannot be applied
to the relation of the ECK to this high world, since
cause has meaning. This is the outstanding point I'm
trying to make there may be cause in the heavenly
world, but never effect. Only in relation to the finite
modes of being, where there is succession, does effect
exist.

4 'Causation has no meaning in the lower worlds apart
from a change. And as succession is relative, causation
is merely an appearance. It is certainly useful within
the limits of experience but cannot be regarded as of
absolute validity.

"So here are the basic elements of life in the upper
worlds succession, wave pictures and rest points. All
of these are working within the three abstracts which I
took up previously, Isness, Nowness and Hereness.
These rest within the framework of the ECK trinity.

"I hope that this is getting across to you. Maybe it
isn't, but you must break through the shackles, the
chains holding you to the lower planes and enter into
the upper worlds to have the rest of your days in
eternity.

"Causation cannot be continuous. It cannot exist
except in the time occupied by a line drawn across the
succession, and since that time is not a time but a mere
abstraction, the cause itself can be no better. It is
unreal, a non-entity and the whole succession of the
world consists of these non-entities. This is much the
same as to suppose that solid things are made of points
and lines and surfaces.

"These are fictions, useful for some purpose but still
fictions they remain. A cause here must be a real event;
in the upper world, there is no fragment of real time in

182

which it can be real. Causation is, therefore, not con-
tinuous in the heavens above and so, unfortunately, it
is not causation but mere appearance.

"You can see there is no unity in the heaven world.
There isn't even logic, or any logical relation of neces-
sity for any cause whatever. It stands to reason, to use
an earth term, that should we become conscious of the
subjective unity in true relation, the causal chain in the
pure multiplicity, in this plane, would be broken and
every means of making the real intelligible would be
destroyed.

"On further thought, we shall also find that the con-
cepts of metaphysical causality as necessary and indis-
pensable are absurd. It implies the possibility of logic
as something which doesn't exist, and this is certainly
true when you get off the earth plane and begin soaring
in the heaven world.

"Logic simply doesn't exist, therefore, when you use
rest points in eternity, it doesn't for one minute mean
that you are following out a mechanical, set pattern of
behavior, as I have said before. But it brings you an
opportunity to be resourceful on your own. The
SUGMAD lives within ITS own laws, and therefore
you are expected to make and live within your laws, in
this world.

"Laws are simply postulates. Freedom in this world
means making your own postulates and living by them
or not. Here in this earth world you have to live by
laws or postulates which others make, for the good of
the whole. The reasoning behing this is simple, the
weak must have some defense against the
strong but in the heaven worlds this isn't true for all
are strong in fact the strongest. So there are no
weak that need defending. As a result all and each can

183

make their own postulates and live together without
the slightest harm or damage to one another.

"In the heaven worlds you may live and feed on the
ECK or rather the music of the spheres. Here you must
carry a body, worry about it, and try to make it run
smoothly on a mechanical order.

"Life itself in these higher reaches does not exhibit
tension. As you travel upward you find that
creativeness is an effort on the lower planes, but up-
wardly the finer creations are effortless. The less re-
sistance it has to overcome, the better the creation.
The free movement of life without resistance is a
higher experience which we find only in self-expression
and hence this movement has no definite end to aim at
or achieve. Spiritual freedom implies the complete
transcendence of the lower worlds and of causality.

"Let's leave off here for a few minutes."

"Well now, we'll get started again/' Rebazar Tarzs
said definitely, motioning for me to sit again.

"To obtain a better understanding of eternity, I am
going into the four grand divisions of the universe
again. These are: Sat Desha, the highest region;
Brahmanda, the second region; Anda, the third and
lowest regions of the heavens; and Pinda, the fourth
grand division which is the gross material or physical
universe.

"Now don't mix these with the individual planes
which I explained long ago to you in these discussions,
and at that time separated them into the various grand
divisions.

"It's only for the clearer explanation of eternity that
I am going to partly repeat myself here. You must re-

"This is most important to you, for without this
great creative current there would be no immortality,
no eternity which the men of this world dream about.
And it is in this land of the Sat Desha that the
immortal Tuza finds that it must create to be a part of
this great region.

"Soid is never assigned a task by the ECK, the great
Supreme Lord of all, but seeks the position, without
the least effort, for the certain task which It must
fulfill in order to be a citizen of this country, and have
the utmost happiness.

"There are many and various things which Soul
finds to do, upon first entering into the world of Sat
Desha. It might see his effort can supply a small part
of the creative current flowing through the ECK, or It
might be assigned to the duty of looking after those
entering the world like Itself.

"There are many and various jobs for all concerned.
Hardly any Soul within this world is without a task of
some sort. There are those who personally serve the
great ECK, as a service to the SUGMAD. Others are
helping groups which look after the inspection of the
great world.

"So you see you need to apply yourself here; you will
not be idle, as you may think while in the body. This is
no place for resting and relaxing, in the same sense
that we do here on earth.

"Here I point out that every Soul that crosses the
boundary of a higher plane, from the lowest to the
highest, must be accompanied by a spiritual traveler,
unless It is an experienced traveler himself.

"Since It is entering into these planes normally to be
a citizen and resident of them, it is only natural that It
be brought there by someone who is prepared to escort

186

It about until It is familiar with this world No
emigrant going to the shores of America is hardly
without an escort when landing there; he is met either
by a friend or somebody who has been assigned by
some agency to see that he is safely put in the hands of
the proper individual who will care for him.

"The customs officer will see to his baggage and
handle him in a most proper way to make his welcome
more cheerful Other officials are there to see that he
doesn't get into the wrong areas of social life, among
many things.

"This is similar to what happens when Soul leaves
this plane and enters into the Astral world. If It
doesn't have a spiritual traveler to guide It, there are
others who will come to Its assistance. These are Souls
who have gone on before It, who are there principally
for Its assistance and to take It to the proper groups
where It will be most happy.

"Sometimes these Souls are relatives during their
earth life, friends or someone assigned by the group
who look after those entering the higher world Soul is
never at a loss to find Its way around without the help
of somebody, unless It rejects this assistance. Of
course It can do this, but it is hardly likely. There are
those who do, however, and they can become lost in the
many swamps and fogs which abound in the lower
Astral world They may wander about for what seems
to be years before someone comes to their aid Of
course, they are watched, but no one will approach to
give help until they are asked

"This is a system established on every plane of the
grand universe. Every Soul is looked after and cared
for, as It enters the plane above. It is sometimes
escorted by a spiritual traveler who can open all doors,

187

with only the word needed for the occasion. They pass
the Angel of Death, Yama, and go where the traveler
feels his charge should be.

'Immediately when one dies on this plane, he or she,
is taken by the messengers of death to the subtle
regions where Dharam Raya, the righteous judge, sits
enthroned to judge every individual according to his
deserts.

"The Christians call these messengers of death, the
Angels of Death or the Dark Angels, for dark indeed
they are; but in India they are called Yama dutas, or
the messengers of Yama, the King of the Dead. This
judge is always in court to take care of all comers.
There is no waiting, nor sitting in some jail cell.

"No one ever questions the judgment. No comment
is made; no oratory for the defense, no pretended
righteous condemnation of the prosecution. The
prisoner himself makes no complaint and asks no
favors. He understands that he is to receive judgment
and asks no help, for he must consent to the judgment,
the law of the SUGMAD from the highest world to the
lowest.

"He is taken to that region, or condition, where he
has earned his place, be it good or bad. He will remain
there for a fixed time according to the judgment
rendered and handed down. After that period has
expired, he is then returned to this world, or some
other world, to begin life anew.

"This is the routine procedure. He may enjoy a rest
in some heaven, or paradise, some pleasant country,
perhaps, many times more beautiful and delightful
than any portion of this world. There he may remain
for a year, a thousand or million years, all depending
upon his karma. The higher he goes, the longer the

188

period of his residence there.

"If one's life has been that of a low order, he may be
taken to some purgatory, or reformatory, often called a
hell there to endure the punishment earned by him
during his lifetime here. He cannot escape regard-
lesshe must meet the appropriate punishments.
There is one feature about all of such punishment that
must be understood they are remedial and not
vindictive. They are intended for his good, to produce a
reformation of character; but they are not eternal as
man is often led to believe, especially in the Christian
religion. But the law is inexorable. Each one must get
just what he has earned and just what is needed to
impress upon his inmost consciousness that he must
obey the laws of nature or be punished.

"After his period of discipline is over on the subtle
planes, he may be required to re-enter earth life in some
lower form, to finish his karmic schooling.

"This process of death is enacted upon every
physical plane of the universe, and allows Soul to enter
into the Astral. But it is not complete on the Astral,
for if Soul is to rise higher into the next world by
shedding Its astral body; then It goes through a
process of death upon it.

"Therefore, on every plane which Soul must enter,
after a residence on the lower one, It has to go through
a process similar to that on the Earth plane; It drops
the body It is wearing at that time, be it an astral or a
mental body. If no traveler is there to help It, It must
appear before the judge of the so-called dead on that
plane and be rendered justice as to where It may go in
the higher region.

"This practice is enacted on every plane up to the
Sach Khand, where one enters as pure spirit and

189

therefore It never returns to the lower worlds except
through the voluntary effort to help others, or for
certain experiences needed to keep It in the great
world of the SUGMAD.
"Well leave off here for awhile."

"All right, let's get started again," said Rebazar
Tarzs. "Now to finish up the part on eternity which
I've been holding back to the end of this particular
discussion.

"Certain phenomena occuring in the high world has
great interest to us at this point. In the beginning, let
me explain it this way. We have those ECK travelers
who roam the universes from end unto end except
they do not exactly enter into the real world of the
SUGMAD.

"Of course, they enter into the land of Sat Desha,
and mingle freely with all the inhabitants there, and go
up as far as the ECK, where dwells the first manifes-
tation of the Lord. But they do not go any further than
this.

"Within this region where dwells the SUGMAD,
ITSELF, there are only a few beings who live and
serve IT. These are the Mahavakyis, the Silent
Travelers and so mighty are these great ones that
you seldom can confront them. Those who have been
fortunate to have come face to face with one of these
superior beings have thought they were in the presence
of the SUGMAD, ITSELF.

"These Silent Travelers are well named, for they are
practically invisible to all eyes outside the world of the
SUGMAD. As they come down from the highest

190

region into that of the ECK, instead of taking form like
one would think of them doing, these superior beings
remain in their cloaks of anonymity.

"These are what we know as the Agents of the
SUGMAD those who travel anywhere through ITS
vkst empire on ITS business. These strange beings are
actually the subordinates of the SUGMAD in a way
they are ITS deputies who carry out ITS will and
wishes.

"Now all are subject to the laws of these strange,
superior entities for they manifest at any point so
desired in the universe and carry out some order,
whether it is against the Lord of a certain plane,
including the Brahma of the Brahma Lok, or the Soul
suffering in purgatory. It is their duty, not to question.

"They are in many forms among the inhabitants of
all planes. Here on this earth plane they may be
disguised as men, animals, birds or fish, and even
rocks if it serves their purpose to carry out the mission
of their Superior Commander.

"Much as some of the spiritual travelers know about
the SUGM AD, little is known about these Silent Ones,
who come and go like the winds of the world. The
spiritual travelers have their own agents, as well as the
Lords and governors of the various regions of the
universes; each in turn reports to his own chief and
carries out his desire. But the silent travelers are not
responsible to anyone but the Supreme SUGMAD. IT
alone gives them their commissions to be carried out
and they must work for IT alone, or be cast out of the
heavens into the bowels of the earth, as Lucifer was in
the beginning of time.

"These silent ones are in command of the great
sound current, in the high heavens, and are to give aid

191

and comfort to the SUGMAD in ITS eternal home.
They keep the planes balanced and in order, so that
little destruction can come to them, should any of the
inhabitants go on rampages and bring about the
downfall of planes within planes. They are in charge of
time, creativity, space and other mechanical phases ctf
the lower universes.

'They see that the planets in this world are properly
hung in space so there will be no collision of them, by
being out of their assigned positions.

"They have immense powers, and great wisdom to
carry out their missions, and of course unlimited
freedom.

"Outside the SUGMAD, these Silent Travelers are
the most powerful beings in all the worlds, and next to
them are the Spiritual Travelers. The Lords and
Governors of all the planes can be powerful within
their own domain, but they are subject to the laws
which govern them, and even the Brahman, as I have
said before, will someday have to be reincarnated
again. They are all limited, in power, wisdom and
freedom.

"The ECK Masters know when the Silent Ones are
around, and they cooperate with them at the level upon
which they are working at the time. The ECK travelers
are subject to the Silent Ones; they do not have to
obey, yet they will because it's realized always that the
Silents are direct from the SUGMAD out of love
and respect, they will give their best cooperation, even
though at times they wouldn't like to do so.

"So you have three levels of independent workers in
eternity, who cooperate in the running of the worlds.
First, the SUGMAD, the all Supreme Being, second
the Silent Travelers, who are ITS messengers or

192

agents, and third, the ECK Travelers who are both the
agents of the SUGMAD and the Silent Ones. The three
work together, in perfect harmony and understanding.

"The functions of the Silent Ones are to serve the
purpose of the SUGMAD in running the universes,
carrying out ITS laws and regulations; the spiritual
travelers have the duty of seeing that Souls are
returned to the kingdom of the ECKANKAR.

"These are about the only duties that either of the
groups have which are in common, otherwise they go
their own way and live with their own without coming
in contact with one another.

"Quite frequently the Silent Ones appear on earth in
some form or other; often they are the shining angels,
like those who appeared at the tomb of Christ and told
Mary that her lord was gone. Jacob wrestled with one
on the ladder of heaven. Occasionally, you will read of a
Silent Traveler in a similar manner in the ancient
scriptures, or somebody will speak of some strange
phenomena happening to them.

"As it stands the Silent Travelers are not concerned
with the rulers of planes, Sat Nam, Ramkar, Omkar or
Jot Niranjan. These minor gods are only workers
within the spiritual hierarchy of the SUGMAD. They
are subject to the nature laws of those works within
which they are living.

"The Silent Travelers, as I have said, have no such
laws hanging over them, and they are free as the winds
of the world. Now this is the interest the Silent
Travelers hold for you someday you may become
one, for it is the highest point in all of the universes
which you can reach.

"You cannot in a sense become the SUGMAD,
ITSELF; you can become a part of IT, and you can

193

become a coworker of the SUGMAD. Under no circum-
stances can you become the Supreme Deity, although
religions try to tell their followers that this is true. You
cannot do this, regardless of what is told you by a
priest or a minister of any gospel.

"You can become a Silent Traveler, which is one of
the SUGMAD's closest relations these strange
beings have their home and habitat within the heart of
the SUGMAD. Nothing can get any closer than these
beings who are without doubt the only creatures who
are in direct contact with the Lord God of all the
worlds.

"If you are at all interested you may aim your sights
at becoming a Silent One. But if you do this, there will
be an intensity of training which you have never heard
of in your life nor in your many incarnations spent on
earth. The training that many lamas are reported as
going through would be a child's practice besides what
the candidates go through. Many fail to make the
ranks of the Silent Ones.

"For example, I will point out that perhaps out of
every ten thousand who take the tests and trainings
they must go through, one will succeed. Candidates are
picked, without their own knowledge, from the higher
planes hardly anyone living on the planes below the
Daswan Dwar is ever picked for training. I would say
that ninety percent of the candidates have reached the
plane of the ECK, before they are even considered. The
Silent Ones are not intending to put anyone through
the tests and training, who have not finished up their
training in the lower world. They know better, for it
would mean the loss of a Soul who had gone through
the practice of trying to reach the proper plane and
suddenly shoved into something much over his head.

194

"These strange beings are the chosen ones. They
intend to take care of their own, for they have no re-
sponsibility to anyone except the SUGMAD.

"To the human heart these creatures look and act
cold toward all others, and in a way they are; except for
the fact they are running the universes through the
administration of the SUGMAD. Each plane has a
number of them who are doing their work under the
supervision of the top Silent One, like a regular
business staff, from the chief executive to the workers.

"These creatures are not bothered with the
individual Souls, but concerned only with the
mechanics of the universes. They are so busy that
nothing else matters to them to be filled with all the
qualities of mercy, kindness and those which serve
mankind in another way would be rather out of their
field.

"Their chief concern is with the three qualities which
I have mentioned several times Isness, Nowness and
Hereness, the trinity of the SUGMAD."

195

196

Chapter 9
THE NO-EXISTENCE OF SPACE

The old traveler, Rebazar Tarzs, didn't spend much
time in getting into his dialogue this morning after my
arrival. He seated himself and began talking.

"Now the next phase of ECK, that mystical philoso-
phy quite unknown to the religions of this earth world
and hardly at all to most of its mystics, pertains to
matter, space and time.

"Space and time are joint or rather twin aspects of
the whole; they are actually members of a materialistic
team known as MEST, which when broken down are:
Matter, Energy, Space and Time. These constituents
are those which make up the physical world the
Pinda, and are represented in the Occult as that of
man's physical body. This is the last frontier of Soul,
or the lowest to be exact.

"We are discussing matter, space and time in this
talk. Energy has been somewhat covered, but it will
get full coverage in the next chapter.

"In the beginning let me point out that space actu-
ally has no existence. It is hardly anything but a
nothingness, a huge hole filled with spiritual energy,
the ECK. It is nothing, apart from our perception of
objects and time means nothing, apart from our
experience of events.

"Space appears merely as a fiction created by man's
own mind an illegitimate extension of the nature of
subjective concepts which help us to understand and
describe the arrangements of objects as seen by us,
while time appears as a secondary fiction serving a

197

similar purpose for the arrangement of events which
happen to us. Time and space are both maya in the
modern study of physics and also in philosophy. They
are not the same under all circumstances. They are
more subjective ideas than objective facts.

"Man's knowledge of the external world cannot be
divorced from the nature of the faculties with which we
have obtained physical knowledge. The truth of the
law of gravitation cannot be regarded as subsisting,
apart from the experimental procedure by which we
ascertained the truth. Imagine yourself alone in the
midst of nothingness and then try to tell me how large
you are. It is literally impossible.

"Here are some of the things which you must know
about so-called space. First, a straight line may not
necessarily be straight; second, a ray of light has
weight; third, space is curved; fourth, the universe,
even the Pinda world, is boundless yet finite; five,
mind creates matter and matter creates space.

"Sixth, every sentient (meaning every experience of
sensation and feeling) being is capable of constructing
its own universe. Seventh, space and time are not reali-
ties. There is no fundamental entity called space exist-
ing in itself in which the world is placed, nor is there
any fundamental line in which an event occurs. Out of
an observer's temporal experience, is constructed time,
and out of the same time is constructed space. But
there is no underlying time or space with which these
can conceivably be correlated. Thus the universe and
its creator are neither in time nor space. Eighth, the
shortest straight line is an infinite affair. Ninth, the
universe is infinite, yet paradoxically small, and tenth,
atoms are world systems.

"Eleventh, world systems are atoms. Twelfth, the

19R

mind of man is truly omnipresent because all time and
space is present in it. Thirteenth, physical qualities in
general have no absolute values, only relative to
chosen frames of references or codes. Fourteenth,
space, time and the physical world of substances have
no objective reality, apart from the mental concepts of
them that man creates in his mind. Fifteenth, nothing
is real except what is in our consciousness and percep-
tion, and this, when relative, creates an illusion. Six-
teenth, when we view ourselves in space and time, we
are quite obviously distinct individuals. When we pass
beyond space and time we form ingredients of a contin-
uous stream of the sound current, and seventeenth,
everything is relative to human perception. There is no
space which is positive, for it is nothingness. Therefore
one man's mind is negated by another. Even the trav-
elers, the saints, sometimes do not like the works of
another member of their group. Everyone has his own
measures.

"One more point to make on this subject. The pic-
ture of an electron as a point in space and time fails
completely. It has wave-like characteristics, therefore
it is called a wavicle,

"An event has many sizes relative to the correspond-
ing standpoints. There are as many imaginary worlds
as there are observers with varying interests and pur-
poses, and these worlds appear to change in accordance
with the subjective changes in the life of those who
experience them.

"When we discard our human spectacles entirely, we
find that light and sound are neither waves nor par-
ticles. Speaking philosophically, the SUGMAD is
neither the Satguru nor the Nirguna, but has the
nature of all things.

199

"When a jiva, or student, as a particle approaches
the ECK, he appears to be the SUGMAD, or Satguru.
When the student approaches him in the form of a
wave by means of self-knowledge, he appears to be the
Nirguna, or negative-self. There can be no separation
between waves. The nature of light and sound is such
that they behave as waves in empty space but like
bullets as soon as light encounters matter.

"Soul appears as negative when It sees something
other than Itself. Physical space is a matter of infer-
ence and construction. The account of an animal given
by examining an animal's movements is only an event
in the animal's life. The same is the case with events in
a man's life. Relativity proves this by equations.

"It has been established that separate component
parts of a uniform system of bodies maintain the same
position in relation to one another as though the sys-
tem was stationary. Thus, things inside a swiftly
moving railroad coach behave in exactly the same way
as when the coach is standing still. In reality, things
bear their own measure in themselves and to find the
measure of things is to understand illusion, or maya.

"The smallest electron and the largest world which
exists, apart from our study of it is senseless. The idea
that perception in itself reveals the character of
objects is a fond delusion. All that exists is what it is,
and this only within the limits of a certain and very
small scale. On the spiritual and psychic scale, i.e.,
from another viewpoint, it becomes something.

"The smaller the reference body, or the reference sys-
tem, the smaller the world. Space, or nothingness is
proportionate to the size of the reference body and all
the measurements of space are proportionate to the
measurements of the measurement of the reference

200

body. By annihilating somebody's life or mind, his
world-experience is annihilated; by the destruction of a
jar, that jar's space is annihilated.

"Our measurements are never of space and time but
only of the things and the events that occupy space
and time. My time measurements depend ultimately
on my space measurements and the latter on my ideas
of simultaneous action. You depend on your reading of
simultaneity in precisely the same way.

"If you built nine boxes of the same measurements
but different in forms they would occupy the same
space and time, and would be the same objects yet
appearing to be different to different observers. In the
same way one and the same world appears to be dif-
ferent to different observers. Therefore, every observer
lives in his own imaginary world.

"In a dream-experience, earth, roads, mountain sur-
face, denote only forms of empty space; so, in the
waking experience also, they are forms of empty space,
depending on the position of the observer.

"I, you, he or she are also imaginary forms of waking
experience. For instance, a mare cannot become the
wife of a man, and woman can't become the wife of a
horse, although the mare and woman are both feminine
characters. As the waking condition destroys the
dream completely, the condition of self-realization
destroys the waking experience completely. The body
of the observer is also a product of thought just as it
happens in dreams.

"For each frame of reference there is a scale of length
and a scale of time. Whether a body has taken up
energy or not, depends upon the position of his obser-
vation. All we need to know is the relation of the other
fellow's space and time standards to our own. This is

201

the first thing relativity teaches us. All measures are
correct for the time and for the space selected, but one
relative measure cannot be applied to understand all
events. Therefore, when one thinks that the whole
world must move according to his ideas, he assumes a
false position. Other persons are also right from their
point of view of that time.

"It is hard to give a satisfactory explanation of the
theory of space and time in popular language, because
the language itself is based on old condepts. All the
student can do is become familiar with the new con-
cepts, just as a child gets used to the simple relations
and qualities he meets until he understands them.
Understanding really means nothing in the world
except familiarity and getting accustomed to the con-
cepts.

"The first postulate of nothingness may be illus-
trated by the familiar difficulty of determining
whether a slowly moving train, one is sitting in, or an
adjacent one, is in motion. The passenger has either to
wait for bumps or accelerations, or he has to look out
at some adjacent object which he knows to be fixed,
before he can decide if he's moving.

"The second principle is an obvious consequence of
the wave theory of light and sound. Just as waves in
water once started by a ship travel through the water
with a velocity independent of the ship, so, waves in
nothingness travel onward with speed bearing no rela-
tion to that of the body which originated them.

"Leave off here."

"Okay, now for the second session on the no-exis-

202

tence of space.

"Before starting in on the deeper part of the subject,
let me divert to a favorite topic, the fad which man has
taken up and tried to work out to form around it a reli-
gionthis is reason.

"Reason is a senseless sort of argument that every-
thing works out from logic or deduction according to
what the senses make of it. The definition of reason is
that it's a statement offered as an explanation or justi-
fication of an act or procedure. It's a consideration,
motive or judgment inducing or confirming a belief,
influencing the will, and leading to an action.

"It is a ground or cause, the reality which makes any
fact intelligible to the senses of man. It is supposedly
the materialistic power of comprehending, of inferring,
of intellectualizing.

"It is to work out, think out, figure out, analyze or
conclude about something.

"This is reason. The very thing which Thomas
Aquinas, the Catholic founder of Christian philosophy,
used to deduct theological thought and start a medieval
drive toward the worst piece of thinking in all history.
Man has certainly suffered because of his reasoning
which is based upon false premises.

"Today this fad has been split into two warring fac-
tions, the intellectuals versus the anti-intellectuals.
The intellectuals, who are supposedly endowed with
unusual mental capacity, versus the anti-intellectuals,
who don't believe in intellectualism.

"Now the followers of intellectualism believe in the
doctrine that knowledge is derived from pure reason;
also, the doctrine that the ultimate principle of reality
is reason.

"The anti-intellectuals believe in the doctrine of anti-

203

reason; opposing the intellectual theory, they believe in
the doctrine of non-reason. This is a faith in the higher
senses, the senses of Soul that make contact with the
sound current and become a part of it.

"The reasonists are those who follow Francis Bacon,
Descartes, Hegel, Aristotle and others. These are the
ones whom the Catholic Church have established as
their leaders in the field of thought and metaphysics,
thus forming the intellectualism of the church as a
basic philosophy. They are: Aristotle, Aquinas,
Bernard, Pascal, and a few hundred others who put a
materialistic slant to the church's metaphysical theory
called Ontonology, which is supposedly the science of
reality; the branch of knowledge that investigates the
nature, essential properties, and relations of being.

"The anti-reasonists are those whom we normally
know as the spiritual travelers. They are followers of
the doctrine of directly receiving from the SUGMAD
and ITS counterparts, the Silent Ones, and of course
the ECK. Within spirit or ECK, the great sound
current, are the properties of the SUGMAD Wisdom,
Power and Freedom. These are supposedly given to all
who will seek them, if they are willing to take the
trouble of using the proper techniques of the spiritual
exercises.

"The knowledge gained from separating Soul from
the body, and moving about in what we know as the
Nuri-Sarup, the light body, isn't concerned at all with
the reasoning of the mind. Soul learns quickly that It
can gain more in fifteen seconds, of knowledge, health,
power and freedom, when submerged in the divine,
cosmic sound current than by years of trying to reason
out something by Its intellect.

"This reasoning out process introduced by the

204

Jesuits in the Catholic Church has completely created
a racial aberration among the homo sapiens of this
earth plane. Often it looks like a huge, gigantic plot to
trap all exposed to what is known as education.
Nothing could be further from the real facts.

"Intellectualism is really a trap established by the
Kal Niranjan for the Tuza. So many are falling for it,
because materialistic education seems to be the only
way to knowledge.

"Now I've given this to you for the reason of show-
ing that the materialistic sciences which are a part of
intellectualism are a trap to gather all attention to
their discoveries. These are, as you know, nothing in
comparison with what an ECK traveler knows.

"Take for example what happened a few years ago
when the Nobel prize was given to a pair of American
scientists at Princeton University for the discovery of
the rotation of the atom; clockwise to the right for posi-
tive action, and counter clockwise for negative action.
When announced through the newspapers, the theo-
sophical society members pointed out that Annie
Besant, their renowned leader, had said this in a large
number of her books in 1880, and again early in this
century. She was a spiritual traveler.

"All this is concerned with space. The intellectuals
are vastly overconcerned with spacebut the travelers
are not. It is an open hole of nothingness. To the latter,
there is hardly a piece of space anywhere. Everything
is loaded with atoms, Tuzas and spiritual things, the
heavenly wonders.

"The intellectuals are concerned with emptiness, and
they are loaded with other materialistic projects made
by the hands of men, like human beings living in some
housing project, or in the great, empty beehives of

205

cities.

"Now, to the intricacies of nothingness again.

"The wave picture, which I spoke about in my last
session, begins to appear as the true picture of reality
and the particle picture merely a clumsy object, an
approximation of the truth, an approximation
obtained by trying to cram force into a frame work of
space and time, into a structure which does not admit
representation in space and time.

"A wave starts from a moving particle or group of
particles growing greater as it moves into the layer of
upper strata. As one and the same substance appears
from one point of view as a particle and from another
as a wave, it is now called wavicle in the language of
the spiritual travelers.

"Observers describe events by measures of times
and distances made with regard to their frameworks of
references. Therefore, such things as length, velocity,
energy, momentum are not absolute but relative, Le M
they are not attributes of the physical reality but rela-
tions between the observer and what he observes. Con-
sequently, the observed objects are not laws of the
physical world but of the observed phenomena. Einstein
found that the concepts of length between points in
nothingness or events in time didn't as we supposed,
represent an intrinsic property of the points or the
events. Like direction, it is merely a relation whose
value changes with the observer's position relative to
the object.

"As we cannot ascertain the position and the veloc-
ity of an electron at the same time, it is impossible to
compute the future path of the electron. Any interfer-
ence on our part would change the position of the elec-
tron. Everything depends on how you look at it. The

206

visual image will endure as long as we do not change
our standpoint, and thus it differs from hallucination.
Matter has really a wave structure. Therefore, it will
change in quite a definite way when we change our
standpoint in regard to it.

"A vista of miles may be represented by an expert
artist on a small canvas so that if a man would make an
effort to suppress the usual idea of extension and
would look at the painting intently, he will perceive the
scenes actually extending into miles. No matter how
minute the picture on a paper may be, we always feel it
to be like its original, so long as the mutual proportion
of its contents is in harmony.

"This is also the case in dreams. Extension of space,
in dreams and the waking state, is nothing real in itself
apart from the mind of the observer. Mathematically,
many different kinds of space are conceivable.

"One of the remarkable outcomes is that the differ-
ence between a wave and a particle is disappearing.
This has to do with something that is neither, and yet
shares the properties of both. The difference between a
wave and a particle is one of degree, rather than of
kind. A group wave of a certain frequency may appear
to us as if it were a moving particle of given energy.
But it is a clumsy picture. The particle picture tells us
that our knowledge of an electron is indetermined. The
wave picture, the electron itself, is also indetermined.

"The particle picture assumes that an objective uni-
verse exists outside ourselves and tries to depict this
objective universe, while the wave picture tries to
depict our knowledge of the universe as experienced by
us. The wave picture is a picture of knowledge, not of
things.

"The mass of an electron is not constant but is a

207

function of its speed, and this again depends on the
observer's system of reference. In each mass phenom-
ena where many observers are in the same condition,
the statistical laws appear all the more clearly, with
the greater number of individuals that cooperate in the
phenomena.

"In such cases, we get many pictures but it will be
hard to realize that the two very different shadow pic-
tures are projections of the same object. Accordingly,
nothing that varies for different observers can be
fundamentally true.

"As stated before, the wave picture provides a repre-
sentation, not of an objective nature but only of our
knowledge of nature. The same electron may be repre-
sented by two different wave pictures, not because it is
itself different in the two cases, but because our knowl-
edge of it is different in both cases.

"All right. This is enough for now!"

"Now we'll get started again," said Rebazar Tarzs
slowly sitting down on the hard floor again.

"One of the things that is much talked about in spir-
itual circles is intuition. This is the power of knowing,
the power of obtaining knowing without the senses,
without recourse to the inference of reasoning; an
innate, instinctive knowledge.

"This faculty is connected with the no-thing uni-
verse. Ordinarily it is supposed to mean inner-
teaching, inner instruction as given by some kind of
higher inner self.

"The word intuition means however to look in, to
gaze into, see and understand immediately. To know

208

by looking inwardly. In other words to project oneself
by looking inwardly and understanding immediately
what it is we are seeking. In order to understand the
no-thing universe we must rely on intuition, as all ECK
travelers do. It is started by joining, or hooking up the
forces between Soul within you and the no-thing world
within, and without. The working together of the sub-
jective self with the forces of the no-thing world will
start working out the kinks between this region and
you.

"The forces of the no-thing world will begin to
suggest the right course for the outer to take, reason
over and adapt for use. The object is to bring the two
faculties into balance and give the forces of the no-
thing world the edge but nothing too much, for it
would be quite unreasonable to let this faculty rule you
completely in this matter-real world; yet on the other
hand it knows far more about straightening out the
problems of life than you would ever know.

"The idea is not to follow it blindly. Learn to pay
attention to it and then use what information it brings
to your attention. You have use of it at anytime, any-
where. It's only that the power of the no-thing world is
there and must be used whenever you need it.

"What actually happens is that you can furnish the
channel for it to flow through your life and when that
channel is open, when there is nothing blocking it-
that higher-inner faculty can function readily to tell
you something which can't be gained from any amount
of outer, man made logic or reasoning.

"Intuition doesn't use words. It existed long before
language was invented, and that is why we are cut off,
as it were, from our inner selves. We have gone farther
down into matter than the inner self has and it can

209

only talk to us when we furnish it with a channel for
the no-thing forces to work through.

'The some-thing forces will fight to keep the inner
forces from flowing through. The objective will assert
itself. You must have a free mind and no upsets going
at the time you wish to use it. Any quarrels or argu-
ments will upset the workings of this inner force.

"When you can put the outer to work under the intu-
ition forces and coordinate them together, they will
give you a guidance such as you've never had before.
The objective misses too much when working alone,
especially the help the subjective could give; and the
subjective working alone has not a firm hold on the
outer world without good training.

"It takes a lot of training to get the inner forces
working through you, especially to open the channel
and keep it free from the obstacles and aberrations
which might clog it. No one will understand this until
they start traveling on the path upward into the Far
Country.

"Intuition is a basic faculty on this plane. At the
foundation of matter lies illusion, a form of perception.
When we see or feel ourselves in the world of four
dimensions, we shall see that the world of three dimen-
sions does not really exist and never existed. It was the
creation of our own fantasy, a phantom ghost, an
optical illusion, a delusion, anything one pleases to call
it except reality.

"The phenomenal world is simply our incorrect per-
ception of the world. When a man dreams he begins to
be conscious of the fact that he is asleep, and that what
he sees is a dream, then he wakes up; also Soul,
beginning to be conscious of the fact that all visible life
is a dream, approaches its awakening.

210

"Bertrand Russell said, 'When one cosmic time and
one persisting space are abolished, we have space-time
instead. Our notion of the world structure is changed.
There is no cosmic time. We must give up the idea of
bodies moving and the talk of events. The unity of a
body is the unity of its history, like the unity of a time.
Our aspects and interpretations of the universe are
constructions of the mind of man. If we could intuit
ourselves and other things as they really are, we
should see ourselves in a world of spiritual natures, our
connection with which we didn't begin at our birth and
will not cease with the destruction of the body/

* 'Space, or no-thingness is a quality of Soul. The
Tuza exists everywhere but through ignorance limits
itself to a certain region. Evil consists in transforming
something great into something small. We have to
remove an obvious limitation.

"All phenomena traveling past us with the velocity
of light is called radiation, while the localized events
which travel much more slowly or not at all, is called
matter. All may be, fundamentally and equally, of the
nature of etheric waves. The question is sometimes
raised, how would things be regarded by an observer
who is himself traveling with the velocity of light? To
answer this question, it is pointed out that all things
would appear equal. In other words they would appear
to be standing still.

"The distinction between ourselves and the outside
world is only arbitrary, a practically convenient divi-
sion between one type of sense impression and another.
The group of sense impressions, forming what I term
myself, is only a small subdivision of the vast world of
sense impressions when involved in the body matter.
Obviously, the distinction is only a practical one. The

211

color and form which constitutes for us the needle are
just as much sense impressions within us, as the pain
produced by its pricks.

"The old dualism of mind and matter, which was
mainly responsible for the supposed hostility, seems
likely to disappear, not through matter becoming in
anyway more shadowy or unsubstantial than hereto-
fore or through mind becoming resolved into a function
of the working of matter, but through substantial
matter resolving itself into a creation and manifesta-
tion of mind.

"Our ordinary thoughts have become space-time
bound and can get no grip on concept outside space
and time. Our space-time framework proves inade-
quate for the representation of the whole of nature, or
even of this lower world. Therefore, there is absolute
necessity for us to secure a state of absence of all
thoughts, Nirvikalpa Samadhi, what I call deep trance,
in order to experience truth.

"When war breaks out, many men are ready to die
for their country. By this, their space-sense somewhat
increases, and yet the space sense does not increase
sufficiently because the people of other countries
remain as their enemies.

"Those only are the wisest men who live for the whole
world by loving all the SUGMAD's creatures. Then,
the space-time sense is perfect and whole. They have
overcome the otherness. They enjoy the fullness of full-
space sense. Those who are selfish must die for their
country in order to develop this nothingness sense.
The spiritual travelers who are unselfish and wise will
live for the good of all the SUGMAD's creatures. Spir-
itual wisdom develops in man the full nothingness
sense.

212

"The will to wisdom is of greater value to humanity
than the will to power of the aggressive man.

"The no-space, the nothingness sense depends on the
system of reference and the nature of the co-ordinates
used.

"If we, who have traveled into the Far Country, told
this openly we would be the damned. By this I mean
the excluded. Some spiritual travelers have possession
of data which is terrible in its aspects to mankind. I
say only the travelers know and hold such knowledge.

"The ECK traveler must remain almost silent in this
world. The reason being that whenever he speaks, his
words are greeted with wild shouts and screams from
orthodox religions. The old, invulnerable metaphysical
systems, such as Buddhism and Catholicism shake to
their foundations. The priests and gurus of all teach-
ings flout and taunt and jeer at the travelers' presence.

"All religions, all philosophical systems, all cosmog-
onies are created to explain the obvious teachings of
life and things. But they have failed, just like we see in
the explanation of the no-thing universe versus the
some-thing universe.

"Leave off here for a spell."

"To complete this discussion is my promise this
afternoon/' said Rebazar Tarzs, as a stretch of sun-
light beamed through the window and fell upon his
shoulder like a bright ribbon of gold. "I'll finish this
subject on the no-existence of space, and tomorrow will
give you another aspect of the world of the SUGM AD.

"Now the way to the Far Country is through the no-
thing universe for all human beings. They must cross

213

the land of nothingness in order to get into the first
plane, the Astral region.

"In this region of nothingness, the super-physical
regions, are the Sun Worlds, Moon Worlds and the
Lightning Worlds. These worlds lie between this phy-
sical plane and the astral region. They are merely sub-
planes, well described by the Vedas and later the
Vedantists who took those scriptures seriously enough
to consider them as some of the super superior worlds.

"They really are not very high, but they are worlds
of nothingness which the ECK traveler must cross to
reach the first pure plane of the astral region.

"The spirit body moves something like this in its
journey upward. It leaves the body through the tenth
door, the spiritual eye, in the subtle body. At first,
Soul looks out through this door, and eventually It
goes through it and leaves the body completely. It then
steps out into a new world which It has never seen
before. This new world will probably be some subplane
of the astral zone, but it. is a new dimension to SouL

"There is in this greater universe an almost endless
series of sets of dimension, one above the other, like
the three dimension world in which we live here, reach-
ing up to the highest worlds. Each set is separated
from the one just above it by the difference in the sub-
stances, the fineness or coarseness of particle and the
different rates of vibrations.

"These differences make one set of dimensions invis-
ible to people living in another set, because the eyes of
people inhabiting one region will have a limited range
of vision, making it impossible for them to see a region
much above or much below their own region, to which
they have been adapted. This is the reason we cannot
see the astral worlds by or through the physical eyes.

214

"With the astral eyes, we can see on that plane just
as well as we can see on the physical plane with the
physical eyes. So, too, with the still higher worlds.
With each higher world, or set of dimensions, the light
and the beauty increase materially, also the happiness
of the inhabitants.

"At the sublime moment when the traveler steps out
into the higher world, he begins to realize that he has
acquired a vast increase of powers, as well as joy. It
appears to him, and it is a fact too, that he can do
almost anything he wishes to do. Not only has he
increased his powers, but his knowledge and under-
standing have expanded proportionately.

"At this time, the whole material universe appears
as an open book to him, and all dark mysteries have
vanished. He finds himself in possession of all knowl-
edge of these lower worlds. He now knows them and
has power over them. From here on up, each world
gained, gives one complete knowledge and power over
the world below him.

"The traveler is now free to proceed on his way to
still higher zones. He may not allow himself to be
unduly detained in order to enjoy the new world he has
just entered. He must proceed always upward, for
there will be no ending of the worlds he is seeking.

"Between the physical and the pure astral planes,
there are many sub-planes. Vedantic pundits speak of
the Sun Worlds first. Then come the Moon Worlds.
After that, numerous sub-zones, and finally what
Vivekananda calls the Lightning Worlds. This corres-
ponds to the plane of the Sahasra-dal-Kanwal, as it is
known to the travelers. It is commonly referred to as
the astral region. It is full of light and far more beauti-
ful than this world of the earth.

215

"It is the region which is commonly considered by
many yogis as the supreme heaven. This is as high as
they are able to ascend as a rule. The lord of that region
they regard as the Supreme Being is only the Kal
Niranjan, or Brahm. The travelers speak of him as Kal
Niranjan, while most Hindus think of him as Brahm,
the supreme God. He is, in fact, regarded as the
supreme being by nearly all religions, because they
know of nothing higher. Only the great travelers know
of the higher regions and the higher deities, on up to
the SUGMAD, out of whom all others come.

"At a point between the Sun Worlds and the Moon
Worlds and the pure Astral zone, the travelers enter a
zone called Ashta-dal-Kanwal. At that point some-
thing happens which changes the whole course of his
life and also his method of procedure.

"It is the meeting with his own teacher, a superior,
experienced spiritual traveler in his radiant form. This
is the traveler's Nuri-Sarup or light form. It is your
Chiva, or Guru, appearing just as he does in physical
life, except that his body is now much more beautiful
and full of light, brilliantly illuminated.

"The Chiva receives the neophyte traveler with a
cordial welcome and from that moment on the two are
never separated throughout the journey to still higher
regions, until the neophyte reaches the fifth region, the
Sat Nam world. By now he is experienced and can
travel upon his own.

"So you see that the Lord of this world, Kal Niran-
jan, is almost on the human level. He is the God of the
no-thing universe, what we are calling space. He is the
space God, which the Christians worship, and seem to
look for in the sky, a god over the world of nothing-
ness.

216

"Man cannot conceive of this space world, nor of a
space god, for he has personalized his god and made
him the protector of his household, life and controller
of his events. He doesn't realize that when he prays to
a space god, of the nature that I speak about, he is
praying to a no-thing to create for him something, or
bring about changes in his affairs.

"This stupidity is never recognized, for man is
beyond his capacity when getting into the worlds
beyond the something plane. It is for certain that he
cannot get some-thing out of no-thing, and space just
doesn't exist for him, nor anything else.

"Now everything including the Kal Niranjan, God of
this universe, is the narcissus, the unconscious beauty
of the universe, in the minds of minds. It is the instinct
of the Kal to act to exploit the ego. Exhibitionism is
the eternal law of what is called evolution. Autoscopy,
narcissism and exhibitionism are the motives for all
movements throughout the universe.

"Even the genius, the most non-adaptable, who is
always at war with his environment, is the great pea-
cock, the show-off and the self-loved individual.

"The principle of this is 'that whatever exists desires
an audience/ In everything, including the Kal, and if
you do not believe this, read all the holy scriptures, the
desire to be seen and loved is most prominent. Every-
thing and everyone desires to tell its story. Of course,
this includes the travelers.

"Here is where Soul arrives at self-realization.

"You, yourself, are the supreme one in this universe.
You are the Kal. You are matter and spirit; being more
matter than spirit, you are mainly the Kal. You are
always strutting before the pride of humility that dom-
inates you. Your modesty is a secret self-kissing exhi-

217

bition in the mirror of self-love. Love yourself says the
law of nature. I mean by this; love your Tuza and you
love the Kal.

"The metaphysical basis of exhibitionism is the
strange and incomprehensible inner urge of expression,
which is tied into the no-thing universe, space. Theol-
ogy expresses this urge for exhibitionism. Philosophy
expresses it as noumenon becoming phenomenon, exer-
cising an illusion in nothingness.

"Kal invents mirrors. The spaceless seek space in
which to move and survey, for space is the ballroom,
the peacock alley of the invisible,

"Curse Kal and you are cursing yourself. Praise Kal
and you are praising yourself. Thus the Kal, which all
mystics and priestcraft oppose, is the inventor of
theologies, cosmologies and divine events, with peals
of laughter ringing from his throat at their ignorance.

"Even Buddha, who drew the sword against life,
came to teach the world that there had better be no
world. His cameras were the eyes and ears of his dis-
ciples.

"Many seek to become the supreme exhibitionist.
Strip away the mask of all earthly dictators and there
you will find Kal strutting like the peacock. Strip away
the covering of the mystic and you will find the same
thing. Even Jesus was the boldest of peacocks who
annihilated the yoke of the meek and lowly and said;
'Look at yourselves. You too can be God!'

"Therefore, I say that in the world of space, or no-
thing, there are no principles or laws except those of
the Kal. There are only the exhibitionists, because the
world has made them so. Principles, theories, ideas are
the masks of the instincts, the innate craving of the
ego-vividness, blown to bits by the winds of the no-

218

thing universe.

"I can only show you that space doesn't exist. It is
all in the mind of man and if he continues to believe
that it does, he will live long on this earth planet in
the some-thing universe, until he sees and changes his
mind about space. Then he can rise into the higher
worlds.

"That's all for now."

219

220

Chapter 10
THE TUZASHOTTAMA ENERGY

"The energies of the Tuza are some of the most
powerful forces in the God worlds/' said Rebazar
Tarzs starting his talks in the cool of the early morning
shade.

"You will find that Soul operates its own drive like
an individual motor in a car. It cannot do any other
way, for this is the law of the ECK. All Tuzas must
make and use their own energies for their motion,
movement and drive through the universes. Nothing
else can help them it must be done on their own.

"Soul uses the sound current as the basic element,
out of which the energies It uses can be made to drive
Itself onward, or for any action that It undertakes.

"This energy in this universe is called electronic;
most scientists are aware of it, and make use of it in
our daily living. But Soul can use this for either deadly
or peaceful results to Itself.

"It can use electronic beams to knock out another
Soul and also to help others. Soul cannot be killed but
It can be knocked cold by electronic beams provided
they strike It hard enough. Often Souls meet and have
fierce battles in which they throw these electronic
beams at one another until one is either knocked out or
has to crawl away for Its own safety.

"All the electronic energy that Soul has, is manufac-
tured out of the sound current. It does not have
storage to carry around Its energy, so It must be abk
to create this energy and use it immediately. To try
and carry it is both clumsy and impractical.

221

"Soul, knowing that the power of creative words is
one of the secrets it possesses, can use these vibrations
instantly. Just by the actual calling upon the divine
energy through the channel of a secret word, Soul can
have it at Its finger tips.

"Every manifestation of life comes from this
dynamic energy of the sound current. From the crawl-
ing ant to the thunder bolt, from the tidal wave to the
solar cycle, everything, including the burning stars in
the Milky Way and the flicker of a candle, all take their
light and energy from this great central power.

4 'The pull of gravity, the flash of lightning, the build-
ing of thought-forms, and the love of the individual
Soul, all come from this current primordial. That which
physical science calls energy, which the Orientals call
Prana, is only a manifestation of this life of the audible
life sound current stepped down to meet material con-
ditions. Like electricity in the air, it is omnipresent and
it is also omnipotent. In it lies all energy, either latent
or dynamic. It only awaits the proper conditions to
express itself as dynamic force, in one form or another.
It has many forms of expression, most of which are not
yet known to physical science.

"Of course, it has to be stepped down, and at each
step down it takes a different character and quality, to
which we give names, if we can demonstrate them at
all. Most of them science has not yet discovered.

"But every force known, from primal energy, prana,
down to electricity and magnetism, the Tuzashottama
energy, all are modified to serve the common cosmic
and human needs. In the highest region it is all one
force, the Supreme SUGMAD, manifested and mani-
festing.

"The tremendous heat, energy and light of our sun,

222

of all suns, are derived from this stream. Every ray of
light in the universe is a phenomenon of this infinite
stream of light. Upon its power hangs every star in its
orbit. Not a single rose may bring forth its buds with-
out this power and no little child smiles without mani-
festing this power. Who can comprehend it, or assign
qualities? Who can analyze it? We know from its mani-
festation that it has at least three very wonderful
attributes:

"These are: WisdomPower Freedom.

"Now, motion and energy fuse and end up being the
same thing. Each Soul carries Its own energy or prana
about It, just as in a shower of rain. Each Soul carries
Its own rainbow about It. If I, the Tuza, change my
speed of motion, I create a new ether for myself.

"As all measurements of energy are relative to some-
thing, all motions are relative to the Tuza. There is no
absolute to the Tuza. There is no distinction between
motion and rest in Soul because these are alternate
systems of time-space, and a particle at rest, in one of
them, may be moving in the others; the difference
between unaccelerated and accelerated motion is like-
wise relative to the system of reference.

4 'A parrot dies and is reborn as a peacock. He will not
generally know that he was a parrot before because his
Tuzashottama energy has changed everything, e.g.,
this time, space, motion and weight.

"This energy is vibratory. It works in vibrations like
the shooting of bullets; with speed greater than the eye
can comprehend. Light and sound are the basic ele-
ments in this Soul energy.

"Light and sound are not parts of the physical
things themselves, but are the results of waves of
energy flowing out of the ECK as the fountainhead of

223

the SUGMAD. The different vibrations of one thing
and another are often the same light and sound rays,
yet seen and heard differently. The essence of a thing is
an optical or hearing interpretation. What we perceive
often as separated from ourselves, really isn't, in the
slightest.

"An observer in a rapidly descending airplane actu-
ally sees the earth rushing upward and a traveler in an
express train actually sees the telegraph poles moving
past him.

"It is difficult to see the position and motion of elec-
trons at the same time with the physical eyes. Once
though, you step outside the body and look, they are
perfectly clear. Inside the body looking through the
physical eyes, one cannot see. The more there is a focus
on the one, the more blurred the other becomes.

"The same is true when we look at the aspects of the
SUGMAD from an earth viewpoint. The positive and
negative blur if gazed upon together separated and
viewed from outside the body, they become crystal
clear. Man cannot experience both simultaneously,
although the sound current contains both aspects
within itself on this lower plane.

"Man cannot ascertain the place and motion of Soul
at the same instant. It is impossible to compute accu-
rately the energy which Soul will mock up in an instant
to either defend itself or move into a higher plane. Both
are relative to the position in which that particular
Soul wishes to place itself.

"Soul works through the visual image channel to
mock-up energy. It uses the Tuzashottama energy for
expanding and contracting, through consciousness of
the world in which it is operating. It uses itself in the
energy field through the three basic attributes of the

224

SUGMAD; wisdom, power and freedom.

"The energy on which the Tuza exists is eternal, and
it is necessary to enter into this fluid state and become
one with it. Working always in the relative and never
in the absolute, it can change, move and give itself cer-
tain directive speed that nothing else in the universes
of the Far Country can accomplish.

"The law which governs spiritual energies can only
come to you by an expansion of human consciousness.
This is also true of spiritual experience. The seed must
be planted in your mind to receive the dynamic
presence of the power and to surrender your mind to its
control. It is this surrender and Soul control which
brings about the release of the dynamic energies.

"It is the inner energy which you must liberate in
order to walk above the ignorant and be of the
Godhead. However, often without the guidance of the
true inner traveler, there is danger in opening that
psychic being concealed within, not usually active; for
this being takes over and gives you false energy and
failure.

"Philosophy, because of its habit of abstraction, has
seldom been a power for life. It has sometimes been
powerful for high speculation in pursuing mental
truth, for its own sake, sometimes for a subtle mental
gymnastic in a bright cloud of words and ideas, but
generally it has got too far off the beaten track.

"Only the SUGMAD matters, the SUGMAD alone
will be the continuing need of the whole being of man.
If there is any compulsion to activity, it will not be
that of implanted desires nor the forces of nature, but
the luminous striving for a greater consciousness ever
becoming the sole motive of the whole existence.

"The divine energy of Soul comes in at one time;

225

when mocked up, it leads, compels, instructs and
enlightens; then again it may withdraw into the back-
ground and seem to leave the being to its own
resources. At all times the seeker will be aware of the
divine guide and will know that everything is being
done for the best,

'This master energy descends upon you, breaks up
your present psychological formations, shatters the
walls of the ego and gives you greater powers of vision,
perception, motivation and perfection. All forms of life
that are unable to bear the change of this burning,
fiery energy must disappear and all that can bear it
will survive and enter into the kingdom of the spiritual
worlds.

"The Tuzashottama energy will deal with all that is
good for the traveler and for the good of all. Alone, the
awaiting universal will must choose, action must
change into a dynamic movement of that will, enjoy-
ment must be replaced by the play of a pure, spiritual
bliss. All personal will is either a temporary delegation
from the ECK, or designated by IT. Even after he is
free, the traveler will be in the world, and to be in the
world is to remain in its works. To remain in the world
without desire is to act for the good of the world in
general, for the race, for some new creation to be
evolved on earth or for some work imposed by the
divine will within you.

"Freedom and truth fulfill its movement in the
traveler according to each one's nature. This is the
special aspect of the divine energy of the ECK, out of
which the Tuza has emerged into action, unlimited by
any form of this law or way; for Soul is infinite. You
will manifest the divine moments of truth according to
the temperament of your being, in any combination of

226

essential attributes that may constitute the form given
to your being by its own inner urge. It is this self-
nature that men see in you, and not that from the
outer.
"We'll leave off here!"

"The energy of Soul, sometimes known as the
master power, is part of the trinity of the ECK, that is:
Wisdom, Power and Freedom. As a part of the trinity
it constitutes the movement, the action or motion of it.

"And as the Tuzashottama energy it makes up that
part of the being which Soul uses when needing action
of any kind. Even thought consists of using energy,
but on a higher level than on the physical plane.

"So I begin here with wisdom which takes up that
part of the trinity that gives right direction to action,
and freedom, the quality that gives Soul an opportu-
nity to move and do as wisdom directs. In other words
one has more than a limited choice which man believes
is freedom he has the chance to choose his actions
and directions without interference from anything or
any creature of the SUGMAD.

"Nobody can think of the trinity in the terms of con-
cepts while on this earth plane. It isn't possible for the
human mind to grasp these three attributes. They are
not shrouded in mystery, but the depths of them are
beyond the grasp of human thinking.

"The energy which gives Soul an opportunity to
have motion with direction is the basic element of all
the universes. Since this is the sound current it must
be connected with all things, especially with power and
freedom. It has to be linked up with these pair of

227

attributes or it cannot function. It must also have wis-
dom and must be free to act in any direction that it
sees necessary.

"There is one fundamental perception, indispensible
to man for gaining wisdom in the many ways of the
divine self and that is to see the SUGMAD in ITS
essential self and the Truth, unaltered by forms and
phenomena.

"Otherwise man is trapped in a net of appearances
and will wander confusedly in a chaotic multitude of
cosmic aspects. On occasions by seeking to avoid
entrapment he will sacrifice all, yet become chained to
a small mental formula, or shut up in a limited
personal experience, or caught up in a trap of reliving
someone else's experiences.

"Of course, this energy is the manifestation of the
ECK's creation through spirit, and the key to life's
hidden secret is the relation of this spirit with its own
existence in the energy forces.

"If man has only an intellectual and metaphysical
view on this, then he is seeking in the dark. So you see,
what man searches for is not mental truths alone, or
truth of thought, but the dynamic truth of a living and
revealing spiritual experience.

"Man must awaken the inevitable knowingness and
contact the true and infinite presence of the sound cur-
rent, always and everywhere. That presence myst
always remain with him as the living pervading reality
in which he and all things exist, move and act. He must
feel it always and everywhere, concrete, visible and in
all things. He must see, feel, sense, contact it in every-
way; not merely conceive the SUGMAD and spirit
here in this existence but know with the same vivid-
ness all existence in God and spirit. This is the funda-

228

mental experience which envelops all knowledge.

"This energy is the omnipresent reality, the one exis-
tence everywhere; it is a single, unifying presence and
not different in different creatures. It can be seen and
felt in the completeness of each Soul or form in the uni-
verse. The knowledge or experience of it can begin any-
where and express itself through anything, for God is
in all, and all is the divine.

"This energy begins to pervade and possess your
being and out of it seems to proceed all your impulse to
action, all your light of thought and speech, all the
formation of your consciousness and its relations, and
all relation with other spiritual forms. By the useful
efforts of this energy you are no longer the little
personal self but that with something of Itself put for-
ward, that which sustains a selected form of Its own
working in the universe.

"Since you must live in this world, as long as you
have a physical body, and take account of its activities,
it is necessary to have the ability to learn what divine
truths underlie all things. You must also determine
apparent opposition existing between the divine truth
and manifest creation, which is the starting point of
most spiritual experiences.

"However, at each point of creation you find that
you are confronted with a duality, a separation of exis-
tence (the positive and negative) which seem to be
opposite and their opposition to be the riddle of the
universe. Later you will discover they are the poles of
one being, Jaram Brahm, connected with, rather by
two simultaneous currents of energy, negative and
positive, in relation to each other in this world of the
Brahm. Their tension is the very condition for the
manifestation of what is within the Being; their

229

reunion, the appointed means for reconciliation of life's
discords and for the discovery of the integral truth of
which you are seeking.

"This is a part of the eternal spirit and also a con-
scious time-spirit bearing the streams of events, a self-
extended spiritual space of nothing containing all
things and beings, a spirit substance which is the very
form and material of all that seems non-spiritual,
temporary and finite.

"You cannot stay in peace or bliss for there would be
no solution to the enigma of the SUGM AD, within and
without. As it stands now there seems to be a pair of
divided states of the SUGMAD. Soon you will learn
that this separation is in your consciousness and this
truth has immense liberative power, for by it you are
no longer bound to ignorance. The separation is an illu-
sion which can be overcome it is maya.

"By looking close, you discover there is the ECK in
both shadow and light, but not the SUGMAD; it is the
ECK who is here with this face of maya. This is the
beginning of a growing spiritual experience which
reveals to you more and more that what seems to be
dark, incomprehensible maya all the time, is no other
than the consciousness of the eternal, timeless and
illimitable beyond the universe, though spread out
under masks of bright and dark opposites for the mir-
acle of the slow manifestation of the divine in mind and
life and matter.

"Now you come to the mystery of the Tuzashottama.
There are two different energies within you; the inner,
silent, moving and observing; the other is the outer
energy which pursues its habitual movements, a mass
of physical activities, a formation and result of force.
This outer energy often enters and captures the inner

230

consciousness of man and no longer does he have a
freedom of self, because it acts without his control.

"As man's consciousness deepens he becomes aware
that this is only a frontal energy making him reactive
to the outer senses. For it is only by the permission of
his inner energies that the outer can exist. Hereby,
hangs the whole secret of what you are trying to gather
from these teachings.

"By the gradual withdrawal of Soul from the outer
world and from the outer activities, one can slowly
change the nature of his physical self. Eventually Soul
will perceive the knower within Itself, and all will
become an expression of the divine omnipresence, the
ECK, the will and knower.

"It is here that man discovers the two poles of exis-
tence of the one being in the Three Worlds, and the
lines or currents of their energy, negative and positive,
in relation to each other which effect simultaneously,
the manifestation of all that is within it.

"It is evident that there is one supreme and infinite
energy the ECK, represented in the two different
sides of Soul on this plane, the inner and outer in
relation to each other. All is either prepared or pre-
existent in the ECK in being, issues from it and is
upheld by its will and presence. All becomes and acts
and develops by the energy of the divine in it for indi-
vidual and cosmic purposes. Duality is necessary in
the lower worlds for the manifesting, creating and
enabling of the double current of energy which is
always necessary for world workings, the two poles of
the same being, the ECK.

"On one hand you find the force of matter pushing
hard at Soul, while on the other hand you feel the Tuza-
shottama energy pulling upward out of matter. When

231

there is a complete balance of the two energies in this
world and a control of the consciousness, one begins to
open to the pull of a stronger power that draws him out
of the confused class of ideas and uplifts him into the
higher power. He becomes illuminated.

"When the energy from the sound current enters
into Soul, every part of the light body is illuminated.
Soul is purified and taken out of ignorance. The energy
pours in like a current of air, working in all the inner
self, dissolving, reshaping, transfiguring all. Bliss will
invade Soul and all pain will become divine pleasure.

"Soul will know and understand all within the sphere
of the degree of consciousness the ECK has given it,
and will no longer need the element of the negative pole
of energy, except to sustain itself to live in the earth
world, and to have control of the body.

"I will continue with this talk after we have had
some tea and refreshed ourselves."

Rebazar Tarzs continued, "One must depend upon
this Tuzashottama at all times. By use of the spiritual
exercises which I will give later, one will be eventually
strong enough to use his own shottama to pass
through the gates of death alone.

"Otherwise, he must have a spiritual traveler to help
him. He cannot do it alone until he has mastered the
knack of leaving the body at will, and without the help
of a traveler.

"After he can do this, then his ability to enter the
regions above the play of death, as man here knows it,
will be greatly enhanced, and he can come and go to
those regions above, retaining perfect memory of all he

232

has seen and heard.

"However, this is one of the minor achievements of
the neophyte. The samadhi of ECK will take the
beginner through to these planes beyond death. Of
course, this solves, once and for all, the most serious
problem which has ever confronted the human race
the problem of death and what lies beyond it.

"This fact of human experience has not remained
wholly unknown to the world's greatest thinkers.
Plutarch, for example, said , * At the moment of death
Soul experiences the same impressions, passes through
the same process as those who are initiated into the
Great Mysteries.'

'This is the exact teaching of the spiritual travelers
and it is the common experience of all initiates who
have made some advance on the upward path.

"The ECK travelers give their charges the true
method by which they can come and go at will between
this and the higher worlds, through the Tuzashottama.
This is what is called dying daily, or dying while we live
it is a part of the daily routine of the advanced
travelers.

"The charges leave their bodies, much in the same
way a dying man leaves, except the neophyte does it
voluntarily. The process is always under his own con-
trol and he can come back into the body at any moment
he wishes to return. Otherwise, his passing out of the
body is practically the same as that of the dying man.
He thus learns how to use the shottama, what death
means, and also what lies beyond death, even becom-
ing acquainted with the future home to which he is to
go, when he finally takes leave of his physical body. He
may also converse with friends and family who have
long ago left their bodies.

233

"This achievement cannot fail to interest the neo-
phyte, since it solves the gravest problems of life and
destiny. It is one phase of the great work of the ECK
travelers. They have broken the seal of death, and so to
them and their charges there is no more death. All of
this is positive knowledge, not speculation, or guess
work. Neither is it the interpretation of any book.

"All the world, the western world in particular, has
been accustomed to think that no man knows, or can
know, what lies beyond the portals of death. They
assert, with apparent finality, that death lands us
upon some mystic shore from whence no traveler ever
returns. Of course, a few assume that death ends the
individual career of man. It is time, however, for men
to cease to think of death in such a gloomy mood. In
fact, there is no death at all. There is simply a shifting
of the scene, an awakening in a new world.

"This, of course, is the matter of using the shottama
energy, that which is used by the Tuza. He must do
this through mock ups, in order to make the step
through the door of death because it is only by the use
of his imaginary faculty that he actually gets any-
where.

"Man cannot break through the process of death
unless he does it in his mockups. He must set the
course, like any other on this physical plane he can-
not leave it entirely up to the traveler who has taken
over the spiritual welfare of the neophyte. The traveler
can give him so much instruction, and point out the
problems of travel in other worlds. He can also show
the neophyte how to get out and return to the body at
will, but he is not likely to assist him in doing so.

"I point this out in this manner. The traveler isn't
going to jerk the neophyte out of his body and shove

234

him up the higher path with force; not likely. Maybe he
will occasionally, but not often, because it is not the
policy of the traveler to interfere with the development
of the neophyte, unless the latter shows timidness or a
lack of self-confidence in doing this.

"Drastic actions are used here and there, but as I
have said, not as a policy. The spiritual travelers base
their work upon the ECK trinity wisdom, power and
freedom. They know that each Soul must learn for him-
self how to use the faculty of imagination, for in it lies
the secret of the universes, and the trinity. If Soul fails
to use it for Its own benefit, then It is crucifying Itself
upon the cross of life, the same as the saviour did on
the cross at Golgotha.

"This is the drama of life. Your imagination is the
saviour of your universe. Use it wisely for this is the
wisdom of the trinity. Use it directly with the energy
of the shottama. Use it freely this is the purpose of
the trinity.

"This shottama is the imaginary image, and the
energy by which Soul has the power to act. Under no
circumstances can It do anything with it for the
shottama is Its own power, created out of the universal
sound current. It is that invisible thread of life upon
which Soul travels like the spider that weaves its
thread and moves along the thread to the areas it
wants to have in its future destiny.

"Now if you remember in your study of physics,
there was an assumption which went something like
this. The force must establish itself, and the physical
object will follow it to that point. In other words, a
thought can fix itself at a certain point and the physi-
cal body will work out a way of getting itself to this
point eventually.

235

"This is the way Soul operates. It fixes Itself at a
certain point or in a certain action through Its imagi-
nation, and the spirit body follows the direction. This
is a metaphysical law on the higher planes.

"The traveler never loses consciousness when he
leaves the body and moves about in the higher regions.
Nor does he forget, upon returning to the body again;
he has a complete memory of every experience during
the absence from his body. Of course this is a bold
achievement, the most marvelous of all achievements
of man. The beauty of it is, that this accomplishment
lies within the power of man through the shottama
energy. He requires little, rather only the knowledge of
how to go about it, and then an application to the task.

"After one is able to leave his body voluntarily, there
is not only no death for him, in the ordinary sense of
some dreadful catastrophe, but there is not even a
moment of unconsciousness, or a shadow of darkness.
One using the shottama energy steps out of his body at
will and in full possession of all of his faculties. He
knows exactly what he is doing and remains always in
full control of the process.

"Of course the ECK travelers leave their bodies
when the time comes for them to go. When that time
comes, they go as they always have, only at that time
they sever all connection with the body and discard it
They go as liberated Souls, rising on wings of power
and light. They simply step out of their bodies and go,
as one would step out of a close, stuffy room into a
beautiful garden.

"When the spiritual traveler leaves the physical
plane, he goes where he wishes, for he is the traveler of
all higher regions. If he pauses on the astral plane, he
uses his astral body there. If he goes on up to the

236

causal plane, he functions there in his causal body.
And if he goes up to the third plane, he discards all
bodies and from there on up, he acts as free spirit,
unlimited and unhindered. As pure spirit, he knows all
things by direct perception, without any sort of instru-
ment of contact, such as he was obliged to use on all
the lower planes.

"A dying man, of course, breaks all connection with
his body when he leaves it; but the spiritual traveler,
when he leaves the body as a part of his daily work,
leaves a sort of connection with it, so that he may
return to it at will This connection is poetically called
in the Bible, the silver cord

"This cord is never broken by the ECK traveler, or
his neophyte, until they are ready to leave the body for
all times. Then they of their own will, break this silver
cord and pass on up to perfect freedom. This is all there
is to that most dreadful thing men call death.

"Now you must remember that every plane has one
above it, and in order to reach a farther, upper world,
the Tuza must proceed in the same manner as leaving
the body on the first plane the physical one that is
by the use of the imaginary faculty. He must image
forth a mockup entry into the higher worlds, and pro-
ceed to reach it, by use of the shottama through the
imagination.

"This imagination is the true faculty which Soul
possesses as its own, and only through it does the shot-
tama proceed. Otherwise, Soul may go for centuries as
the victim of Itself and Its own ignorance.

"We'll leave off here for refreshing the body!"

* * *
237

"We'll continue with the study of death," Rebazar
Tarzs said resuming his discussion. "This is in connec-
tion with the Tuzashottama, the energy which the
Tuza works with in order to make its way through the
worlds and uses as a creative force.

"Now I'll talk about the four groups of experiences
concerning death. Mankind is divided into these
groups or distinct classes because of the typical types
of people who experience one or more of the kinds of
death explained here.

"The first class includes all who have no spiritual
traveler to help them. This, of course, takes in the
great bulk of mankind. All of these are obliged to meet
the emergencies of death without support of any
knowledge of how to use the shottama energy to leave
their body voluntarily.

"They leave their bodies unescorted, absolutely
alone and helpless, under the law of their own karma.
They are to receive payment in full for what they have
earned in the life just finished. Of them, the messengers
of death ask not when they shall come, neither do they
listen to the cries of distress. They are relentless,
merciless, operating under the orders of their master,
the Negative Power, whose duty it is to administer
absolute justice, with no favoritism. As we all know,
this class includes the vast majority of mankind. No
matter to what religion they may belong, no difference
between king or peasant, no matter how good nor how
bad; all alike must face the dark angel and follow where
he leads. They must go when the hour strikes, whether
they are ready or not. None in this class can stay the
hand of death, when the inevitable moment arrives. All
must face death alone and meet its issues.

"The second class are the ones who have had the ini-

238

tiation from the MAHANTA, but who have done but
little or nothing in the way of spiritual exercises.

"This particular traveler will meet them in his spirit
body and takes them to that region or locality which
they have earned. There he places them in a sort of
training school where they make progress under his
directions. If they have done wrong, the MAHANTA
will guide them through the discipline they must
undergo.

"They then continue in their training school until the
time comes when they are fit to go into a higher world.
But in no case does the neophyte ever go before the
judge of death, nor does the black angel of death ever
approach him at the time of his physical death. He can-
not approach the neophyte of any spiritual traveler,
the traveler takes care of his own charges; he is the
master of the situation and since he is an embodiment
of the ECK, none but the silent ones have any jurisdic-
tion over him. He has the power to do as he likes, and
no one can obstruct his path.

"The third class are those who have learned to use
the shottama for leaving their bodies, but haven't
quite attained the mastership of spiritual traveling.
All of this class know the day and the hour when they
are to go, long before it comes. The entire process of
death is under their own control, and there is never a
shadow of difficulty or distress during the process of
passing. Neither do they lose consciousness for a single
moment. They pass out of the body as easily as one
would lay off an old garment. They use the shottama to
project themselves.

"They have practiced this daily so the performance
is quite familiar. They have visited the region which
they are now to live in, so it's like going home again.

239

They break the silver cord, and release the body for-
ever.

"The separation from the physical body now com-
plete, they are free to go where they wish, without
bonds of any sort. They go directly to that region,
under the escort of a spiritual traveler, where they are
to stay for a time, until they are ready for a higher
plane.

"These two classes never return to the earth life
again, unless they so will and are ordered by the ECK.
Generally they are taken upward, step by step, until
they reach the highest world of the God realm.

"It is extremely fortunate for any neophyte, if he has
been able to reach Sach Khand before he leaves the
physical body forever. The way to this is open to all.
They can do it, if they will perform the required prac-
tice of exteriorization. But actually not many do this.
In each and every case, the charges of any spiritual
traveler are saved from the monotonous rounds of rein-
carnation. Their dreary life here is finished.

"The fourth class, which is the last one, are the ECK
Masters themselves.

"When the time comes that an ECK Master wishes
to leave his body for keeps, he simply lays it down of
his own will, steps out of it, as he has done so often;
now he breaks the cord and discards the body as an
instrument for which he has no further use.

"A chela of his, prepares the body and takes it to a
funeral home where it is burned, what you call crema-
tion. The Master has no need for the body anymore,
and its destruction by fire is for his own benefit; there
could be evil Tuzas who are looking for a body to use.
The destruction of it by fire destroys any possibility of
this.

240

"The entire process of the passing of a Master, as
well as all circumstances connected with it, are under
his own control. There is never a momentary shadow of
unconsciousness. He remains a traveler, even through
the process of his own death. The ECK Masters are
lords of life and death, and therefore nothing can inter-
fere with them because they know the use of the shot-
tama energies.

"After leaving their bodies, they rise at once above
all physical, material worlds, above all the lower
heaven worlds, and take up their residence wherever
they may wish, according to their duties and responsi-
bilities, then enter into the higher duties, as assigned
to them by the ECK.

"It may be said that ECK Masters do not generally
remain in their physical bodies much, no longer than
the usual time allotted to ordinary mortals; however,
some who wish to stay have that chance, by immortal-
izing their physical bodies. Some return and find a
body to use many have lived here for only a few
years, and others have been on earth for centuries. It
depends upon the traveler and what he wishes to do
here.

"In general, they let nature take its course, in all
matters physical; although they have plenty of powers
to interfere with the usual routine, if they see fit to do
so. It is not usually their plan to do so, interfere, that
is. They can remain in their bodies for centuries, or
even thousands of years, if they wish and deem it wise.

"Many yogis have been known to keep their bodies
for centuries, and any high class yogi can do it. But
yogis are not spiritual travelers of the highest order.
The Masters observe the laws of this world, and carry
on their work in harmony with those laws, as closely as

241

possible. Their work is strictly of a spiritual nature,
and they do not wish to interfere with the rules govern-
ing a country in which they have only a temporary
interest. They come to this world for a definite purpose
and they stick to that purpose and work as hard as
possible.

"After all, what advantage would it be, if they
should come for anything other than a spiritual
mission? After finishing here, they go on to a higher
work, leaving their successors to carry on.

"All ECK Masters have learned the use of this
divine energy of Soul. They can mockup energy
quickly and use it on the spot, the spur of the moment,
for some useful means; mainly for traveling in the
ethers, into other worlds, for making greater decisions
and for protection. They wear it around themselves
like a rainbow, ready for use.

"This is what is known as the magnetic field to the
scientists of the earth plane. The field itself is similar
to all other fields of the same nature on every plane,
and that is the sound current.

"Now Soul needs this energy, the shottama, for its
own survival. If it doesn't have it, then it will stay
somewhere like a stone, in a semi-lifeless state until
another Soul helps it or gives it consideration to get
out of its state and use the energy for its own good.

"When man begins to lose this energy he makes the
long funeral march downward from the higher planes
into the lower regions. This retrogression of the human
race is due to the lack of education; his religions have
nothing to teach him about the use of the energies to
keep him buoyant, and to lift him upward out of this
world.

"Man has nothing to live for provided he has not

242

learned the art of using the divine energy. When Soul
is without strength or knowledge of its use, It cannot
do anything but flounder.

"It is like a motor without the fuel to run it. It
simply cannot make any advance until It has the abil-
ity to mockup this energy and work through his imagi-
native faculty, or vice-versa.

"We will stop here and take up another subject
tomorrow to discuss!"

243

244

Chapter 11
THE SUGMAD OF BEING

Sri Rebazar Tarzs was extremely pleased with him-
self this particular morning when I entered his little
hut in the Hindu Rush mountains, overlooking the
wild country of Afghanistan.

Seating ourselves in the hot sunlight outside the hut,
the scenery distracted me for a moment, but quickly
my attention returned to Rebazar Tarzs as he spoke.

"No problems/' Rebazar Tarzs said, starting the
morning's discussion, "of greater or of more moving
import confront the spiritual traveler than those of the
potential awareness of his own consciousness, of the
deep significance of the place he occupies in the Far
Country as a Tuza, and of the purpose he should first
discover and pursue.

"This consciousness of the ECK is the primal meta-
physical experience, which, while causing one to pene-
trate into one's innermost being, at the same time
causes one to penetrate deep into the Far Country.

"The Far Country cannot be experienced as one does
the physical universe, for man is such a part of the
latter that he doesn't see what he is; in fact he aids in
its formation, because he is, as it were, an actor in a
kind of drama, the variations of which depend on his
subjective life expressing its manifold incidents. His
affective states are not to be considered as mere acci-
dents, of interest only to himself, to which the universe
remains impassive. No, for eventually he becomes the
ECK traveler also, penetrates into intimacy with the
ECK, participates in the innermost workings of Its

245

life, and gains in the revelation of Its mystery.

"All spiritual science, so the traveler learns in time,
is essentially centripetal It studies the internal
thought from the internal planes to the deeper and
deeper ones, ever approaching the SUGMAD from
which all life proceeds, the one and only Reality.

"The ECK traveler turns away from the world of
human sciences which is peripheric and essentially cen-
trifugal and which makes a study of the visible part of
the sensual world, the surface upon which, so to speak,
thought reflects itself upon itself, in an icy immobility
and impersonal intellectuality*

"For ages man has accepted the tradition of the exis-
tence of two worlds; one, the world of appearances, the
other the world of existences. They have assumed that
the knowledge of things link them to his being, and
have always assumed that the appearances alone were
accessible.

"Everything in the outer is therefore necessarily an
appearance. In fact, reality can only be attained within
and never without. Man must turn his gaze within in
order to begin the most marvelous of all explorations.
Happiness comes only from within.

"Only by entering into the divine silence and closing
our eyes and ears to the world of illusions can we hear
the celestial melody; else we are but yielding to the illu-
sions of the outer imagination and can only reap a har-
vest of bitter misery. This outer imagination is, of
course, maya.

"The discovery of Soul, the real self, is first of all an
act of inward retirement; it is termed the going in,
penetrating the first step into the God realms.

"We penetrate into an invisible world; but this dis-
covery occasions anguish and it is presumptuous to

246

march to the conquest of this inner world without very
definite directions, very precise counsels hence the
necessity, at first, of a spiritual traveler to give the
right directions on the royal highway to the Far
Country.

"The outward universe withdraws and fades away,
as does the most beautiful scenery when the play is
intensely dramatic; soon man experiences the joy of
the revelation; the universe is no longer an object
outside, an enigma to be solved; he no longer contem-
plates it from without, but from within. Its secret is
our secret. This discovery, far from causing a sense of
misery, becomes a source of confidence and of light.
Man will begin to suffer, if and when he refuses to draw
the satisfying waters from this well of happiness.

"After living long in the world as a stranger, he, who
takes refuge in solitude, perceives a new world welcom-
ing him and, by and by, he obtains the direct percep-
tion of superior planes.

"One of the strange phenomena of the times is that
Hegel, the materialistic German scientist, discovered
this when he said, It is in the heart of my own subjec-
tivity that I discover true reality and not in the motley
spectacle displayed before my eyes. It is contradictory
to seek for existence outside myself, since outside of
myself, I can find only an appearance for me; but I
must seek for it in the very depth of my being since I,
at least, participate in existence/

"To understand truth does not demand violence; it
needs inward reverence and a willing ear. Truth reveals
itself only to those who seek and love it. The great pur-
pose of spiritual training is for Soul to become a co-
worker with the SUGMAD.

"This regeneration, this second birth, is what the

247

theologians call the descent of the Holy Ghost. The
inner illumination is united to an infinite love for the
Divine this inner flame, this simultaneous love and
knowledge, when born, rises and grows until finally
through a kind of impersonal ecstacy, our whole being
is enkindled with a supreme desire to reach the God
worlds.

"We call impersonal that state of intuition in which
our thought is no longer divided into a thinking sub-
ject and an external world, but rather the outer world
is abolished by its integration into our personal con-
sciousness. Our personal consciousness is by no means
nullified. Nirvana is not the abolition of personality; on
the contrary, it is the completeness of personality.

"The summit of Reality can only be reached through
the inner channels. You cannot hope to possess other
true riches than those we already bear within us; and
we should use them and not neglect them. Alas, they
are neglected. So familiar, they no longer appear of any
value and we pursue other tawdry chattels whose
possession is denied us; we are so weak that the world
is sometimes obliged to rebuff us to cause us to detach
ourselves from the world.

"The existence of the SUGMAD is a fact and sooner
or later all will ardently yearn for IT. Some advanced
individuals claim a knowledge of IT. Those who
approach this discovery realize that they are among a
select, an extremely limited number.

"Up until recently the western world had never been
granted the privilege of having the revelations of the
spiritual travelers given in a common, universal lan-
guage. Throughout history the philosophical and spir-
itual teachings were veiled. That is why such teachings
were classified as esoteric, knowable only to a limited

248

number of the initiated

'The ECK Master is the God-man. A word from him
is a word from the ECK. He has no need to help others,
for even his presence alone is elevating, inspiring,
stirring and life-giving. His company is self -satisfying,
and living in his presence is a spiritual education.

"All agonies, miseries, tribulations, taints of world-
illness and other negative aspects seem to vanish in his
mere presence, and one's doubts are removed. He can
awaken through sight, touch, speech and thought. He
can transmit spirituality to the neophyte as easily as
one offers fruit to another. He is an ever flowing
fountain-head of the water of life. A thirsty man only
drinks from the water. A thirsty aspirant who has
implicit faith in the Silent Ones, the ECK and the
SUGMAD, and who is eager to imbibe the teachings
and experiences of the spiritual travelers, can drink the
divine nectar. The neophyte, who imbibes from his
spiritual traveler with an intense degree of faith and
deep contemplation, will be immortal

"Spirituality cannot be taught but caught. Once one
has learned the secrets of spirituality at the feet of an
ECK traveler and is enlivened with the life impulses
received from him, it is no more essential to be in con-
stant physical association with him He can have inner
association with him anywhere, everywhere. He may,
however, pay frequent visits, whenever possible, and
report on his travels to the Far Country.

"Judging purely from the trend of present events,
noting the deep under-current of thought, religious,
philosophical, and scientific it is time for man to
come forward with acceptance of the Sound Current,
which can uplift him to a high ethical standard of con-
duct. This would bring a wholesome reaction from the

249

present chaos in morals and standards.

"This will come about by a universal increase in
knowledge and an enlightened conscience. At the time
this comes about, there will be a separation from the
worthless; all systems of religion and philosophy, the
wheat from the chaff, a new social order will be estab-
lished upon the foundation of spiritual, rational and
scientific demonstration.

"As flowers and fruit adorn and glorify the plant, so
upon this new intellectual, ethical and social founda-
tion a great spiritual evolution will take place. This
spiritual quickening will not be caused by the new
social order, powered by the Cliff Hangers, but will
become the fountain source of the new order. Spiritu-
ality is not the flower or the fruit of ethics and social
reconstruction; sound ethics and a just social order are
good soil out of which spirituality may spring up, when
vitalized by the springs of living waters.

"It will be the function of the spiritual travelers and
their spiritual science, ECK, to supply these living
waters by connecting all Souls of the lower worlds with
the living sound current

"We will leave off here for a few minutes/'

"Man's first duty is to know himself," Rebazar
Tarzs said, starting again. "The ancient sages pointed
this out as man's first and primary duty. Worship the
gods, if you must; but let your first duty be to find out
who and what you are yourself.

"So they wrote over the doors of their temples
Gnothe Seauton know thyself! This is the first com-
mand of the ECK travelers. To know oneself, however,

250

in the true meaning of that phrase, as given by the
Great Masters, is a very different thing than the mean-
ing given it by modern psychologists.

"Man has a great opportunity to make further pro-
gress into the universes, for lying latent in his brain is
a capacity one million times greater than he is now
using. The materialistic scientists now assert that the
average man of today uses only about one millionth
part of his brain cells.

"With an awakening of the whole brain, man could
achieve miracles that would put the saviours and magi-
cians to shame. But man is too lazy, too bound by
dogma and ritual to think of anything other than his
own physical comfort. Even the priestcraft has become
contaminated, and wish for comforts of the body.

"When man has subjugated his passion, brought his
mind under the control of spirit, when Soul stands
unfettered and undimmed, it is then, and then only,
that he will begin to get some idea of his exalted birth-
right.

"An ECK traveler can manipulate the forces of
nature as a mechanic manipulates the levers of his
machine, for he is master of those forces. They must
obey him; he is no longer a helpless drifter in nature's
vortex.

"Man is a god clothed in rags, a master of the uni-
verse, going about begging a crust of bread. He is a
king, prostrated before his own servants, a prisoner,
walled in by his own ignorance. He could be free. He
has only to walk out of his self-constructed prison.
None hold him, but himself.

"The ECK traveler always has to contend with three
powerful obstacles to reach his goal, and each of these
has been almost insurmountable. These three are:

251

Monarchism, Priestcraft and Popular Ignorance.
Slowly and steadily the traveler has been obliged to
overcome these difficulties every step of his way.

"Religion is supposed to be a friend of man, yet they
have been in deadly conflict nearly the entire period of
history.

"Priestcraft is now almost an absurd anachronism.
It still exists everywhere in strength, but someday it
will disappear from the face of the earth.

"Ignorance is also gaining despite the schools and
the work of many who are trying to educate the old and
young. Alas, they are going at it in the wrong manner
not in the form of showing man how to get out of his
body.

"All that physical science knows is that life mani-
fests in certain ways, following certain well attested
laws. Scientists do not even try to guess the ultimate
causes of life. Only the travelers, having access to the
higher planes of being where the phenomena of both
mind and spirit can be seen by them, know that with-
out mind and spirit both, no life can manifest on this
physical plane, or on any plane where matter is a factor
in such manifestation.

"Scientists are loathe to allow the assumption of
mind and spirit animating nature. This is no assump-
tion to the travelers, for they can see it working from
the higher planes down to this earth.

"Man does not live under a democracy here on this
plane; so many of them believe they live under a demo-
cratic form of government in your country. But that is
a pet delusion, a tale to be told to children, along with
other pretty fairy stories. It may be good for the ora-
tors, or men seeking office, but it is no more than
maya. It appears real because men and women vote to

252

elect their favorites, for there is no real democratic
government in the world, and there has never been one.
There is nothing but oligarchy, and that mostly an oli-
garchy of wealth. It is not even an oligarchy of culture.

"So much for generalizations. Now who are the spir-
itual travelers? They are the co-workers of the
SUGMAD, the being of ITS spirit operating through-
out the universes, directly under the ECK and the
silent ones.

"They have command of all things, but are not the
actual supreme ones, although they do have access to
the throne of the SUGMAD. They possess control and
command over all nature, on all planes, and can come
and go as they desire; still they are not supreme in the
aspects of the silent ones.

"These ECK travelers have been selected, or elected
rather, to serve on the physical plane in a human body.
They are the embodiment of what the spiritual ones
want an example for the human race, an inspiration
to man S o that he may be inspired in lifting himself
into higher planes.

"All ECK travelers who come to this world to help
others, do so voluntarily they are surely not appointed
by the SUGMAD to leave the heaven world and come
below to this ashcan of the four grand divisions of the
Far Country, yet they are willing to serve the divine
reality in this manner of their own free choice.

"All spiritual travelers are inhabitants of the world
of Sach Khand, the home of the ECK they can live
anywhere they please, for example in the world of the
SUGMAD, ITSELF. They do not choose to take up
abode there, for the particular reason that it is the per-
fect world and they wish to bring all living there, to
the highest state.

253

"Since the ECK travelers are dedicated to the Tuzas
in the worlds below, they do not establish residence in
the highest region of the universes. They leave that
joyous place to enter this world of misery.

"There is complete happiness in the world of the
ECK, yet it is not as hard to leave as that of the
SUGMAD's domain. The travelers feel that by living
here, they are close to the SUGM AD, for direct orders,
and at the same time not far away.

"They are willing to perform for the SUGMAD in
any part of the universe, even in that terrible, murky
place called Hell, which is a part of the lower world
below the physical, in one corner of the astral world.

"Hell is a real place, a mockup by the citizens of the
earth world, manifested through religions in the hope
that the priests could frighten enough members of its
particular religion into joining the church and support-
ing its clergy with a livelihood.

"The business of the spiritual traveler is to make due
investigation of all things first, then give his judgment
afterwards; or to withhold judgment for further light.
Escaping for the time being the limitations of the
body, the spiritual traveler journeys in these higher
worlds, in full consciousness and then returns to report
what he has seen and heard, and otherwise experi-
enced. He proves among many things, that death is
only an appearance.

"Travelers explore these higher worlds, going wher-
ever they please, clothed in god-like vesture of light,
wisdom, power and beauty, wholly unknown to the
common earth man. This is but a glimpse of a real spir-
itual traveler.

"So many men find it difficult to believe in the spir-
itual travelers, because they are not common among

254

people. One of the strangest freaks of the human mind
is its tendency to discredit all modern things, espe-
cially those relating to religion, and to give emphasis
and glory to that which is ancient. It cannot accept
that which is right before its eyes; but it will swallow
instantly what was written in a book two or three
thousand years ago.

"It cannot believe in the living spiritual travelers;
but finds no difficulty at all in accepting the story of
some adept who lived in dim and distant ages. That
men should ever have developed the strange notion
that all mastership and all revelation of truth should
belong to past ages, is one of the anomalies of history,
and one of the most unfortunate.

"The fact that great ECK Masters have lived with
us for centuries on earth and are here today, is one of
the most important, most cheerful and most hopeful
thoughts that man can have. The light of the spiritual
travelers is in no way dimmed by comparison with
those of the ancient past in fact many of the ancient
masters are still living with us here upon the earth
world. There is an adept over seven hundred years old
living within a few miles of this mud hut. He is Babaji
the master of Yogda Satsang, and there are several
other yoga teachers in the same group.

"I have been asked many times if there is any differ-
ence between an ECK Master and the SUGMAD. It is
only that the ECK Master is the SUGMAD's repre-
sentative here on this plane, and through the others.
The spirit of the Supreme One is embodied within the
ECK Master.

"Now the Master is still responsible to the ECK and
the Silent Ones; however, he can travel directly into
the highest plane and communicate with the SUGMAD.

255

Seldom does he do this, for he is concerned in his duties
with all things below the God world and this is where
he finds all the work to be done, among Souls who need
him most.

"He might be called, in other words, the SUGMAD
of Being the little God of the lower worlds, all below
the Sach Khand.

"We will leave off here/'

"This being of the SUGMAD, of course, is spirit.
This spirit is the ECK. It flows into every man, and
each man has that divine spark of imagination which is
part of the SUGMAD. I have explained before about
this divine faculty and how the SUGMAD wishes to
regather it unto ITSELF.

"Life is a controllable thing, but it is through the
imaginative faculty that it is controlled. The imagina-
tive image is therefore the only thing to see. This is the
manner in which the SUGMAD has His modus oper-
andi, and that is only for the spiritual travelers who are
looking at the image of the divine and finding it.

"The ultimate purpose of imagination is to create in
us the being of the SUGMAD, well rather I would say,
the spirit of the ECK, which is the forgiveness of
wrongness, nothingness and somethingness.

"The ECK is, in a sense, the Son of God. Remember
that the Christian Bible keeps talking about Christ
being the only son of God and that he is of the trinity,
Father, Son and Holy Ghost. This is the ECK. But I
will get into this later, for it is worth one whole day of
discussion for you.

"The man who is free in the choice of his concepts of

256

images in the use of imagination is well on his way to
becoming a spiritual traveler. He has learned the skill,
secret and ability of handling himself in the other
worlds, whether he is aware of this or not.

"This faculty of imagination is much greater than
any man can imagine. What is reality on the other side
of the veil of life is imagination on this side you have
little in your images which isn't in existence on the
other side.

"What is above is below! Remember that I told you
this somewhere back in my talks? Take for example
the great astral museum which has all the forthcoming
inventions in it that will ever be dreamed of on earth.

"Many inventors like Edison and Marconi were
brought here in their light bodies so they could see the
future inventions in which they were interested. Back
in their bodies again, after awakening from sleep, these
men believed that they dreamed these and after a
time they believed that they conceived these inven-
tions, that they were figurations of their imagination.

"Not hardly, but this is the way that all inventions
are created in the earth world. No one can think of any-
thing but what it hasn't already been created in the
other worlds. This is the reason that man is so far
behind in his thought power he tries to reason and
use logic instead of the imaginative tube in his head.

"This isn't the imagination as Webster's dictionary
gives it, or the result of some reasoned out idea. The
imagination, as I speak of it here, is the divine sense
the use of the third eye to see beyond this world
beyond the senses.

"By sitting in silence and watching the worlds pass
in succession before you, then it is possible to see all
things. This is the way the spiritual travelers are con-

257

nected with the Far Country. It isn't actually running
out into the distant spaces or the worlds of nothing-
ness, but it is that ability to bring into focus whatever
you wish to see in the other worlds and look at it
through the third eye.

"Actually you don't have to travel. You can become
like the ECK and see all the worlds by letting your
spirit spread out over them. You become the All-
Seeing Eye, in other words. Naturally the ability to do
this needs plenty of practice and that is why the neo-
phyte should never be discouraged with his practices.
Remember that Tulsi Das spent seventeen years in a
dark room before he believed that he had mastered this
practice.

"Many a lama, in order to find control of the mind,
has spent upwards of five years in walled-in rooms
which were completely dark. Nobody should think that
it is mastered in the matter of months, though it can be
done in a relatively short time, mainly through the
opening of the third eye and training the visual
powers.

"The battle that man fights on any plane is fought
out in his imagination. This is the teaching of the ECK
philosophy and it is to be found all through the Shari-
yat-Ki-Sugmad, the ECK scripture.

"There is only one thing in the world, imagination
and all man's deformations of it. It is the gateway to
reality. Soul is either the ark of the SUGMAD or a
phantom of the earth and of the water. Naturally, it is
only a natural organ subject to the senses. The eternal
body of man is the Imagination, his spark of the
SUGMAD, the Divine Body. The ECK is the leader of
all Souls, and we are ITS members.

"By imagination we have the power to be anything

258

we desire to be. Through imagination we disarm and
transform the violence of the world. Our most intimate
as well as our most casual relationships become imagi-
native as we awaken to the mystery hidden from the
ages. The ECK in us is our imagination. We realize
that when we live in imagination, only then can we
truly be said to live at all.

4 The visual faculty in man is the redeemer, the ECK
from heaven, born of man but not begotten of man,

'Imagination's birth in man, rather his awakening
to its power and growth, contains the gradual transi-
tion from a God of tradition to a God of experience. If
the birth of this faculty in man seems slow, it is only
because man is unwilling to let go the comfortable but
false anchorage of tradition.

"When the imagination is discovered as the first
principle of religion, the stone of literal understanding
will have felt the rod of Moses and like the rock of Zin,
will issue forth the water of psychological meaning to
quench the thirst of humanity; all who take the prof-
fered cup and live a life according to this truth, will
transform the waters of spiritual meaning into the
wine of understanding.

"The ECK, the first true son of God, is not to be
found in the writings of man, nor in any external form.
IT can only be found in the imagination of IT in whom
ITS presence becomes manifest.

"Man is the garden in which the only true son of God
sleeps. He awakens this Son by lifting his imagination
to the heavens and clothing men in godlike stature. We
must go on imagining better than the best we know,
for it is all there in the upper worlds, and any man can
have it.

"The concept of the imaginative faculty raises fun-

259

damental questions. Is imagination a power sufficient
to enable man to assume that he is strong? And is it
capable of executing the idea?

"Suppose that I desire to be in the Brahm Lok world.
Could I put myself in such a state and place and bring
about the realization? By all means this is possible, for
the imaginative faculty is that body by which the spir-
itual traveler makes his journey into the heavenly
worlds. It is not as you may be thinking, the picture
making machine of the mind which does mockups of
little things like desires for more money and other
materialistic things. No, it is a heaven sent gift which
can move the spirit body of man to any world he
wishes.

"Does imagination comprehend reason? By reason I
mean deductions from the observations of the senses.
Does it recognize the external world of facts? In the
practical way of everyday life is imagination a com-
plete guide to behavior? Suppose I am capable of
.acting with continuous imagination; suppose I am capa-
ble of sustaining the feeling of my wish fulfilled, will
my assumption harden into fact? And, if it does harden
into fact, shall I, on reflection, find that my actions
through the period of incubation have been reason-
able?

"Is my imagination a power sufficient, not merely to
assume the feeling of the wish fulfilled, but is it also of
itself capable of incarnating the idea? After assuming
that I am already what I want to be, must I contin-
ually guide myself by reasonable ideas and actions in
order to bring about the fulfillment of my assumption?

"Experience has convinced me that an assumption,
though false, if persisted in will harden into fact, that
continuous imagination is sufficient for all things and

260

all my reasonable plans and actions will never make up
for my lack of continuous imagination.

"Truth depends upon the intensity of the imagina-
tion, not upon external facts. Facts are the fruit bear-
ing witness of the use or misuse of the imagination.
Man becomes what he imagines. He has a self-deter-
mined history. Imagination is the way, the truth, the
life revealed. We cannot get hold of truth with the logi-
cal mind. Where the natural man of sense sees a bud,
imagination sees a rose full blown.

"Truth cannot be encompassed by physical facts. As
we awaken to the imaginative life we discover that to
imagine a thing is so, makes it so; that a true judgment
need not conform to the external reality to which it
relates.

"The imaginative faculty does not deny the reality of
the sensuous outer world of Becoming, but man needs
to know that it is the inner world of continuous imagi-
nation that is the force by which the sensuous outer
world of Becoming is brought to pass. He needs to see
the outer world and all its happenings as projections of
the inner world of imagination. Everything is a mani-
festation of the mental activity which goes on in man's
imagination without the sensuous reasonable man
being aware of it.

"It is necessary to realize that every man must
become conscious of this inner activity and see the
relationship between the inner causal world of nnagina-
tion and the sensuous outer world of effects.

"We will stop here for refreshments."

"It is a marvelous thing to find that man can imagine

261

himself into the state of his fulfilled desires on the
higher planes and escape from the jails which igno-
rance have built.

"Until man has the sense of ECK as his imagination,
he will see everything in pure objectivity without any
subjective relationship. Not realizing that all he sees is
a part of himself, he rebels at the thought that he does
not see the conditions of his life as they are related to
his own mental activity. Man must firmly come to
believe that reality lies within him and not without.

"Although others have bodies, a life of their own,
their reality is rooted in the earth world; you are rooted
in the world of the SUGMAD.

"The world presents different appearances according
as our states of consciousness differ. What man sees
when he is identified with a state, cannot be seen when
he is no longer fused with it. By state is meant all that
man believes and consents to as true. No idea pre-
sented to the mind can realize itself unless Soul
accepts it. It depends on the acceptance, on the state
with which you are identified, how things present
themselves. In the fusion of imagination and states is
to be found the shaping of the world as it seems. The
world is a revelation of the states with which imagina-
tion is fused.

"It is the state from which we image that determines
the world in which we live here or in the God realms.
The rich man, the Tuza in hell, the thief and half a
dozen others are what they are by virtue of the states
from which they view the world. On the distinction
between these states depends the distinction between
the worlds of men and the spiritual travelers. Individu-
ally, there is a vast difference in the worlds of spirit
and men. It is not the actions and behavior of the good

262

man that should be matched but his point of view.
Outer reforms are useless if the inner state is not
changed. Spiritual success is gained not by imitating
the outer actions of the successful but by the right
imagination, right actions and right deeds.

"If we detach ourselves from a state, and we may at
any moment, the conditions and circumstances to
which that union gave rise, vanish. Determined imagi-
nation, thinking from the end, is the beginning of all
miracles.

"The future must become the present in the imagina-
tion of the one who would wisely and consciously create
circumstances. We must translate vision into Being,
thinking of into thinking from.

"Imagination must center itself in some state and
view the world from that state. Thinking from the end
is an intense perception of the world of fulfilled desire.
Visualizing from the state desired is creative living on
any plane in the Far Country.

"Ignorance of this ability to imagine from the end is
bondage. It is the root of all bondage in which man is
bound. To surrender to the evidence of the senses
underestimates the capacities of Soul. Once Soul
accepts imagining from the end as a creative principle
in which he can cooperate, then he is redeemed from
the absurdity of ever attempting to achieve his goal by
merely thinking of, in hopes of entering into another
world.

"The whole of life is the appeasement of spiritual
hunger, and the infinite states of the world are purely a
means of satisfying that hunger. The principle upon
which each state is organized is some form of hunger
for the full life, some passion for spiritual traveling to
even higher levels of experience.

263

"The only desire that man can rightfully have is a
right and natural craving to enter into the state of con-
sciousness which will allow him to enter into the Far
Country.

"The spanning of the bridge between thinking of-
desire, and thinking-from satisfaction is the utmost
ultimate secret. We must move spiritually from think-
ing of the end to the thinking from the end. This, rea-
son can never do. By its nature it is restricted to the
evidence of the senses; but imagination has no such
limitations.

"Desire exists to be gratified in the activity of the
imagination, while satisfaction is in existence because
it is the activity of the imagination. Through imagina-
tion man escapes from the limitations of the senses
and the bondage of the mind.

"So you see imagination carries man over the
worlds, where reason holds him immobile. He, who can
think from the end, has no limitations. He creates the
means and fashions his way out of limitation into the
ever greater mansions of the Far Country. It does not
matter what he has been or what he is. All that matters
is what he wants to be in the spiritual country.

"He knows the world to be a manifestation of the
spiritual activity which goes on within himself, so he
strives to determine and control the invisible spirit,
which we call the ECK. He does this by controlling the
ends from which he thinks, lives and dwells in.

"In his imagination he dwells within the ends which
he believes is his proper place in the heaven world, con-
fident that he will dwell there in the spiritual body, as
the traveler does when he goes out into the higher
regions.

"He puts his whole trust into the feeling of the spir-

264

itual wish fulfilled and lives by committing himself to
this state, which the arts of fortune have placed before
him. He puts himself in the ready state of moving in
the waters of imagination, knowing that every spiri-
tual state existent is awaiting him, for he has learned
to think from the end and is indifferent to merely rea-
sonable probabilities, confident that through continu-
ous imagination his assumption will harden into fact.

"Therefore, life is a controllable thing. Man experi-
ences what he pleases, once he realizes that he has been
given the divine gift for his own use and that he is what
he is, by virtue of the state of consciousness from
which he imagines and views the world.

"So, it is man's constant attitude which makes him
master of his own destiny and captain of the universe
in which he lives; and lord of all universes, should he
desire to be.

"Soul is as real in the world of subjective experience
as man's outer physical body is real in the world of
external realities, but Soul expresses a more funda-
mental part of reality. This existing inner body must
be consciously exercised and directed. The inner world
of spirit and feeling to which Soul is attuned has its
real structure and exists in its own higher space.

"There are two kinds of movement, one that is
according to the outer body and another that is accord-
ing to the inner, to the Soul body. The movement rela-
tive to Soul is casual, to the outer body compulsive.
The inner movement determines the outer which is
joined to it, bringing into the outer a movement that is
similar to the actions of the inner body. Inner move-
ment is the force by which all events are brought to
pass. Outer movement is subject to the compulsion
applied to it by the movement of the inner body.

265

"Whenever the action of the inner body matches the
actions which other bodies must take to appease
desire, that desire will be realized.

"To realize the desire of traveling in other worlds, an
action must be started in your imagination, apart from
the evidence of the senses on whatever plane you are
living, to involve movement of Soul and imply fulfill-
ment of your desire for spiritual traveling. Whenever
the inner action matches the outer action to appease
desire, that desire will be realized.

"The journey is in yourself. You travel along the
highway of the inner world. Without this inner move-
ment, there is little you can do, nor anywhere you can
travel, for it is the secret of all things. Without inner
movement it is impossible to bring forth anything.

"Inner action is introverted sensation. This inner
action orders all things according to its nature. Spir-
itual action only acts if it's acted upon through the
imagination. Only by centering Soul, the real self, in
the center of the imagination and projecting it to that
place or situation, anywhere, be it here on this physical
plane or in the Far Country, can Soul fulfill its mission
of being in the SUGMAD*

"I cannot find myself, nor can you find yourself in
anything other than this divine faculty which the
SUGM AD has placed within each of us, ages ago when
ITS supreme imaginative eye was broken into uncounted
pieces and found by the men of the lower worlds.

"All situations, whether human or spiritual, are
already made states. All aspects of life, drama, plot,
circumstance, and, of course, place are in existence
whether we believe it or not. They become overpower-
ing reality when we are in them, be they on this plane
or in the Far Country.

266

"Truth is common to all men, but the consciousness
of it and much more, the self-consciousness of it, is
another matter. Man needs to study this phrase care-
fully to understand what lies between himself and the
heaven world.

"I will take this up today for our last discussion.
Meanwhile try to digest what I have told you here."

267

268

Chapter 12
THE PHILOSOPHY OF ECKANKAR

That morning we sat down for the last discussion on
ECK, the sun gleamed over the world like a bright,
golden disk high in the sky.

The haze hung over the Hindu Kush where the wild
peaks shone like silver cones in the cobalt sky, and the
gorges were every color imaginable in the morning
light. It was a day for rejoicing, a day for beauty as if
this was the world above. There was a hint of sadness
in the soft wind blowing from the high range where the
glaciers gleamed like glittering diamonds.

The visits with Rebazar Tarzs were coming to a
close this day and soon the pleasure of the task would
be gone. It was a depressing mood, and he caught it
instantly.

"The day comes and goes on this planet," he said
softly, while dropping upon the ground floor inside the
hut and spreading his deep red coat over his feet. "It is
a world that has changes, for the day dawns and
swiftly passes into night, and light comes again, in a
succession which seems endless, but always there is
the changing. You never find this in the high worlds
of the Far Country.

"What need do you have to rest in eternity? None,
for there is no body which will ever tire; fatigue is as
unknown as the thing you call disease in this world.

"Disease is nothing more than the tiny microscopic
bacteria eating at the flesh body. They are the canni-
bals. Man cannot compete with them. They attack him
in every way and shape, yet he seems to think they are

269

his fate, that the gods are punishing him for some mis-
deeds, and usually his means of getting rid of them is
to pray or offer sacrifice in ritual to his favorite deity.
It sounds ridiculous but that is the way it is, and
whether you believe this or not, it needs nothing more
than observation with a detached attitude on mankind
to verify the statement.

"Well, it is so, but to get down to the subject of
today is necessary for we are going to discuss the Phi-
losophy of ECKANKAR which you have been think-
ing about for a long time.

"The philosophy of ECKANKAR is that branch of
the ECK sound current which embraces the science
comprising ethics, aesthetics, metaphysics and the
knowledge of the underlying principles of the trinity;
wisdom, power and freedom, as you already know.

"This consists of a lot of points which I have just
mentioned, but mainly four things, which are, and I
repeat, ethics, aesthetics, metaphysics and principles
of the trinity. Broken down, the major points begin
with the ethics of ECK.

"Now I've gone through a lot of this and won't
repeat my grounds again, when I spoke of the parts of
the mind, the four Antishkarans, and the five perver-
sions of the mind. These five were Kama, meaning lust;
Krodha, meaning anger; Lobha, which is greed; Moha,
attachment; and Ahankar, which is vanity, the last of
these deadly five.

"Then I discussed the five passions and their reme-
dies, which were Kama, whose opposite is chastity,
continence; Krodha, which has the opposite of
Kshama, forgiveness, tolerance; Lobha, matched by
Santosha, contentment; Moha, opposed by Viveka,
which is discrimination; Vairag, which is unattach-

270

ment, and last, Ahankar, whose opposite is Dinta,
humility.

"All mankind is divided into two groups Manu-
mukhs and Gurumukhs. This means those who follow
the dictates of their own minds, and those who follow
the MAHANTA, the Living ECK Master. The Manu-
mukh follows the mind, obeying its every whim, doing
just what he likes. He is a slave to the mind and its
passions. But the man whose face is always toward the
ECK Master is the free man, one who is developing his
own powers to the greatest extent possible.

"He is not under the ever-grinding wheel of birth and
death, the grinding wheel of desire and karma. This
sublime achievement is accomplished by the practice
of using the sound current in one's life. The ECK
Master shows him the way, and no one has ever done it
alone in the beginning. There has to be the spiritual
traveler and the practice, called the ECK, the regener-
ating Bani, the audible life stream. There is positively
no other cure for the perversions of the mind none but
the voice of the ECK ringing through SouL When that
holy symphony is heard, these passions lose their
power and drop away, and the high ethics of the
SUGMAD comes into the life of SouL One must
become absorbed in that luminous reality, and must
forget all else. That reality gives strength and will,
until man becomes more than just a mere flesh and
blood animal. He becomes a living thing, a living
power, reborn and exalted. All these perversions dis-
appear, and he finds real wisdom and freedom. Just as
the five passions may be regarded as the five black
angels of death, so the five virtues may be considered
the five white angels of life.

"Ethics are good, but there is nothing unique in the

271

goodness of man. All religions are loaded with ethics,
and the same ideas are taught mankind century after
century in many varying forms. But frankly, ethics
never yet has opened the way to the inner kingdoms.
Ethics may clean the mind and prepare the way to
knock at the inner door, but it can never open that
door. This can be done only by one of the great spir-
itual travelers.

"Ethics as taught by all religions is obsolete. Any
group teaching ethics alone has very little to offer the
hungry seeker after spiritual light, except that which
is common to all religions.

"All religions consist of five basic elements. They
are: (1) superstitious assumptions, (2) emotional
extravaganzas, (3) ritualistic ceremonies, (4) meta-
physical speculations, (5) ethical principles.

"Ethics is a means of mind cleansing: although not a
perfect means, at best it does prepare one to start on
the path of God-realization. When one reaches this
God-realization, he becomes a spiritual traveler, is
united with the sound-current and with it, becomes a
self-religious person.

"When man has gained this inner experience, he has
the dynamic life within himself to meet all temptations
successfully and live the life called for by the finest
code of ethics. To make morality a means of attaining
religion is to work backwards. Ethics is a means of
getting to this state through preparation of the mind,
nothing else. It is neither religion, nor the soil out of
which it grows. Genuine ethics is the fruit of the trinity,
wisdom, power and freedom, and this is the life-giving
fruit of the great sound current. Ethics never form the
basis of a universal philosophy like ECKANKAR, for
ethics can never create wisdom, power or freedom.

272

"For the Christian, ethics are supposed to generate
love, but this is untrue, for you have witnessed the
strange phenomena of an intense religionist manifest-
ing great hatred. Ethics are the best that any historic
religion has to offer. Take ethics out of Christianity
and it would fold immediately because its theories
about God, heaven and spiritual liberation are quite
worthless, because they are not founded on knowledge.
Take out of any religion its code of ethics, and it would
not survive a single month, except in those forms
where they value ceremony for its psychological effect.

"One of the ways to make spiritual headway on the
path to the SUGM AD is to always ask yourself, when
in doubt about any action Is it true, is it necessary, is
it kind?

"This is one of the most inflexible of all laws for such
as seek spiritual advancement. Let no one imagine that
he can ignore this law and still make headway on the
upward path. It cannot be done. The path of the trinity
leads to enlightenment and liberty and the Far Country;
but the ways of the five passions lead to the lower pits
of hell.

"Ethics are also tied in with good and bad karma, as
you know. The underlying principle is that every act
performed must be followed by its natural and legiti-
mate results. This is a law so universal that it is
amazing all men have not grasped its general signifi-
cance and applied it in ethics, the same as in mechanics.
It is recognized in physical science; any student pick-
ing up a book on physics, discovers the working of the
same law in every problem confronting him.

"The law of karma is the underlying principle of per-
sonal responsibility. It is a well known law of physics
that action and reaction are equal, but opposite in

273

direction. This is the law that brings back upon the
doer, in spite of himself, the legitimate results of his
own conduct. He must gather the fruit of his own reac-
tions. This reaction he cannot possibly escape. Hence
every action performed has its double karma, based
upon this law of action and reaction it affects the
recipient and it returns upon the doer. The doer is
always a recipient of the same act. So action and reac-
tion are the dual forms of karma.

"This is the basis of ethics, whether you understand
it or not. There is no need to go into lengthy details
about this universal law. It is a silent worker in the
empire of man and matter, but in the higher universes
where spirit governs all, there is no karma because
the higher law of wisdom, power and freedom super-
cedes all other laws.

"Do not be misled by the old, but erroneous maxim
'The greatest good to the greatest number/ This is one
of the most unfortunate slogans that ever gained
recognition. It sounds plausible, but it is completely
misleading. This saying has been used for centuries to
justify murder in the name of society. Nothing can be
moral or good, if a single individual has to be sacrificed
to gain it. Who is going to make good to the victim?
Who shall compensate him for the deprivation of his
natural rights? If a man misuses his liberty, or his
privileges, he may forfeit that liberty or those privi-
leges; but by no means, nor upon any sort of pretext,
can he be deprived of his life. If society reverts to the
law of Moses to justify the murder of a criminal, where
is its boasted Christian ethics?

"Mental superiority produces no real civilization.
Culture, literature, art, do not make civilization.
Refined tastes do not make civilization. There is a vast

274

difference between aesthetics and ethics and ethics in
its highest development, does not constitute
civilization. Wisdom, power and freedom make civiliza-
tion and these three are of the essence of pure spirit.
Spirituality is always abundant in every Golden Age.

"This is what makes it golden!

"We will leave off here/'

"The second aspect of the philosophy of ECKANKAR,"
said Rebazar Tarzs, "is aesthetics.

"Now in order to understand what I am going to
speak about, it's best to first explain the word, aesthet-
ics. It is that branch of philosophy dealing with the
beautiful, chiefly with respect to its essential charac-
ter, tests by which it may be judged, and its relation to
the human mind. It is also a branch of psychology con-
cerned with the sensations and emotions evoked by the
fine arts and belles-lettres, mainly the beauty of the
scriptures.

"Beauty of the spiritual senses has always been
among the highest perceptions of Soul. It consists in
the qualities of beauty, harmony, and rhythm. Many
words are used in order to describe the sensations of
this perceptive faculty.

"Those who have reached the world of Daswan
Dwar, that plane called the third region actually the
first in the Omkar area, are called the Parahansas, the
swans, birds of beauty and cleanliness. Before this the
Tuza is likened to a crow.

"The faculty which discerns beauty, form and color,
is one of the four faculties of Antishkarans, consisting
of manas, buddhi, chitta, and ahankara. Of these four
faculties, chitta represents the beauty quality of the

275

when mocked up, it leads, compels, instructs and
enlightens; then again it may withdraw into the back-
ground and seem to leave the being to its own
resources. At all times the seeker will be aware of the
divine guide and will know that everything is being
done for the best*

"This master energy descends upon you, breaks up
your present psychological formations, shatters the
walls of the ego and gives you greater powers of vision,
perception, motivation and perfection. All forms of life
that are unable to bear the change of this burning,
fiery energy must disappear and all that can bear it
will survive and enter into the kingdom of the spiritual
worlds.

"The Tuzashottama energy will deal with all that is
good for the traveler and for the good of all. Alone, the
awaiting universal will must choose, action must
change into a dynamic movement of that will, enjoy-
ment must be replaced by the play of a pure, spiritual
bliss. All personal will is either a temporary delegation
from the ECK, or designated by IT. Even after he is
free, the traveler will be in the world, and to be in the
world is to remain in its works. To remain in the world
without desire is to act for the good of the world in
general, for the race, for some new creation to be
evolved on earth or for some work imposed by the
divine will within you.

"Freedom and truth fulfill its movement in the
traveler according to each one's nature. This is the
special aspect of the divine energy of the ECK, out of
which the Tuza has emerged into action, unlimited by
any form of this law or way; for Soul is infinite. You
will manifest the divine moments of truth according to
the temperament of your being, in any combination of

226

losophy, literature, music and art. This part of the
mind is that section of it lying closest to the spirit
self it is called the nij-mind. I am not certain if I dis-
cussed this with you before briefly, it is a sort of
pilot, or gyroscope, whose function is to receive the
impressions of Soul and pass them on to the subordi-
nate minds for their regulation.

"This mind is concerned with the aesthetics of life,
and will deal in this quality unless Soul demands it do
otherwise. Soul looks upon and seeks beauty on the
other planes all the time,

"It is an illuminating fact that all intelligence, light
and power come from Soul. This statement is without
qualification. It is literally and universally true. All
light, all intelligence, harmony, rhythm, beauty,
wisdom, love, morality and power, come from the
Tuza. They are all derived from the spirit and are all
imparted to the mind by the spirit, just as the electric
current gives power to the bulb to make it incan-
descent.

"The Tuza in turn receives it from the sound current,
that magnificent powerhouse flowing out of the ECK,
the first manifestation of the SUGMAD in the worlds
below. This ECK is full of beauty and rapturous wis-
dom which can be gathered only by those who are in
tune with it.

"This faculty is tied in with the imaginative faculty
so closely that it's often hard to distinguish the two.
Take for example, he who sees the beauty in anything
progresses faster than those who do not. If a man
thinks of winter as only summer sleeping, or that
caterpillars are butterflies immobilized, that the storm
is only the other face of the clear sky, he is living in the
world of aesthetics.

277

"When man desires to change so that he may enter
into the higher worlds, he enters into a new longing
and will eventually arrive at that stage of spiritual pro-
gression called the spiritual traveler, one who can roam
the worlds at his own desire.

"Without imagination man remains a creature of the
earth dust, a materialistic thing. Man either goes for-
ward in his imagination or remains a prisoner of his
senses. He is free to soar like the eagle or remain upon
the earth as does the worm and make his home within
the dirt.

"The imagination faculty and the chitta are so much
one another that when the illumination comes to a
man, he is never, the first time, certain that it is some-
thing of his imagination or reality. His imagination
working in harmony with the other faculties of his
inner self does bring about illumination; often he has a
degree of illumination which comes to him as result of
purity alone. These are natural spiritual travelers;
although they are often the result of their religious
training, many are known in the church as saints. A
degree of illumination of this nature is called
Prathiba. This is the illumination of the supreme
genius, the great poet, the superb artist, the benevo-
lent philanthropist. But such people are born, not
made by their own thinking.

"The above class are closely related to those who are
said to radiate a light and a knowledge, the Dharma
Megha. Soul appears naturally to be clothed in bril-
liant light. This is sometimes spoken of as a cloud of
virtue. Such a great Soul, wherever It goes, is clothed
in this mantle of glory. It can be seen by all who enjoy
astral vision. But these are very rare among the inhab-
itants of this planet.

278

"This Dharma Megha is a king of samadhi, an
absorption of the mind into the object of contempla-
tion, with complete detachment, particularly detach-
ment from the love of this world, from worldly desires,
the Vairag.

"Such a person is said to radiate a light like a mantle
of glory. While in this state, the mind is freed from
activity, inwardly or outwardly, through perfect
Vairagya, detachment.

"So to know the truth you must live with the truth;
to live with the truth your inner actions must fulfill,
rather match the actions of your fulfilled desire,
Expectancy and desire must become one. Your outer
world is only actualized by inner movement; it is
through ignorance of the law of the spiritual path that
those who take to warfare are perpetually defeated.

"This inner war between the negative power versus
positive power goes on forever, racking the mind and
body until both are eventually destroyed forever, and
the Tuza must dwell somewhere in the astral until It
becomes convinced that It can take over and control
Its own destiny. The discipline given It will be hard
and long, until It accepts the understanding of the
spiritual traveler's goal for It.

"The whole manifested world is present to show us
what use we have made with the Word, the ECK the
creative power of the ECKANKAR.

An uncritical observation of the inner world will
reveal to us the ideas from which we view the world.
Inner motion mirrors the imagination of man, and his
imagination mirrors the state with which he is fused. If
the state with which he fused is the cause of the phe-
nomenon of his life, then he is relieved of his burden of
wondering what to do. He has no alternative but to

279

identify himself with the aim of reaching the Ocean of
Love and Mercy.

"It is possible to resolve every situation on any
plane of the Far Country by the proper use of imagina-
tion. The task therefore is to think in terms of aesthet-
ics, not the improper kind which is a false picture of the
pseudo-goodness of all, but the truth, the reality in
which man must dwell when he becomes a spiritual
traveler.

"Therefore, imagination is the word of the SUGMAD,
projected through the ECK, for man to dwell in the
beauty of all things. This imagination is the coin of
heaven, and it advances all Souls into events, situa-
tions and positions in life. It is only what is done now
that counts.

"Be therefore, wise in choosing what you are think-
ing, saying, or expelling from the Tuza, because it will
manifest itself somewhere in the universes and eventu-
ally return to you the results. Thought can also be
karma as well as physical action.

"This I am going to take up in the study on the meta-
physics of the ECK, which is next after we stop to
refresh ourselves with tea."

Rebazar Tarzs said, "Now for a brief discussion on
the metaphysics of ECK. This is a study of the
abstract, the abstruse, that division of philosophy
which includes ontology, the science of being, and cos-
mology, the science of the fundamental causes and
processes in things; in a looser term, all of the more
abstruse disciplines, and in a narrower sense, Ontology
alone.

280

"What is Ontology? If I have already explained it, I
will do so again. Ontology is the science of being or
reality; the branch of knowledge that investigates the
nature, essential properties and relations of being.

"The metaphysics of ECKANKAR is the study of
the spirit which we know as the sound current. This is
the whole of cosmology, and the fundamental cause
and process of all things in the worlds of the Far
Country. It cannot be otherwise, for it is so destined
that in making all the worlds the SUGM AD used ITS
only begotten son, the ECK, the highest crown worn
by all men.

"Jesus became known as the Christ; Prince Siddhar-
tha, became the Buddha. So the SUGMAD made ITS
manifestation in what is known to us as the ECK, and
when man reaches this height, he becomes a Christ,
Buddha or MAHANTA, what we know as the ECK,
the shining one.

"It must be understood that the knowledge of
ECKANKAR is not a slow product of evolution, an
accumulation of learning, gathered during long ages of
study. It is not the sum of knowledge accumulated in
libraries, to be memorized by students nor a record of
acquired information. The knowledge of the ECK,
known by the spiritual travelers, is unique. Every
traveler gains the whole sum of metaphysics, anew,
during his travels. His knowledge of the ECKANKAR
is gained by a definite line of individual endeavor and
personal experience. It is not something gathered up
by him from many sources, but is gained from within
himself by the expansion of his own consciousness.
Any man may gain this development and this meta-
physical knowledge, provided he has the scientific
method of the spiritual travelers. In the light of this

281

illuminating fact, one of the assumptions of the
worldly knowledge disappears that a definite certain
knowledge of the ECKANKAR cannot be acquired.

"The most common concept of the SUGMAD is that
of a creator. Man can only think of a creator as doing
something, so he pictures the Christian God as cre-
ating and managing the universe. He is obliged by the
urge of his mind to account for things as he finds them,
at least to try; and the natural conclusion is that some
power created them.

"The curious query of whether man created God, or
God created man is always debated. History has
proven that man created God, but logic assumes that
God created man. Both logic and history are unrelia-
ble. The gods of man sprang out of his imagination. If
you study the religions of the world, you will find that
every God represented in them is so like man in charac-
ter that their parentage is quite unmistakable. To the
careful student of history there is nothing more clear
than the fact that mankind has been busy constructing
gods after his own image.

"The Christian Bible says that God created man in
his own image and likeness, and man flatters himself
that his God is not greatly superior to him. If true
then, it is no compliment to the Christian God to have
a few billion creatures, like himself, rushing around
this earth in the terrible mess created by themselves.

"The world is full of gods who are claimed to be
related to man in image and likeness.

"Too many gods, anyway, like too many cooks spoil
the broth. So much depends upon what one means by
the word, God. Here, in fact, is the very heart of the
question of the metaphysics of ECK. The big discus-
sion about God and the gods in this world is mostly a

282

display of words and vanity. Seldom does any priest
know the subject he is trying to discuss when the talk
comes around to the highest reality.

"The Christians have taken a man called Jesus, as an
historical figure and clothed hi with all the character-
istics of man, plus some divine qualities; he is equal to
the Father, and Spirit they put three qualities in him,
God, man and spirit. A pretty tall order when you
think about it. The reason for this is that man's
imagination cannot think of anything being above him-
self; so he made God a man. Knowing that man
wouldn't follow man, he had to give hi some divine
qualities, and so made hun omnipresent by making
him spirit.

"This is what all followers do with those higher than
themselves in knowledge. Remember that any spir-
itual traveler who is known to men, had certain qualifi-
cations others do not have. They have: first, longevity,
second, omnipresence, third, ability to travel in any
world of the Far Country, and fourth, the protection of
the divine power which ordinary man cannot even com-
prehend. Of course they have also, wisdom, power and
freedom.

"No man ever gained the latter wisdom, power and
freedom by a process of logic, by ratiocination, reading
books or attending lectures. Yet these are the methods
employed by the majority of mankind. The ECK
travelers solve all of their problems by methods exact
and exacting, as in mathematics. They get their wis-
dom by spiritual sight and hearing. Even after they
have proved a proposition, they establish no authority,
except that of truth itself. Authority hampers truth,
throttles free investigation. It, in itself, is an enemy to
progress. The system by which one learns under a spir-

283

itual traveler makes personal experience the final and
only court of appeal. Its processes are simple and
direct. They can be understood by the most ordinary
intelligence, and for that reason intelligence need not
play a part in it.

"Asceticism is one of the more regrettable features
of modern degeneration and a radical departure from
the pure teachings of the spiritual traveler.

"It has been practiced by men of nearly all countries
and religions, in the mistaken notion that it will aid
them in acquiring spiritual perfection. Buddha prac-
ticed it in extreme forms, until he almost lost his life,
and when he gave it up, his old friends condemned hi.
Medieval Christians practiced it. Vast numbers of
Indian yogis have practiced it, and many are doing so
today. But the travelers have never taught asceticism
and they do not teach or practice it today. The path of
the ECK travelers is for all mankind and as such it
must be available to all men in all walks of life.

"Those who practice asceticism are seeking desper-
ately for their release from material bondage, but they
seek in the wrong way. They do not know the path of
the travelers.

"Now in order to make the first step upon this path
into the Far Country, man must first find the Living
ECK Master. He is never too far away and always
watching to see when one is opened for the oppor-
tunity. When this is done, he finds one readily, as if
suddenly coming upon a pile of wealth sitting in the
turn of the road, and nobody around but himself to
claim it.

"He cannot get anywhere unless he finds the
M AH ANTA who will take him under his wing to teach
him how to travel the royal highway to the SUGMAD.

284

He will gain understanding of the principles, rituals
and occult knowledge, but not until he comes in con-
tact with a spiritual traveler does he start on the
upward road.

"The Master gives him the initiation, dips the Tuza
in the ECK, like the mother of Achilles did her son, in
the river Styx to make him immortal. After this he
gets down to work practicing the techniques given him
by the Master.

"He chooses a room free of all noises and interrup-
tions. At fixed hours he sits with the body erect and
comfortable. He keeps his thoughts centered in the
fore of his head, and inside it at the Tisra Til, the third
eye. He simply thinks of this center imagining himself
there, and the attention is held here continuously and
without wavering. The mind must be perfectly motion-
less.

"Think only of your friend, the MAHANTA, who is
going to be with you and help you travel the inner
worlds of the Far Country.

"After awhile, the MAHANTA appears to him, in
the Tisra Til, and beckons. Clad in a white, shining
spiritual coat, the traveler takes you by the hand and
you step away from the body in your Nuri-Sarup, the
astral body.

"At this sublime moment you have stepped out into
the higher world. At once you begin to realize that you
have acquired a vast increase of powers, as well as joy.
It appears to you, and it is a fact too, that you can do
almost anything you wish to do. Not only have you
increased your powers, but your knowledge and under-
standing have expanded proportionately. At this time
the whole material universe appears as an open book to
you, all dark mysteries have vanished. You find your-

285

self in possession of all knowledge of the lower worlds.
You now know them and have power over them. From
here on up, each world gained, gives you complete
knowledge and power over the world below you.

"This is what the ECK traveler is showing you; the
way to climb the upward path into the Far Country.

"We will leave off here for some tea."

Rebazar Tarzs began again, "The principles which
live behind the trinity are the most important aspects
of the philosophy of ECKANKAR.

"The trinity is wisdom, power and freedom. These
are age old principles but hardly any religion or philos-
ophy includes them as a trio; the usual trinity being
wisdom, love and power, or father, son and spirit.

"These actually represent various aspects of the
sound current. The wisdom aspect is that part of the
current which carries the great knowledge of all things
within it and once contacted by the traveler never
again does one have doubts of anything concerning the
Far Country. All things are his in the way of knowl-
edgehe reaches the pinnacle of the peak in wisdom, in
knowledge, and ways of learning.

"Wisdom is the highest quality which Soul can
develop within Itself. Once It has wisdom then all
other things are possible, for It knows where and how
to find all the things of life, all Its desires in the lower
worlds are forgotten. It no longer wishes for anything
for it is foolish to do so.

"Man is the highest form of creation on this plane
and he is a sojourner here. The wisdom that he learns
in his material existence is only a speck compared to

286

that in the innumerable worlds of light and sound
beyond.

"Wisdom, as the mother of all truth, can guide him
into these worlds provided he listens to her. Power is
his source of motion, and the instrument to gain that
divine energy to control all life on any plane in the Far
Country. Freedom is that liberation from all obstacles
and the opportunity to live a full life in the spiritual
worlds.

"Wisdom also goes with a good mind, purity and
perfection. Power goes with the supreme will, mani-
fested in all worlds, and with creativity. Freedom goes
with immortality, with single-minded devotion to the
cause of the SUGMAD.

"While the ECK gives Soul wisdom when It is
dipped into the immortal river of heaven, IT also gives
Soul divine creativity, power, the ability of sustaining
all things in life. At the same time IT gives a love of
motion, which is freedom from hindering dogma and
ritual.

"What I am trying to say here is that all of these
qualities of the SUGMAD which are latent in Soul are
actually so great that we are unable to find words for
them. The system which I have laid down for you to
follow, leaving the body at will, traveling through the
universes, is the exalted ideal of all spiritual systems.
It lays stress upon the unfoldment of spiritual wisdom,
power and freedom. It shows the lofty vision of the
spiritual traveler, and once this is revealed, none want
to turn back.

"Too many touch the first plane, believe that they
have met God, and this is the end of their journey into
the heaven world. "Tis a shame but such self-deception
is incredible. It is likely they believe that God com-

287

mands them to do something, and listening to this
false voice often ruins their lives and others.

"The man of wisdom, power and freedom is hardly a
tender man, but he may be a gentle one. This gentle-
ness gives strength, but the materialistic critic will
hardly believe this; in fits of rebellion he points out
that this is a weakness, a feminine virtue, and not fit
for earthly strength.

"Once man enters into the ECK and is submerged in
ITS life giving forces, then he knows the falsity of this
attitude.

"When he is truly submerged into the sound and
becomes a part of it, the spiritual traveler finds himself
at one with the world universe of universes. He is the
supreme one in the infinite, limitless, the whole of spir-
itual existence. He becomes the center of the Far
Country, the master of all things, the ECK, the Son of
the SUGMAD.

"In finding wisdom, one finds wisdom of the highest
order. You can say that the Supreme Being is wisdom,
power and freedom; that IT is omnipresent, all per-
vading. You, as the spiritual traveler are exactly the
same, except as to your physical limitations. Spir-
itually, you have no limitations. But the body is not
the traveler, it is only a covering, one of your ready
instruments. You may, at will, leave this body and
work upon any of the higher planes; each plane, as you
ascend, gives you greater freedom and scope of power.

"The living ECK Master has no limitations, being
one with the SUGMAD. Only the materials through
which he works limit his actions; in like manner they
limit the actions of the Supreme Being, ITSELF. Can
the SUGMAD converse with you, as man with man,
without first becoming man? The omniscience of the

288

SUGMAD may not be able to express itself through
the physical brain of the traveler, but the traveler may,
in single moments, rise to the regions of the worlds far
above the sphere of brain activity, where his conscious-
ness automatically expands, even to the limitless.
When he returns to this plane, he will remember just as
much of it as can be brought within the compass of
brain action,

4 The duties of all spiritual travelers consist of con-
necting Souls with the ECK, the sound current, and
taking them out of this world to their own place in the
Far Country, where they have earned their stay.

"Second, the traveler has to teach the way to all who
are willing to listen. He alone has the kingdom of
heaven within. He alone can guide the wandering Soul
to the open door of heaven, and help Him enter into it.

'Third, the traveler is to bring light and sound into
the world, that all may profit by it. Not simply his
followers but all people and the whole world. This is a
part of his secret world. None may follow Him into the
secret chambers of his retreat and see all the features
of the great work he is doing. There is not a living
being in all the world who does not receive benefit from
the spiritual travelers.

"These travelers know of the SUGMAD because
they have made experiments and have the proof. The
travelers know that there is a supreme and all-sustain-
ing One, whose chief attributes are wisdom, power and
freedom.

"Now, man was created by an infinite good, and he
must derive his own good qualities from that infinite
good. We must concede, as a matter of fact, that he
himself has created most of the gods and devils, known
to history; yet in spite of this, the Supreme Reality

289

stands out far above all this sham and exposure. Man
is the sum of all goodness, but sooner, or later, we have
to settle the problem of where he got his evil propensi-
ties.

"These are painfully manifest. They must be
explained. Shall they be attributed to the same infi-
nite power we call the SUGMAD? If man didn't get his
evil qualities from the SUGMAD, the author of all
good, where did he get them?

. "This can be explained by pointing out that evil
exists only in the lower worlds. All people should know
this, but they do not understand why and how they
were subjected to evil in the first place. I go back to the
discourse on the mother goddess, the feminine princi-
ple, the destroying principle of all things not in the
sense that man usually believes, for destruction is
necessary in this world. The Kali must exist or man
would be over populated; nature would never be in the
balance. Does that explain the two opposites in the
lower worlds? It should.

"All ECK travelers agree, and all of the inhabitants
of the higher worlds say, that there is one supreme infi-
nite essence, which is called the ECK; it is composed of
pure spirit substance; and the SUGMAD, in the form
of the manifested ECK resides in and permeates the
supreme regions, from whence, as ITS headquarters,
IT projects ITSELF into and permeates all regions
throughout creation. IT is in no way limited except in
the manner of form which IT must take in order to
exist in certain worlds, other than ITS own.

"That form is only an infinitely small fragment of
ITSELF. IT is universal spirit, moving forth in a
living stream, vibrating through all worlds, entering in
and vitalizing all that exists. IT is the dynamic life of

290

everything that lives. IT is impersonal, universal, all-
permeating, omnipresent, and all-sustaining* IT is the
life, the very existence of all. IT is existence absolute.

"To this all-embracing, all-sustaining essence, no
name can be applied other than what we know, the
ECK, the voice of the SUGMAD. There is a universal
agreement among the world's greatest spiritual
thinkers that the supreme power is seeking to find
those who are willing to enter into it and become one
with it, and that in it, one finds wisdom, power and
freedom.

"This is the highest ideal of Soul ever conceived or
formulated in the thoughts of the ECK travelers. And
this is the finding of the great ECK Masters.

"With this I end these talks!"

291

292

INDEX

Aaron's Rod, 111
Achilles (heel), 69, 285
Action and reaction

(dual forms of

karma), 274
Acts of the Apostles,

164
Adonai, 30

Definition, 30
Adoration (Ray), 152
Advaita ECK force, 26

Definition, 26
Aesthetics (ECK), 270,

275-280
Agam (Inaccessible), 29,

147

Agam Lok, 14, 84
Agam Purusha, 30, 147

Definition, 30
Ahankar (execute

orders), 92

Definition, 92
Ahankara (vanity), 61,

270, 275

Akal (timeless), 29
Akal Purusha (Sat

Purusha), 29

Akashar, 29

Definition, 29
Alakh, 147
Alakh Lok, 27

Definition, 27
Alakh Purusha, 30, 147

Definition, 30
Alexander the Great, 58
All-Seeing Eye, 258
Allah, 30

Definition, 30
Allah of

Mohammedans, 148
Ameretatat (immortal

life), 133
Ameshspenta (Holy

immortals), 133
Anami (without name),

28
Anami Lok, 14

Definition, 84
Anda, 15, 123, 184
Angel of Death, 188
Angels, 104

Definition, 105
Angels of death (five

black), 271
Angels of life (five

white), 271

293

Anger (Krodha), 59
Annapurna (mountain

peak), 33

Anti-intellectuals, 203
Anti-reasonists, 204
Antishkarans, 92, 119,

275

Definition, 92
Aquinas, Thomas
(Catholic founder of

Christian philosophy},

153, 203, 204
Arhirit (city), 23
Aristotle, 153, 204
Artha (prosperity), 122
Asa-Vahista (supreme

will), 133
Asana (physical

postures), 167
Asceticism, 284
Asgard (Scandinavian

name for Far

Country), 9
Ashta-dal-Kanwal

(center zone), 120,

216

Ashtang Yoga, 167
Astral, 189
Astral body (Nuri

Sarup), 86
Astral City, 16

Definition, 17
Astral eyes, 215
Astral Light, 168, 173
Astral Plane (world),

86, 136, 165, 236
Astral Rays (See:

Auras), 16

Astral region, 17, 214
Astral and Physical

Worlds, 17

Destruction of, 17

Recreation of, 17
Astral World (also

known as Sukhsham

Desh or Anda), 15,

187, 214

Capital of: Sahasra-

dal-Kanwal, 15

Ruler of: Jot

Niranjan, 16
Astral Zone, 214, 216
Atma Sarup (Soul

Body), 9, 177
Attachment (Moha), 60
Audible Current, 158
Audible life sound

current, 222
Audible Life Stream,

134, 158, 160, 164,

165, 166

AUM (Omkar), 18, 20
Auras (Astral Rays), 16

Definition, 16
Aurobindo Ghose

(Indian teacher), 123
Austen (mountain

peak), 33
Authors (who have

written of Far

Country),

Rudyard Kipling

The Far Country, 9

Tom Lea The

Wonderful Country,

10

294

B

Babaji Master of

Yogda Satsang, 255
Bacon, Francis, 204
Bani, 158
Bani Nectar of, 24

Definition, 24, 72, 78
Beauty, harmony and

rhythm, 275
Becoming (world of),

261

Being, 229, 263
Bel (Egyptian God), 109
Bernard, 204
Besant, Annie, 205
Beyond the portals of

death, 234

Bhagavad-Gita, 41, 84
Bhakti (Bhaktas), 121

Definition, 121
Bhakti Yoga, 168
Bhanwar Gupha

Mountains, 24
Bhanwar Gupha

(region), 14, 23, 46
Bhuts, 104
Bij Sharir, 86

Definition, 86
Brahm, egg of

(Brahmanda region),

18

Brahm (Kal), 216
Brahm Lok (region),

14, 17, 19, 146, 159,

170, 176
Brahm Lok Plane, 18,

152, 191

Definition, 18
Brahm Lok World, 103,

149
Brahm, Lord (Kal

Niranjan), 18, 103
Brahm of the

Vedantists, 148
Brahm, World of the,

229
Brahma, 103, 170, 191

Definition, 103
Brahman (Lord of

Brahm Lok), 18, 192
Brahman Priests, 37
Brahmanda (Third

Grand Division), 18,

146, 184
Buddha (Buddhis), 10,

37, 103-104, 107, 218,

281, 284
Buddhi (intellect), 92,

275

Definition, 92, 93
Buddhism, 37, 38
Buddhism and

Catholicism, 213

Canaan (Hebrew name

for Far Country), 9
Canons of the Christian

Church, 35
Catherine of Sienna

(14th Century Saint),

43

295

Catholic Church, 204
Catholic Church,

History of Saints of,

42

Catholic Saints, 42
Causal body (Karan

Sharir), 87, 237
Causal Plane, 237
Causation, 179, 180,

182-183

Cause and effect, 180
Celestial melody, 246
Center of all light, life

and power, 185
Ceres, 105

Definition, 105
Chakras (microcosmic

centers), 117, 118, 119
Char-dal-kanwal (center)

(Antishkarans), 119
Chinese language (roots

in Sanskrit), 149
Chitta (Faculty), 92, 93,

275, 276

Chiva (Guru), 216
Christ, 104, 175, 256,

281

Christ, tomb of, 193
Christian Bible, 146,

256, 282

Christian Church, 36
Christian disciple, 163
Christian God, 282
Christian ethics, 273,

274
Christian religion, 84,

151, 189

Christian Society, 37
Christian Trinity, 175,

179
Christianity, 37, 38, 47,

107, 145, 273
Christians, 188, 283
Cities of Far Country,
Arhirit, 23

Mersumer Kailash, 19
Sahasra-dal-Kanwal,
15

Civilization, 274
Code of ethics, 272
Columbus, 176
Confucianism, 34, 38
Conscience, Social, 37,

39, 41, 43
Conscious time-spirit,

230
Contacting the Current,

164
Control of inorganic

phenomena, 180
Control of the mind,

258
Creative current, great,

185

Creative cycle, 179
Creative force, 158
Creative principle, 263
Creative ray, 152
Creator, 146, 282
Cross at Golgotha

(Jesus), 235
Customs (mental
habits), 97, 98
Currents of energy

296

(negative and
positive), 229
Cycle of Action, 180

D

Dark Angels

(messengers of death),

188
Daswan Dwar (region),

14, 135, 194, 275

Definition, 20, 69
Day of Pentecost, 164
Dayal (MAHANTA), 65

Definition, 65

(Footnote)
Death

Black Angel of

Death, 239

Break the silver cord,

240

Dying daily, 233

ECK Masters (fourth

class), 240

ECK Masters (lords

of life and death),

241, 242

Evil Tuzas, 240

Experiences

concerning, 238

First Class (group),

238

Fortunate to reach

Sach Khand, 240

Four groups of

experiences

concerning, 238

Fourth class (group),

240

Having no Spiritual

Traveler, 238

Imaginative Faculty,

235

Mockups, 243

Initiation from the

MAHANTA, 239

Judge of death, 239

Loss of Shottama

energies in man, 242

MAHANTA

embodiment of the

ECK, 239

MAHANTA will

guide, 239

Mastership of

spiritual traveling,

239

Messengers of death,

238

Mockups (ability to),

242, 243

Monotonous rounds

of reincarnation, 240

Must undergo

discipline, 239

None but Silent Ones

have jurisdiction over

the MAHANTA, 239

Passing of a Master,

241

Process of death, 239

Reaching highest

world of God realm,

240

297

Retrogression of the

human race, 242

Second class (group),

239, 240

Shottama energy,

23

Soul (Tuza) works

with Tuzashottama

energy, 238

Spiritual Traveler(s),

239

Study of, 238

The Neophyte, 239

Third class (group),

239

Training school(s),

239

Use of the shottama

energies, 241

Using the divine

energy of Soul, 242,

243

Deity, 140
Democratic

governments

No more than maya,

252

No real in world, 253

Not even an oligarchy

of culture, 253

Nothing but

oligarchy, 253

Oligarchy of wealth,

253

Pet delusion, 252
Descartes, 204
Desire, 263, 264

Deva Angel, 50, 104
Devtas (Angels), 104
Dharam Ray, 29

Definition, 29
Dharam Raya, 188

Definition, 188
Dharma, 122

Definition, 122
Dharma Megha, 278

Definition, 278, 279
Dharma Ray, 29
Dinta (humility), 271
Disease, 269

Definition, 269
DISINTERESTED

WORKS (THE)

(Chapter Title), 57-78
Divine

Cosmic sound cur-
rent, 204

Energy, 222

Faculty, 266

Infinite love for, 248

Logos, 160

Omnipresence, 231

One, 134

Self, 132, 228

Silence, 246

Truth, 229
Doctrine of anti-reason,

204

Do-dal-kanwal (center),

119

Definition, 119
Double current of

energy, 231
Dutas (messengers of

298

Yama-India), 188
Dying daily, 233
Dynamic energy, 225
Dynamic energy of the

sound current, 222

E

Earth Mother (Kali),

103

Earth Plane, 189
ECK, 8, 17, 26, 39, 40,
41, 43, 65, 66, 69, 71,
72, 73, 85, 88, 89, 90,
93, 94, 95, 96, 100,
112, 125, 131, 132,
133, 134, 142, 148,
152, 154, 157, 160,
161, 162, 164, 165,
182, 186, 190, 191,
200, 204, 226, 228,
231, 232, 245, 249,
250, 253, 254, 255,
256, 258, 259, 262,
264, 269, 285
Adepts, 108
All-embracing, all
sustaining essence,
291

Audible Life Stream,
165

Become filled with,
165

Being the ECK
ITSELF, 39
Chela, 7, 8

Consciousness of the,
245

Current, 54

Divine, 158

Divine energy of the,

226

Gives and sustains

life, 134

Great travelers of,

132

Has ten rays or

forces, 152

Heavenly, 165

Highest of all

Spiritual powers, 134

Initiate of, 112

Is in both shadow

and light, 230

Knowledge of the, 281

Law of the ECK, 221

Leader of all Souls,

258

Manifested, 290

Marg, 66

Definition, 66
Master(s), 7, 13, 19,
33, 35, 41, 51, 76, 78,
79, 83, 140, 145, 166,
240, 241, 242, 255,
291

Master has three
almost insur-
mountable obstacles,
251

Master is embodiment
of the, 239
Master is the
God-man, 249
Master power and

299

spirit, 163

Metaphysics of the

ECK, 280

Music of the ECK,

131

Music of the spheres,

184

Mystical philosophy

of, 197

Often known as Sat

Nam, 147

One supreme and

infinite energy, 231

Penetrates into

intimacy with the

ECK, 245

Philosophy, 258

Philosophy of Sound

Current, 161

Plane of the ECK, 194

Power, 26, 27, 64, 152

Saints, 25

Samadhi of ECK, 233

Scripture (Shariyat-ki-

Sugmad), 258

Seeks union with, 168

Spirit of all things,

132

Spiritual energy, the

ECK, 197

Spiritual exercises of

ECK, 119

Spiritual liberation,

only the ECK, 162

Sraosha (or ECK), 134

Supreme infinite

essence, 290

Supreme Spirit, 162

That formless fluid,

151

The first true son of

God, 259

The great sound

current, 204

The highest crown

worn by all, 281

The infinite light and

sound, 151, 152, 162

The land of, 156

The path of, 154, 155

The positive power,

146

The regenerating

Bani, 271

The sound current,

164, 270, 271

The Supreme, 178

The Supreme Creative
energy, 147
The will and the
knower, 231
The WORD - the
creative power of the
ECKANKAR, 279
Traveler(s), 193, 205,
209, 213, 214, 233,
234, 236, 237, 245,
250, 251, 252, 253,
254, 286, 291
Trinity, 179, 182, 227
Ultimate, 170
Voice of the, 271
Wave of Spiritual life,
160

300

Waves of energy

flowing out of the, 232

With face of maya,

230

Word of the

SUGMAD projected

through the, 280
ECK, Sohang, 24

Definition, 24
ECKANKAR, 28, 168,

272, 281, 282

Definition, 28
ECKANKAR, Doctrine

of, 13
ECKANKAR, the

Kingdom of the, 193
ECKANKAR, THE

PATH TO (Chapter

title), 151-172
ECKANKAR, THE

PHILOSOPHY OF

(Chapter title),

269-291

Egyptian Gods, 109
Einstein, 206
Electronic beams, 221
Electronic energy, 221
Elohim (Hebrew name

for God), 30
Elysian Fields (Greek

name for Far

Country), 9
Emerson (American

philosopher), 71
Enemy Country (for

Soul), 101
Energies of the Tuza,

221

Energy (See: Primal
Energy), 161, 162,
179, 180, 221, 222,
229, 231, 232, 235
Definition, 227, 229
Energy forces, 228
Energy of Soul, 227
Energy Unit, 181
Energy Wave, 180
Esoteric teachings, 7
Eternal Spirit, 230
Eternity, 173, 174, 180,
182, 184, 185
Eternity within Far

Country, 173
Etheric Waves, 211
Ethics (of ECK), 270,

271, 272
Everest (Mountain

peak), 33
Explorers of Far
Country, 10

Faculty of Imagination

(See: Imagination),

256, 257
(THE) FAR COUNTRY

(Title), 5-291

THE FAR

COUNTRY (Chapter

title), 9-31

Introduction to, 7, 8

Location of, 9

Explorers of, 10

301

Great Masters
(Explorers), 10
Other names of, 9
Regions of, 13-31
First Region, 13-17
Second Region, 18-20
Third Region, 20-22
Fourth Region, 22-24
Fifth Region, 25-27
Worlds above Fifth
Region, 26-31
Scientific descriptions
of, 13, 14, 18, 22, 23,
24,25

Spiritual descriptions
of, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
25

Far Country, The, 7, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13, 21, 31,
33, 35, 36, 39, 41, 42,
43, 44, 45, 48, 49, 50,
51, 56, 63, 67, 68, 69,
73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78,
80, 111, 120, 125,
128, 131, 134, 136,
139, 149, 154, 155,
161, 163, 166, 174,
176, 177, 180, 185,
210, 213, 245, 247,
249, 258, 263, 264,
266, 269, 273, 280,
281, 285, 287, 288
Father and Creator, 146
Father, Son and Holy
Ghost (trinity), 256
Female power ray

(Female ray), 152, 154
Feminine principle

(Kali),105, 106, 107,

108, 123, 125

Definition, 125
Five Destructive

Passions (The), 59,

60, 61. 62

Definitions, 59, 60,

61,62
Five passions and their

remedies, 270, 271

Definitions, 270, 271
Five perversions of the

mind, 270

Definitions, 270
Forces of the no-thing

world, 209
Fortunate Isles (Greek

for Far Country), 9
Four grand divisions of

universe, 184
Free spirit, 237
Freedom, 287, 288
Freedom (complete), 43

Definition, 43, 44
Freedom force, 152
Freedom and truth, 226
Freedom from karma,

66
Freud, 153

Ganesh, 104
Definition, 104

Garden of Hesperides
(Greek for Far

302

Great Masters
(Explorers), 10
Other names of, 9
Regions of, 13-31
First Region, 13-17
Second Region, 18-20
Third Region, 20-22
Fourth Region, 22-24
Fifth Region, 25-27
Worlds above Fifth
Region, 26-31
Scientific descriptions
of, 13, 14, 18, 22, 23,
24,25

Spiritual descriptions
of, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
25

Far Country, The, 7, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13, 21, 31,
33, 35, 36, 39, 41, 42,
43, 44, 45, 48, 49, 50,
51, 56, 63, 67, 68, 69,
73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78,
80, 111, 120, 125,
128, 131, 134, 136,
139, 149, 154, 155,
161, 163, 166, 174,
176, 177, 180, 185,
210, 213, 245, 247,
249, 258, 263, 264,
266, 269, 273, 280,
281, 285, 287, 288
Father and Creator, 146
Father, Son and Holy
Ghost (trinity), 256
Female power ray

(Female ray), 152, 154
Feminine principle

(Kali),105, 106, 107,

108, 123, 125

Definition, 125
Five Destructive

Passions (The), 59,

60, 61. 62

Definitions, 59, 60,

61,62
Five passions and their

remedies, 270, 271

Definitions, 270, 271
Five perversions of the

mind, 270

Definitions, 270
Forces of the no-thing

world, 209
Fortunate Isles (Greek

for Far Country), 9
Four grand divisions of

universe, 184
Free spirit, 237
Freedom, 287, 288
Freedom (complete), 43

Definition, 43, 44
Freedom force, 152
Freedom and truth, 226
Freedom from karma,

66
Freud, 153

Ganesh, 104
Definition, 104

Garden of Hesperides
(Greek for Far

302

Country), 9
Genuine ethics, 272
Gnothe Seauton

Know thyself!, 250

Definition, 250
God, 137

Commands from, 137,

218

Consciousness, 7

Himself, 137

How does one find

God, 67-78

Is in all, and all is the

divine, 229

Is One, 162

ITSELF, 145

Know all existence in

God and Spirit, 228

Message from, 137

-Realization, 171, 172,

272, 276

Realms (penetrating

into), 246, 262

Seeker, 7, 8

Should be loved, 145

Son of, 145

The trinity, 145

The Way to, 34-37

Voice of, 137

Whether man created

God, or God created

man, 282

Worlds, 172, 221, 248
Godhead, 225
God-man, 249
Golden Age, 275
Granath Guru, 146

Grand Hierarchy, 148
Grand Paradox, 71

Definition, 71
Great Masters (ECK),

251, 255
Great Mother(s),

worship of, 124

Definition, 124
Great Mysteries (those

initiated into), 233
Great Reality, 162
Great Sound Current,

272
Great Spiritual

Travelers, 272
Greed (Lobha), 60
Greek Gods, 46
Grinding wheel of

desire and karma, 271
Guda-chakra (See:

Mulchakra), 117
Gurumukhs (follow

Mahanta), 271
Gyatri, The, 112

Definition, 112

H

Hammurabi's Code, 35
Hansni Tunnel, 23
Happy Hunting Ground

(Am. Indian for Far

Country), 9
Happy Isles (Greek for

Far Country), 9
Hatha Yoga, 167
Haurvata (absolute,

303

wholeness,

perfection), 133
Heaven (Christian

Far Country), 9
Heavenly Kingdom, 7
Heavenly worlds, 182
Hegel (Materialistic

German Scientist),

153, 247
Hell, 254

Definition, 254
Hell, lower pits of, 273
Hereness, 178
Higher worlds, 160
Himalaya Mountains,

33

Hindi (language), 30
Hindu Brahman rulers,

37

Hindu philosophy, 170
Hindu religion, 174
Hindu trinity, 179
Hindu Kush Mountains,

33, 57, 58, 127, 173,

245, 269

Description, 33
Historical figures, 12,

58
Holy Ghost, 164, 248,

256
Holy immortals (See:

Ameshspenta), 133
Holy Spirit, 164
Holy symphony, 271
Home of Truth, 24

Definition, 22, 23, 24
How does one find

God?, 67-78
Hridachakra, 118
Human consciousness,

expansion of, 225
Hungry seeker, 272

Ida and Pingala, 115
Ignorance, 36, 251, 252,

263
Ignorance of the law,

279
Illumination (Prathiba),

278

Illusion(s), 246
Imaginary (Faculty),

234, 235

Imaginary image, 235
Imagination Faculty

(Imaginative), 49, 50,

237, 256, 257, 258,

259, 260, 261, 262,

263, 264, 265, 266,

277, 278, 279, 280,

282

Definition, 50
Imagination, illusions

of, 246
Imagination's birth in

man is his

awakening, 259
Imaginative eye

(supreme), 266
IMMORTAL TUZA,

THE (Chapter title),

79-101

304

Immortality, 185
Immortality, Waters of,

57
Indian Yoga Systems,

169

Indian Yogis, 284
Individual Soul energy,

170
Indrichakra, 115

Definition, 115, 118
Infinite One, 30
Initiates, 233
Initiation, 285
Inner body (soul) 265,

266

Inner door, 272
Inner energy, 225
Inner experience, 272
Inner illumination, 248
Inner kingdoms, 272
Inner movement, 266
Inner traveler, 225
Inner worlds, 266, 279,

285

Intellectualism, 205
Intellectuals, 203, 205
Intelligence ray, 152
Intuition, 208-211
Inventors (Edison and

Marconi), 257
Ion, 22

Ionosphere region, 23
Isles of the Blessed

(Greek Far Country), 9
Isness, 175, 176, 178
Isness or the Nowness,

The, 174

Isness of the
SUGMAD, 174

Isness, Nowness and
Hereness, 182, 195

Isness, the creative
moment, 178

Isthul Sharir, 86
Definition, 86

IT, ITS, ITSELF
(SUGMAD), 28-31,
46-51, 64, 80, 81, 138,
139, 142, 143, 151,
152, 157, 158, 159,
160, 230, 256, 258,
259, 290, 291
Being infinite, is
without will, 151
Cannot be direct
creator, 151
Emanations or Rays,
151

IT can only be found
in the imagination of
IT, 259

IT makes ITS own
laws, 127
What IT is like, 127

Jacob (on ladder of

heaven), 193
Jaram Brahm, 229
Jehovah of Jews and

Christians, 148
Jesuits in Catholic

Church, 205

305

Jesus, 36, 47, 108, 139,

145, 163, 164, 218,

281, 283
Jewel is in the Lotus,

The, 112
Jhankar, 21

Definition, 21
Jivan Mukti (life

everlasting), 167
Jnana, 121

Definition, 121
Judaism, 47

Kabir, 10

Kailash (mountain), 19
Kal, 65, 216, 217, 218
Kal, lord of karma, 65
Kal Niranjan, 103, 146,

152, 153, 205, 216,

217

Kal power, 152
Kal Purusha, 29

Definition, 29
KALI, THE WORSHIP

OF (Chapter title),

103-125
KALI, 290

Annapura, 110

Chandi, 110

Durga, 110

Earth Mother, 103

Feminine Principle,

106-108

Gauri, 110

Goddess of Fate, 123

Kali the Black, 110

Moon Mother, 124

Mother Goddess,

105-106

Mother India, 111

Mother Nature, 124

Parvati, 110

Saktis (Saktas), 109

Sex Goddess, 105

Temple of, 109

The Vampire (blood

cult), 109

Uma, 110

Worship of, 103, 109

110

Kama (Lust), 59, 122,
270
Definition, 59, 122

Karakoram Range, 33

Karan mind, 98
Definition, 98

Karan Sharir, 86
Definition, 86

Karma (good and bad),
62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67,
70, 83, 188, 273, 280

Karma and reincarna-
tion, 162

Karma Yoga, 168

Kannic laws, 62, 63,
145

Karmic schooling, 189

Khashatra-Vairya (all
creative; all sustain-
ing power), 133

King of Kings, 147

Kingdom of Far

306

Country, 128
Kingdom of God, 172
Kipling, Rudyard, 9
Know Thyself!, 250
Knowingness, 178
Knowledge of God, 171
Koni (Guthya), 112, 114

Definition, 114
Koran, 146
Krodha (anger), 59, 60,

94, 270
Kshama (forgiveness),

270
Kundalini, 115, 116

Definition, 115, 116

Law of God, 35
Law of Karma, 145,

170, 180, 273
Law of Manu, 35
Law of Moses, 274
Law of Physics, 273
Law of the SUGM AD,

188

Laws and Canons, 35
Laws of Nature

(negative power), 148
Laya Yoga, 168
Lea, Tom (author), 10
Life Current (melodious

BANI), 167
Life force, 152
Life of Soul, 271
Life stream, 162
Light and energy, 222

Light and Sound (rays),

199, 223, 224, 289
Light body (Nuri

Sarup), 86
Light of the Spiritual

Travelers, 255
Lightning Worlds, 214,

215
Linga, 112

Definition, 112
Living ECK Master, 7,

78, 116, 271, 284, 288
Living Spiritual

Travelers, 255
Lobha (greed), 60, 94,

270
Lord of All (Sat Nam),

148
Lord of All Universes,

174

Lord, God and Father,
. 158
Lord God of all the

worlds, 194
Lord of the Universe,

143
Lord of this World (Kal

Niranjan), 217
Lords and Governors,

192
Lower Astral World,

187
Lower Spiritual Worlds*

137, 138

Lower Worlds, 286
Lucifer, 191
Lust(Kama), 59

307

M

Maha Sunna, 21

Definition, 21
Mahamai (Kali), 105

Definition, 105
Mahanta, 7, 25, 78, 108,

116, 139, 151, 166,

167, 281, 284, 285

Definition, 25
Mahanta, the Living

ECK Master, 7, 35,

78, 116, 271
Mahantas, All, 276

Definition, 276
Mahavakyis (Silent

Travelers), 190
Man is a small

universe, 117
Mana(s) (the mind), 15,

275
Manas (receives and

tastes), 92

Definition, 92, 93
Mansarover, 20, 69

Definition, 20, 69
Mantra Yoga, 168
Manumukhs (obey the

mind), 271
Mariolatry, 109

Definition, 109
Masculine principle, 39,

40, 125

Masonic Order, 160
Master(s), 140, 157,

166, 169, 285
Matter or Nature (ray),

152

Maya, 108, 170, 198
McWilliams Law, 179

Definition, 179
Medieval Christians,

284
Medusa (Egyptian God),

109

Mental superiority, 274
Mer (mountains), 19
Mersumer Kailash

(city), 20
Messenger of death

(Angel of Death), 188
MEST (Matter, Energy,

Space and Time), 197
Metaphysics (ECK),

270, 280-286
Microcosmic Centers in

body, 117-120
Milky Way, 222
Mind, 91-101, 154
Mind and Soul, 163
Mind body, 87

Definition, 87
Mind of man, 219
Mockups, 234, 237
Moha (attachment), 60,

61, 94, 270
Moksha, 122

Definition, 122
Moon Worlds, 214, 216
Mother, the Divine,

122 123
Mother, Earth (Kali),

103
Mother Goddess (Kali),

308

105, 106, 124
Mother(s), Great, 124
Mother, Virgin, 105,

107

Mount Olympus, 30
Mountains of Far

Country, 19, 24
Mountains of Physical

Plane, 12, 33, 57
Mudra exercises, 168
Mukan Taq, 185
Mulchakra, (Muladhara

or Guda-chakra), 117

Definition, 117
Musical Life Current,

160
Mystics (those who

sought IT), 41

N

Nada (Vedas) (Primal

music of universe),

159
Nada Brahm (Word of

Brahm; primal Nada),

159
Name of the SUGMAD,

In the, 62-67
Names for Far Country

(other), 9
Negative and Positive,

229, 231, 279
Negative Lord of the

Universe, 155
Negative pole of

energy, 232

Negative Fower(s), 101,

148, 180

Neophyte, 234, 237, 249
Newton's Law of

Motion (relating to the

mind), 70, 100
Nietzsche, 140, 153
Nij-Dham, 185
Nirala, 29

Definition, 29
Nirankar (without body

or form), 28
Niranjan, Jot, 16, 193

Definition, 16
Nirguna (negative self),

199
Nirmala Charan, 57, 58

Definition, 57
Nirvana (Buddhist Far

Country), 9, 248
Nitya (eternal and

everlasting), 174
Nobel Prize, 205
NO-EXISTENCE OF

SPACE, THE
(Chapter title), 197-219
No-existence of space,

202-208

No-thing World, 209
Norseman (See: Thor),

30

Nowness (The), 174-178
Nowness of Eternity,

177
Nowness and Isness,

178
Nuri Sarup (light body),

86, 204, 216, 285

309

Obstacles to goal of

Master

ECK Travelers 251

Ignorance 252

Monarchism 252

Priestcraft 252

Religion 252
Ocean of love and

mercy, 280
Omkar (AUM), 18, 19,

193, 275
Omnipresent reality,

229
Ontology, 204, 281

Definition, 281
Orientals, 222
Ormuzd (See:

Zarathustra), 30
Ortega, Gassett y,

(Spanish philosopher

and statesman), 42

Paradise (Christian Far

Country), 9
Parahansas, 275

Definition, 275
Param Mahanta, 26

Definition, 26
Pascal (philosopher),

204
Passions, Five

Destructive, 59-62

Definitions, 59-62

Patanjali system of

Yoga, 115
Path to the ECK, 155,

284
PATH TO

ECKANKAR, (THE)

(Chapter title),

151-172
Path into the Far

Country, 284, 286
Path of indifference, 70
Path of the trinity, 273
Perfect freedom, 237
Phallic organ, 112

Definition, 112
Phallus, 112

Definition, 112
PHILOSOPHY OF

ECKANKAR, THE

(Chapter title),

269-291

Definition, 270
Phenomenal world, 210
Physical (wonder-
working ray), 152
Physical eyes, 214, 215,

224
Physical plane, 215,

227, 236

Physical space, 200
Physical universe, 245
Physical world (the

Pinda), 197, 206
Pinda (physical

universe), 184, 197
Pinda mind, 98

Definition, 98

310

Pinda world, 198
Pingala, Ida and, 115

Definition, 115
Plato, 153
Power of Word (See:

Word of Power), 112
Power force (life force),

152
Power, Wisdom and

Freedom (ECK

trinity), 192, 287, 288
Prana, 154, 161, 162,

222
Pranayama exercise

(Yoga), 115
Prathiba (illumination),

278

Prets (angels), 104
Priestcraft, 252
Primal energy, 162, 222
Primal metaphysical

experience, 245
Promised Land (Hebrew

Far Country), 9
Psychology, 157
Pure Spirit(s) (Tuzas),

157, 185, 237

Q

Quality of Soul, 211
Quantz, Fubbi, 10

R

Raja Yoga, 167
Ramakrishna, Sri, 52,

105, 121, 122
Ramchar, Lord (Region),

21

Definition, 21
Ramkar, 193
Rays of Light

(SUGMAD), 133
Real trinity, 178
Realization (ray), 152
Realizing God, 171
Reality, summit of, 248
Reason, 203, 204
Reasonists, 204
Reasonists, Anti-, 204
Recording angels, 144
Regeneration (second

birth), 247
Regions of the Far

Country, 13-31
Region of Pure Spirit,

156

Reincarnation, 149, 166
Relativity, 200
Religion, 252, 272

Five basic elements

of, 272

Definition, 272
RELIGION, THE

SEARCHLIGHT ON

(Chapter title), 33-56

(See: Searchlight on

Religion)

Rest Points, 177, 181
REST POINTS OF

ETERNITY, THE

(Chapter title),

173-195

311

Rest points in eternity,

183
Rest points in the Far

Country, 177
Rishis t ancient, 165
Rivers of Far Country,

20, 21, 69

Descriptions, 20, 21,

69
Rivers of Physical

World, 12, 57

Descriptions, 12, 57
Rock of Zin, 259
Rod of Moses, 259
Roman Emperors (the

Pope), 36
Royal Highway to Far

Country, 247
Rukmini Tunnel, 23
Russell, Bertrand, 211

Sach Khand, 14, 27, 84

147, 158, 185, 189,

253, 256

Definition, 84
Sacabi, Yaubl, 10, 11
Safe Harbor (for Soul),

101
Sahaji (Soul Travel),

168
Sahasra-Dal-Kanwal

(center), 120, 121
Sahasra-Dal-Kanwal,

15, 16, 17, 173, 215

Definition, 15, 16, 17

Saint John (Gospel of),

24, 163, 164
Saktas, 109

Definition, 109
Sakti (Feminine), 109,

114

Definition, 114
Samadhj, 167, 233, 279
Samadhi, Nirvikalpa,

212

Definition, 212
Sanskaras, 87

Definition, 87
Sanskrit Alphabet, 118
Sanskrit (language), 30,

149

Sanskrit (Original), 149
Santosha (Shanti), 75

Definition, 75
SatDesha, 84, 147, 156,

184, 185, 186

Definition, 84
Sat Loka, 185
Sat Nam, 25, 26, 27, 30,

147, 148, 158, 193,

216

Sat Purusha, 28, 29, 30
Satguru, 200
Satori (enlightenment),

59

Definition, 59
SEARCHLIGHT ON

RELIGION (THE)

(Chapter title), 33-56
Seed body (Bij Sharir),

86
Seeker, the, 139

312

Self-determination (ray),

152

Self, Divine, 132
Self-extended spiritual

space, 230
Self-realization, 132,

171, 172

Shabda (Hindus), 159
Shakti (primitive

energy), 103, 123
Shanti (Santosha), 75
Shariyat-Ki-Sugmad

(ECK Scripture), 258
Shining angels, 193
Shiva (God), 103, 104,

176
Shiva, Worship of, 114

Definition, 114
Shottama (energy), 232,

235, 236, 237, 238-243

Definition, 235
Sichar, well of (Jesus

and woman), 163
Siddhartha, Prince

(Buddha), 281
Siddhis, 167
Silent Ones, 191, 192,

193, 194, 204, 253
Silent Travelers, 190,

193, 194
Silver cord, 237
Singh, Sudar, 10, 11, 24
Smarana, 130

Definition, 130
Social conscience, 37,

39, 41, 43
Socrates, 153

Sohang, 23

Definition, 23
Sohang ECK (Sound
current), 24
Definition, 24
Sohang, Lord, 23

Definition, 23
Solomon's Ring, 111,

112

Soul (Tuza), 9, 55, 67,
81, 82, 83, 85-91,
98-101, 120, 127, 146,
147, 156, 163, 176,
177, 179, 180, 186,
187, 189, 221, 222,
226, 227, 229, 231,
232, 235, 236, 237,
242, 243, 250, 251,
262, 263, 265, 266,
276, 277, 280

Definition, 265
Soul(s)

All intelligence, light

and power come from,

277

Arrives at self-
realization, 217

Body, 265, 276

Centering, 266

Discovery of the real

self, 246

Divine energy of, 225

Faith in the higher

senses of, 204

Freedom, 62

Group of, 127

Highest ideal of, 291

313

Highest perceptions

of, 275

Hooking up the

forces, 209

Individual, 195

Itself, 98

Is infinite, 226

Is purified and taken

out of ignorance, 232

Learns quickly, 204

Liberated, 236

Looks out through

(tenth door), 214

Love of the individual

Soul, 222

Movement of, 266

New dimension to,

214

Projecting the, 266

Science of the, 157

Separating from the

body, 204

Soul energy, 223

Suffering in

purgatory, 191

The last frontier of,

197

The loss of a, 194

Travel, 8

Wandering, 289

Sound Current(s), 17,
18, 19, 20, 21, 24, 26,
158, 159, 160, 161,
166, 167, 168, 170,
221, 232, 271, 272

Sound Current,
acceptance of the, 249

Sound Current, living,

250

Space, 197, 205
Space God (Kal

Niranjan), 216
Space-time, 211
Space-time bound, 212
Space-time framework,

212

Space-time sense, 212
Spenta-Armaiti (perfect

piety; single minded-

ness), 133
Spirit body, 214
Spirit of the Supreme

One, 255
Spiritual

Bliss, 226

Country, 264

Energy, 180, 197, 225

Exercises, 204, 232

Existence, 288

Experience(s), 225,

228, 230

Eye, 214

Freedom (liberation),

148, 162, 166, 167,

184

Headway, 273

Hierarchy, 193

Hunger, 263

Kingdoms, 172

Light, 272

Material essence, 18

Planes, 176

Powers, 134

Quickening, 250

314

Science, 246, 250
Traveler, 14, 18,
40-43, 51-54, 58, 59,
77, 78, 82, 83, 85, 94,
101, 120, 125, 128,
131, 134, 136, 138,
140-144, 146, 148,
156-160, 164, 167,
168-172, 185, 186,
191, 192, 204-206,
213, 215, 216, 232,
233, 236-240, 241,
242, 248-251, 253-256,
260, 262, 263, 272,
278, 279, 281, 283-289
Wisdom, 212
Worlds, 226, 287

Spirituality
Cannot be taught but
caught, 249
Is always abundant in
every Golden Age,
275

Master can transmit
to neophyte, 249
Secrets of learned at
feet of an ECK
traveler, 249
Spiritual quickening,
250

Vitalized by springs
of living water, 250

Sraosha (eighth ray),
134
Definition, 134

Stratosphere, 14
Definition, 14

Study of Death (See:
Death), 238-243

Subtle body (Sukhsham
Sharir), 86

Sufis, 159

SUGMAD OF BEING,
THE, (Chapter Title),
245-267

SUGMAD (IT)
(ITSELF), 22, 26, 27,
28, 29, 31, 41-46,
47-51, 55, 56, 59-69,
71-77, 80-84, 88, 94,
101, 104, 114, 117,
121, 125-134, 138,
139, 141-144, 147,
148, 151, 152,
157-163, 169, 176,
177, 178, 180, 186,
191, 192, 193, 194,
195, 199, 200, 204,
225, 227, 228, 247,
248, 249, 253, 254,
255, 256, 258, 262,
266, 271, 281, 282
Definition, 28, 41, 46

SUGMAD
A mental concept,
129

Access to the throne
of, 253

Administration of
the, 195

Agent of the, 191
Agreeing force toward
the, 148
An abstract idea, 130

315

Aspects of the, 224
Being one with, 142
Beyond all books, 129
By human minds, 151
Called the SUGMAD
of Being, 256
Can become a co-
worker of the, 194
Cannot be
comprehended, 151
Capable of changing
nature quickly, 128
Co-worker of the, 253
Deity above all
deities, 151
Did not make man in
ITS image, 151
Direct perception of
superior planes, 247
Divided states of the,
230

Draw the satisfying
waters from, 247
ECK first

manifestation of, 185
Entering into the
divine silence of, 246
Existence of the, 248
Rays of light, 133
Realization of, 129,
130

Royal highway to the,
284

Study of the Divine,
127

Subordinates of the,
191

Supreme, 131, 133,
141, 143, 158, 162,
191, 222

The ECK, the son of
the, 288

The enigma of the,
230

The first manifes-
tation of the, 277
The Great, 144
The most common
concept of the, 282
The omniscience of
the, 288, 289
The one and only
Reality, 246
The real trinity of,
178

The seekers of, 128
The trinity of the, 195
Three basic
attributes of, 224, 225
Total ignorance of,
144

Traveler is one with,
143

Travelers see the, 128
True path to, 153
Who can know, 144
World of the, 253
Sukhsham Desh, 14, 46
Sukhsham Mind, 87,

98,99

Sukhsham Sharir, 86
Sumer (mountain), 19
Sun Worlds, 214, 216
Supreme

316

Being, 30, 174, 216,

288
Definition, 30

Creative Center, 159

Creator, 146, 160

Deity, 139, 143, 185,

194

Heaven, 156, 216

Infinite essence, 290

One, 138, 139, 142,

146, 147

Power, 291

Reality, 289

Regions, 290

Spirit, 162

SUGMAD, 143, 162,

170
3wadhisthana Center,

115

Definition, 115
3wami, 28

Definition, 28
System of exercises,

172
Systems of faith, 34, 38

T

Tabriz, Shamus-I-, 10
Tantra, 121, 122
Tantras, 111, 112

Definition, 111
Tantric Cult of Kali,

121

Taoism, 34
Tarzs, Rebazar, 7, 10,

11

Title: Great Master of

ECKANKAR, 7, 10
Personal description
of:, 11, 12, 20, 80,
103, 151, 173, 197,
208, 213, 245, 269
Description of home
of Master:, 11, 12, 13,
33, 57, 79, 127, 173,
245, 269

Tenth door (spiritual
eye), 214

THAT ALONE
EXISTS (Chapter
title), 127-150

Theosophical Society,
205

Third eye (Tisra Til),
276

Three Worlds, 231

Thor (See: Norseman),
30

Time and space, 197-202

Tirkuti (Brahm Lok),
121, 146
Definition, 121

Tisra Til (third eye),
119, 120, 285

Tirich mir (mountain
peak), 33

Tirloki (three worlds),
146

Traveler in Far
Country, 51-56

Trinity (ECK)
Wisdom, Power and
Freedom, 270, 286-291

Tropopause, 18

317

Troposphere, 18
Truth, 228, 230, 247,

267, 279

Definition, 247
Tunnels in Far Country,

23
Tulsi Das (Explorer),

10, 258
Turkya Pad (Astral

plane), 170
Tuza (the Soul), 80, 162,

174, 177479, 180,

205, 211, 221, 223,

234, 237, 238, 277

Definition, 80, 88
TUZA, THE

IMMORTAL

(Chapter title), 79-101
(The) Tuza is immortal

(Soul), 81
TUZASHOTTAMA

ENERGY, THE

(Chapter title),

221-243
Tuzashottama energy,

170, 222, 223, 224,

226, 227, 231, 233,

238
Tuzashottama, the

mystery of, 230

Definition, 230, 231

U

Understanding of

eternity, 184
Universal mind, Home

of, 18

Definition, 18
Universal sound

current, 235
Using the Shottama

energy, 234, 236

Vadan (Sufis), 159
Vairag (mental detach-
ment), 68-76, 270, 279

Definition, 71
Vairagya (detachment),

279
Valhalla (Scandinavian

Far Country), 9
Vanity (Ahankara), 61
Vedantic pundits, 215
Vedantists (Vedas), 14,

171, 214

Virgin Mary, 108, 109
Virgin Mother (Kali),

105, 114
Vishnu in Hindu

trinity, 175
Viveka (discrimination),

72, 73, 270

Vivekananda, 123, 215
Voho-Mano (good mind;

divine wisdom), 133
Voice of Silence, 160
Voltaire, 153

W
Waters of Immortality t

318

57
Wave picture(s) (the

electron), 180, 181,

206, 207, 208
Way to God, the, 34,

35,36
Wheel of birth and

death, 166, 271
Wheel of trans-
migration, liberation

from, 166
Wisdom, 286, 287
Wisdom force, 152
Wisdom, Power and

Freedom (trinity),

152, 163, 204, 223,

225, 227, 275, 283,

289
Word of Power, 111

Definition, 111, 112,

113

Word, the, 163
World of Aesthetics,

277
World of the SUGMAD

(entering the), 44, 45,

46
WORSHIP OF KALI

(THE) (Chapter Title),

103-125

Yang (male principle),

106

Yang and Yin, 106
Yin (female principle),

106

Yoga, 167, 168
Yoga (Patanjali

system), 115
Yogi system (Yogi;

yogis) (system of

yoga), 169, 171

Zarathustra (Ormuzd),

30
Zen Buddhism, 59

Definition, 59
Zenith, 155

Definition, 155

Yahveh, 30
Definition, 30

Yama, King of the
Dead (India), 188

319

BOOKS BY PAUL TWITCHELL

Anitya

Coins of Gold

Dialogues With The Master

The Drums of ECK

East of Danger

ECKANKAR Dictionary

ECKANKAR: Compiled Writings Volume I

ECKANKAR: Illuminated Way Letters 1966-1971

ECKANKAR: The Key To Secret Worlds

The ECK-VIDYA, The Ancient Science of Prophecy

The Far Country

The Flute of God

Herbs: The Magic Healers

In My Soul I Am Free (biography by Brad Steiger)

Letters To Gail, Volume I

Letters To Gail, Volume II

The SHARIYAT-KI-SUGMAD, Book One

The SHARIYAT-KI-SUGMAD, Book Two

The Spiritual Notebook

Stranger By The River

Talons of Time

The Tiger's Fang

The Way of Dharma

The Wisdom of ECK

For a list of foreign translations of several of the above titles,
please write IWP for a complete catalogue.

ILLUMINATED WAY PRESS

P.O. Box 2449
Menlo Park, CA 94025

For information on ECKANKAR write:

ECKANKAR

P.O. Box 3 100

Menlo Park, CA 94025